Technical Handbook - Thorn
Technical Handbook - Thorn
Technical Handbook - Thorn
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
Lighting people and places<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting Main Offices<br />
Australia<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting Pty Limited<br />
43 Newton Road, Wetherill Park<br />
NSW 2164<br />
Tel: (02) 8786 6000<br />
Fax: (02) 9612 2700<br />
E-mail: infoaustralia@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.com.au<br />
Austria<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Licht GmbH<br />
Donau-City-Straße 11,<br />
1220 Wien, Austria<br />
Tel: (43) 1 202 66 11<br />
Fax: (43) 1 202 66 11 12<br />
E-mail: office.at@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.at<br />
China<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting (Guangzhou) Operations Ltd,<br />
No.12 Lian Yun Road, Eastern Section,<br />
GETDD, Guangzhou 510530, China<br />
Tel: (86) 20 3228 2706<br />
Fax: (86) 20 3228 1777<br />
E-mail: sales.cn@thornlighting.com<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting (Tianjin) Co. Ltd<br />
332 Hongqi Road, Tianjin 300190,<br />
China<br />
Tel: (86) 22 8369 2303<br />
Fax: (86) 22 8369 2302<br />
E-mail: info.tj@thornlighting.com<br />
Czech Republic<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting CS spol. s.r.o.,<br />
Na Březince 6/930, 150 00 Praha 5<br />
Czech Republic<br />
Tel: (420) 224 315 252<br />
Fax: (420) 233 326 313<br />
E-mail: thorn.cz@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.cz<br />
Denmark<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting A/S<br />
Albuen 44, 6000 Kolding, Denmark<br />
Tel: (45) 7696 3600<br />
Fax: (45) 7696 3601<br />
E-mail: info.dk@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.dk<br />
France<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Europhane SA<br />
156 Boulevard Haussmann,<br />
Cedex 08, Paris 75379, France<br />
Tel: (33) 1 49 53 6262<br />
Fax: (33) 1 49 53 6240<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.fr<br />
Hong Kong<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting (Hong Kong) Limited<br />
Unit 4301, Level 43, Tower 1,<br />
Metroplaza,223 Hing Fong Road,<br />
Kwai Chung, N.T., Hong Kong<br />
Tel: (852) 2578 4303<br />
Fax: (852) 2887 0247<br />
E-mail: info.hk@thornlighting.com<br />
India<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting India Pvt. Ltd<br />
RH-2 Nirav CHS, 636A, 90 Ft. D.P. Road,<br />
Near Thakur Polytechnic<br />
400 101 Mumbai, India<br />
Tel: (91) 22285 41056<br />
Fax: (91) 22285 1120<br />
E-mail: international_sales@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.com<br />
Ireland<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting (Ireland) Limited<br />
320 Harold’s Cross Road,<br />
Dublin 6W, Ireland<br />
Tel: (353) 1 4922 877<br />
Fax: (353) 1 4922 724<br />
E-mail: dublinsales@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.co.uk<br />
Italy<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Europhane Spa<br />
Via G Di Vittorio, 2, Cadriano di Granarolo,<br />
Bologna 40057, Italy<br />
Tel: (39) 051 763391<br />
Fax: (39) 051 763088<br />
E-mail: info@thornlighting.it<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.it<br />
New Zealand<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting (NZ) Ltd<br />
399 Rosebank Road, P O Box 71134,<br />
Rosebank, Auckland 7, New Zealand<br />
Tel: (64) 9 828 7155<br />
Fax: (64) 9 828 7591<br />
E-mail: info.NZ@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.co.nz<br />
Norway<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting AS<br />
Strømsveien 344, 1081 Oslo,<br />
Norway<br />
Tel: (47) 22 82 07 00<br />
Fax: (47) 22 82 07 01<br />
E-mail: info.no@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.no<br />
Poland<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting Polska Sp.z.o.o.,<br />
Ul. Gazowa 26A, Wrocław 50-513,<br />
Poland<br />
Tel: (48) 71 7833 740<br />
Fax: (48) 71 3366 029<br />
E-mail: thorn.pl@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.pl<br />
Russia<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting<br />
Novoslobodskaya Str., 21, office 406<br />
Business Center “Novoslobodskaya 21”,<br />
Moscow 127030, Russia<br />
Tel: (7) 495 981 35 41<br />
Fax: (7) 495 981 35 42<br />
E-mail: anna.kisteneva@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.ru<br />
Singapore<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting (Singapore) Pte Ltd<br />
5 Kaki Bukit Crescent, 04-02 Koyotech<br />
Building, 416238 Singapore<br />
Tel: (65) 6844 5800<br />
Fax: (65) 6745 7707<br />
E-mail: info.sg@thornlighting.com<br />
Sweden<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting AB<br />
Industrigatan, Box 305, SE-261 23<br />
Landskrona, Sweden<br />
Tel: (46) 418 520 00<br />
Fax: (46) 418 265 74<br />
E-mail: info.se@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.se<br />
United Arab Emirates<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting Ltd Dubai<br />
Al Shoala Building, Office 301,<br />
Block E, Airport road, P.O. Box 1200,<br />
Deira, Dubai, UAE<br />
Tel: (971) 4 2940181<br />
Fax: (971) 4 2948838<br />
E-mail: tlluae@emirates.net.ae<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.com<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Gulf LLC<br />
Al Shoala Building, Office 301/2, Block E,<br />
Airport road, P.O. Box 22672, Deira,<br />
Dubai, UAE<br />
Tel: (971) 4 2948938<br />
Fax: (971) 4 2948838<br />
E-mail: thorng@emirates.net.ae<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.com<br />
United Kingdom<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting Limited<br />
Silver Screens, Elstree Way, Borehamwood,<br />
Hertfordshire, WD6 1FE, UK<br />
Tel: (44) 20 8732 9800<br />
Fax: (44) 20 8732 9801<br />
E-mail: brochures.uk@thornlighting.com<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Olympics Sports Lighting Team<br />
Tel: 07796 303176<br />
E-mail: olympicsteamuk@thornlighting.com<br />
International Sales<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting Limited<br />
Silver Screens, Elstree Way, Borehamwood,<br />
Hertfordshire, WD6 1FE, UK<br />
Tel: (44) 20 8732 1915<br />
Fax: (44) 20 8732 1911<br />
E-mail: international_sales@thornlighting.com<br />
Website: www.thornlighting.com<br />
www.thornlighting.com<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting is constantly developing and improving its products. All descriptions, illustrations, drawings and specifications in this publication present only<br />
general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. The right is reserved to change specifications without prior notification or public announcement.<br />
All goods supplied by the company are supplied subject to the company’s General Conditions of Sale, a copy of which is available on request.<br />
All measurements are in millimetres and weights in kilograms unless otherwise stated.<br />
Publication Date: 07/09<br />
<strong>Technical</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong><br />
<strong>Technical</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong>
Editor<br />
Peter <strong>Thorn</strong>s BSc(Hons) CEng MCIBSE MSLL<br />
Contributors<br />
Patricia El-Baamrani; Lou Bedocs; Karl Flax; Stefan Hauer;<br />
Pat Holley; Hugh King; Jan-Erik Jerleke; Iain Macrae;<br />
Robin Ostlin; Paul Stranks<br />
This is the fifth edition of the <strong>Technical</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong><br />
Copyright © <strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting. All rights reserved. No part of<br />
this publication may be reproduced in any form, without<br />
prior permission in writing from <strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting, except for the<br />
quotation of brief passages in reviews. While <strong>Thorn</strong> has made<br />
every effort to credit the copyright owners for the illustrations<br />
and photographs used herein, there may be omissions, for<br />
which the company apologises.<br />
Picture credits:<br />
Danny Maddocks; Chris Gascoigne; Mike Gee;<br />
Richard Seymour and Alan Turner<br />
Graphics: Juice Creative<br />
Price £15 GBP/€20 EUR. Not for resale.<br />
|<br />
Glossary<br />
Spill Light<br />
Stray light from a luminaire that incidentally illuminates nearby<br />
objects or surfaces within the public environment. Can be a<br />
cause of ‘light trespass’.<br />
Spine<br />
See batten<br />
Track<br />
A linear bus bar system providing one to three main circuits or<br />
a low voltage supply to which display lighting (spotlights) can<br />
be connected and disconnected at will along the length of the<br />
system.<br />
Transformer<br />
Transformers reduce the line voltage (for instance 230V) to<br />
the lower voltage required for operating low-voltage halogen<br />
lamps. This will generally be 12V.<br />
Trunking<br />
Trunking usually provides mechanical fixings for the luminaires<br />
as well as electrical connection.<br />
Uniformity<br />
The ratio of the minimum illuminance to the average illuminance<br />
over the specified area.<br />
Visual performance<br />
The ability to perceive detail and carry out the visual tasks.<br />
Visual comfort<br />
Our feeling of ease or well being within the visual field.<br />
Visual satisfaction<br />
The qualitative impression of a lit space.<br />
Glossary |<br />
251
Contents<br />
1 Introduction 5<br />
2 The Mechanics of Seeing 7<br />
2.1 What is light? 7<br />
2.2 The eye and vision 7<br />
2.3 Lighting fundamentals 8<br />
3 Controlling Light 9<br />
3.1 Reflection 9<br />
3.2 Transmission 10<br />
3.3 Refraction 10<br />
4 Australian Standards 11<br />
4.1 Luminaire Manufacture 11<br />
4.2 Interior Lighting Standards 11<br />
4.3 Building Code of Australia 11<br />
4.4 Exterior Lighting Standards 12<br />
5 Recommendations for Good Lighting 13<br />
5.1 Indoor workplaces 13<br />
5.2 Outdoor workplaces 13<br />
5.3 Sports 13<br />
5.4 Emergency 13<br />
5.5 Roads 13<br />
5.6 Tunnel 13<br />
6 Applications and Techniques 41<br />
6.1 General Considerations 41<br />
6.2 Office 44<br />
6.3 Education 50<br />
6.4 Industry indoor 57<br />
6.5 Industry outdoor 64<br />
6.6 Healthcare 71<br />
6.7 Super/hypermarket 80<br />
6.8 Road lighting 88<br />
6.9 Urban – decorative roadlighting and amenity areas 96<br />
6.10 Urban – architectural floodlighting 107<br />
6.11 Sports lighting 111<br />
7 Specific Techniques 127<br />
7.1 Indoor lighting controls (ILC) 127<br />
7.2 Lighting for display screen equipment 133<br />
7.3 Light for learning 135<br />
7.4 Emergency lighting 139<br />
7.5 Low mount road lighting 147<br />
7.6 Road tunnel lighting 151<br />
Contents | 3
4 |<br />
7.7 Lighting maintenance 154<br />
7.8 Control of obtrusive light 164<br />
7.9 Lighting for crime prevention 169<br />
7.10 Lighting and health 173<br />
7.11 Sustainability 176<br />
7.12 Outdoor lighting controls (OLC) 179<br />
8 Checklists 183<br />
8.1 Life cycle analysis 183<br />
8.2 Economics 185<br />
8.3 Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI) 187<br />
9 Lamps, LEDs and Circuits 193<br />
9.1 Choosing the right lamp 193<br />
9.2 Tungsten halogen lamps 195<br />
9.3 Fluorescent lamps 195<br />
9.4 Compact fluorescent lamps 198<br />
9.5 Metal halide lamps 199<br />
9.6 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps 200<br />
9.7 Mercury vapour lamps 201<br />
9.8 Induction lamps 202<br />
9.9 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 202<br />
9.10 Lamp coding systems – LBS/ILCOS 206<br />
9.11 Characteristic values of the major lamps 208<br />
9.12 Energy efficiency of luminaires 221<br />
9.13 Circuits 221<br />
9.14 Properties of electronic ballasts 225<br />
9.15 Voltage drop 227<br />
9.16 Fusing 228<br />
9.17 Wiring regulations 229<br />
9.18 Fault detection 231<br />
10 Standards and Directives 235<br />
10.1 Directives 235<br />
10.2 Standards 237<br />
10.3 Quality and safety marks 239<br />
10.4 Product/corrosion compatibility guide 242<br />
11 Tools 245<br />
11.1 Tools 245<br />
12 Glossary 248
1 Introduction<br />
Light is life, without light we could not live.<br />
Our human physiology is based upon light and<br />
the complex structure of our earth relies upon<br />
light to function. And as we have progressed<br />
technologically we have taken this further,<br />
turning the dark into light, from using fire to<br />
the electric light. Electric lighting is the basis for<br />
our modern society, turning darkness into light<br />
in windowless or deep-plan offices, in our city<br />
streets at night, in numerous leisure and amenity<br />
facilities. Our society exists as it does because<br />
of light. Our patterns of work and leisure are<br />
made possible through our ability to control our<br />
environment and supply light on demand.<br />
As we have developed the technology of lighting we have<br />
also developed our understanding of how to use light. Through<br />
standards we lay down limits for safety and adequacy, through<br />
guides we direct lighting toward established good practice,<br />
show how to transcend the adequate. We have learnt how to<br />
give light meaning, transforming spaces by giving them a lit<br />
atmosphere, applying light to give beauty to a scene.<br />
But the use of light is constantly challenging us. It is no longer<br />
enough to ensure good task visibility, or a comfortable<br />
environment. It is not even enough to produce an environment<br />
that gives a sense of well-being. We need to do all these,<br />
but also in a way that minimises harm to the environment.<br />
Therefore stricter rules are being applied to product design, use<br />
and disposal. We have to minimise the carbon footprint of a<br />
product or an installation and maximise sustainability. Therefore,<br />
all aspects of design, whether for a luminaire or lighting<br />
installation, is a balance of factors, a balance of performance,<br />
efficiency and comfort (PEC).<br />
Performance is the achievement of visual effectiveness, meeting<br />
requirements and targets. It is quantifiable through known<br />
lighting measures such as illuminance, luminance, glare rating,<br />
colour rendition and uniformity. These measures are generally<br />
defined through national and international standards and<br />
recommendations.<br />
Fig. 1.1 Amenity lighting creating a pleasant<br />
balanced scene<br />
Introduction | 5
Efficiency is conserving energy and effort, reducing CO2 emissions and waste, producing a system that is practical and<br />
efficient to install, operate and maintain. Efficiency can also be<br />
quantified, through units such as lumens/watt, cost/m2, CO2 kg/year, percent recycled element, percent maintenance link,<br />
and many others. Some of these measures are defined through<br />
national and international standards and recommendations,<br />
such as energy efficiency or the ecodesign of products, whilst<br />
others are concerns for the end-user, such as cost.<br />
Comfort is the achievement of complete satisfaction, providing<br />
a stimulating atmosphere that gives sustainable wellness. The<br />
criteria for assessing comfort are subjective and are the criteria<br />
that differentiate the design, that give the design its individuality,<br />
its own character. Is it calming/stimulating/inspiring,<br />
welcoming and pleasant, reassuring, fulfilling? Does it have a<br />
pleasing flow of light and give a well balanced ambient? Do<br />
all parts of the design complement each other, the architecture<br />
of the space, the lit effect, and the physical design of the<br />
luminaires? This is the point where the engineering and art are<br />
blended to produce good lighting.<br />
So in their job the designer needs to know a wide selection<br />
of information and how to blend this to deliver better lighting,<br />
with better efficiency and a better environment in a sustainable<br />
manner. This is the PEC philosophy, and in this handbook we<br />
supply some of this information to help the designer in their task.<br />
6 | Introduction
2 The Mechanics of Seeing<br />
Our discernment of the world is via our five<br />
senses of sight, hearing, taste, touch and smell.<br />
Of these sight is the most important. Over 80 per<br />
cent of our experience of the world comes via<br />
our sight. But how do we see?<br />
2.1 What is light?<br />
To see we need light, and light is an emission of<br />
electromagnetic radiation. The electromagnetic spectrum varies<br />
from radio waves through infrared, ultra-violet, X-rays and finally<br />
to gamma rays, and light is a very small part of this spectrum<br />
with wavelengths from 380 to 760 nanometres (1nm=10-9m). This is the part of the spectrum whose rays are visible to the<br />
human eye and lies between infrared and ultra-violet. Light may<br />
be further divided as the wavelength of the light relates to the<br />
colour we see. As the wavelength changes so does the colour<br />
of the light, from blue at 400nm to red at 700nm.<br />
2.2 The eye and vision<br />
Rays of light entering the eye are directed onto the retina, which<br />
is a layer of light sensitive cells within the eye. The retina is<br />
composed of two basic types of light sensitive cells, the rods<br />
and the cones. These cells have different properties. Cones<br />
operate during the day and enable us to see in detailed colour<br />
(photopic vision). As the light level drops, say to that of a well-lit<br />
street, the cones become less effective and are assisted by the<br />
more sensitive rods (mesopic vision). However, the rods only<br />
give black and white vision. Therefore we see a less brightly<br />
coloured view as we are using a mixture of the rod and cone<br />
cells, the relative mixture varying depending upon the actual<br />
light level. At much lower light levels, say that of dim moonlight,<br />
the cones cease to function at all, and our vision becomes<br />
totally monochromatic using just the rods (scotopic vision). The<br />
unit for this measure of light is the lumen.<br />
These concepts are important as we consider the appearance<br />
of a space under different lighting conditions with respect to the<br />
amount of light and the colour spectrum of the light.<br />
Other<br />
senses<br />
20%<br />
Fig. 2.1 The importance of vision<br />
WAVELENGTH (nanometers)<br />
380 400 500 600 700 760<br />
GAMMA<br />
RAYS<br />
X<br />
RAYS<br />
ULTRA<br />
VOILET<br />
INFRA<br />
RED<br />
Fig. 2.2 The electromagnetic spectrum<br />
100%<br />
100%<br />
Scotopic vision<br />
(dark adapted<br />
eye)<br />
VISIBLE LIGHT<br />
Vision<br />
80%<br />
RADIO<br />
Photopic<br />
vision (day)<br />
400 500 600 700 800<br />
Photopic<br />
vision (day)<br />
400 500 600 700 800<br />
Fig. 2.3 Photopic and Scotopic visual response<br />
curves<br />
The Mechanics of Seeing | 7
2.3 Lighting fundamentals<br />
2.3.1 Illuminance (E) - This is a measure of the amount of<br />
light falling onto an object, and is measured in lux. It is the<br />
amount of luminous flux (F) that is received by a surface of given<br />
area.<br />
2.3.2 Luminance (L) - This is a measure of the amount<br />
of light reflected by an object and is measured in cd/m².<br />
It is the amount of luminous flux (F, lumens) that is emitted by<br />
a surface of given area and is dependant upon the properties<br />
of the surface (e.g. reflection, refraction and transmission.<br />
See section 3 on controlling light). The value of luminance<br />
at a point on a surface can therefore vary dependant upon<br />
the observer viewpoint.<br />
2.3.3 Glare - Glare is the result of excessive contrasts of<br />
luminance in the field of view. The effect may vary from mild<br />
discomfort to an actual impairment of the ability to see. When<br />
the ability to see is impaired this is called disability glare.<br />
Discomfort glare refers to the discomfort or distraction caused<br />
by bright windows or luminaires.<br />
Glare may be calculated in a variety of ways depending upon<br />
the application. So for example in interiors the Unified Glare<br />
Rating (UGR) is calculated. Similarly for sports lighting<br />
applications Glare Rating (GR) is used and for street lighting<br />
Threshold Increment (TI) is calculated. All of these methods,<br />
whilst using different parameters are essentially the ratio of<br />
luminaire brightness to background brightness.<br />
8 | The Mechanics of Seeing<br />
Fig. 2.4 Illuminance<br />
E<br />
Fig. 2.5 Luminance<br />
L<br />
Fig. 2.6 Glare from indoor luminaires with poor<br />
optical control
3 Controlling Light<br />
When we light an object, be it a space such as<br />
a room or a sports field, or part of a luminaire<br />
such as a louvre or diffuser, we do not see the<br />
light that falls onto a surface or object. What<br />
we actually see is the effect of light upon the<br />
object. Different materials affect light in different<br />
ways, for example paper reflects light differently<br />
to polished metal and the lit effect is different<br />
again for glass. To understand how a surface or<br />
object will look we need a basic understanding<br />
of reflection, transmission and refraction, the<br />
principal ways materials react to light.<br />
3.1 Reflection<br />
As mentioned above paper reflects light differently to polished<br />
metal. This is because paper exhibits what we term matt or<br />
diffuse reflection whilst polished metal exhibits what we term<br />
specular reflection. With diffuse reflection the light reflected from<br />
a surface is scattered equally in all directions.<br />
With specular reflection the light reflects from a surface as if<br />
from a mirror, producing a sharp-mirrored image. For any ray<br />
of light striking a specular surface the angle of incidence of the<br />
light is equal to the angle at which the ray of light is reflected.<br />
Some surfaces exhibit a mixture of diffuse and specular<br />
reflection, showing a fuzzy mirrored image. For this the peak<br />
reflection still obeys the rule of angle of incidence equals angle<br />
of reflection but light is also diffusely scattered around this peak.<br />
Fig. 3.1 Diffuse reflection<br />
Fig. 3.2 Specular reflection<br />
Fig. 3.3 Mixed specular and diffuse reflection<br />
Controlling Light | 9
3.2 Transmission<br />
Certain materials have the ability to transmit and diffuse light.<br />
When light falls on a translucent (light transmitting) material<br />
some light will be reflected in a specular manner, and some<br />
light will pass through the material. For a clear material, such<br />
as clear glass, the light will pass through with a minimum of<br />
scattering. However for materials such as opal plastic the light<br />
is scattered or diffused, therefore spreading the brightness of the<br />
light ray over a larger area. (See Fig.3.4)<br />
3.3 Refraction<br />
When light passes from one transparent medium to another of<br />
different density (e.g. air to glass) it bends. This is known as<br />
refraction and this principle is used to control light, for example<br />
using prisms. In luminaires prisms are used to direct light away<br />
from areas that could cause glare or waste light and into areas<br />
that produce more useful light, thereby making the luminaire<br />
more efficient at illuminating a task or object. (See Fig. 3.5)<br />
10 | Controlling Light<br />
Fig. 3.4 Transmission of a ray of light through a<br />
translucent material<br />
Fig. 3.5 Refraction of a ray of light through a<br />
prismatic panel
4 Australian Standards<br />
This section of the <strong>Technical</strong> handbook<br />
outlines some of the key standards that apply<br />
to lighting installations in Australia. This<br />
information has been included as a general<br />
guide only. Note that other regulations may<br />
also apply and it is the responsibility of the<br />
respective party to ensure compliance with all<br />
Australian standards. Standards, designs and<br />
products outlined in other sections within this<br />
<strong>Technical</strong> <strong>Handbook</strong> may not be applicable in<br />
Australia.<br />
4.1 Luminaire Manufacture<br />
ASNZS60598 Safety Compliance verified by self-certification<br />
based on in-house or NATA report.<br />
ASNZS CISPR15 Compliance with electromagnetic radiation<br />
standard as in C-Tick.<br />
4.2 Interior Lighting Standards<br />
AS1680.1 General principles and recommendations<br />
AS1680.2.1 Circulation spaces and other general areas<br />
AS1680.2.2 Office and screen based tasks<br />
AS1680.2.3 Educational and Training Facilities<br />
AS1680.2.4 Industrial tasks and purposes<br />
AS1680.2.5 Hospital and medical tasks<br />
4.3 Building Code of Australia<br />
Part J6.2 Provisions for all new constructions and refurbishments<br />
projects - minimum efficiency requirements. For more information<br />
visit www.abcb.gov.au or refer to <strong>Thorn</strong>’s Building Code of<br />
Australia - A Contractor’s Guide handbook.<br />
Controlling Light | 11
4.4 Exterior Lighting Standards<br />
ASNZS 1158.1 Lighting for roads and public spaces -<br />
Vehicular traffic (Category V) lighting - Performance and design<br />
requirements.<br />
ASNZS 1158.3 Lighting for roads and public spaces -<br />
Pedestrian area (Category P) lighting - Performance and design<br />
requirements.<br />
ASNZS 1158.4 The lighting of urban roads and other public<br />
thoroughfares - Supplementary lighting at pedestrian crossings<br />
AS4282 Control of the obtrusive effects of outdoor lighting.<br />
4.5 Sports Lighting<br />
AS2560.1 General<br />
AS2560.2.1 Tennis<br />
AS2560.2.2 Multipurpose Sports Hall<br />
AS2560.2.3 Football<br />
AS2560.2.4 Netball & Basketball<br />
AS2560.2.5 Swimming Pools<br />
AS2560.2.6 Baseball & Softball<br />
AS2560.2.7 Hockey<br />
AS2560.2.8 Bowling Greens<br />
AS4282 Control of the obtrusive effects of outdoor lighting<br />
12 | Controlling Light
5 Recommendations for Good Lighting<br />
The recommendations for good lighting give<br />
practical values for various lighting criteria,<br />
depending upon the application. The<br />
recommendations are drawn from a variety of<br />
documents, the principle documents being:<br />
Section 5.1 Indoor workplaces<br />
EN 12464-1:2002 Light and Lighting – Lighting of work places<br />
– Part 1: Indoor work places and CIE S 008:2001<br />
Section 5.2 Outdoor workplaces<br />
EN 12464-2:2007 Lighting of work places<br />
– Part 2 : Outdoor work places and CIE S 015:2005<br />
Section 5.3 Sports<br />
EN 12193: 2007 Light and Lighting – Sports Lighting<br />
Section 5.4 Emergency<br />
EN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007 Emergency Lighting<br />
Section 5.5 Roads<br />
EN 13201 1-4 Road lighting practice<br />
Section 5.6 Tunnel<br />
CR 14380:2003 Lighting Applications – Tunnel Lighting<br />
Note that these recommendations are based upon the European<br />
norms and local regulations may stipulate different values.<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 13
Recommendations for good lighting<br />
Whilst these limiting values may be considered to be the<br />
minimum design criteria additional factors should be taken into<br />
account to ensure a good lighting installation. Some of these<br />
factors are described in other sections of this book.<br />
The criteria used in the recommendations are defined below.<br />
E This is the maintained average illuminance, that is the<br />
m<br />
minimum value for average illuminance provided during<br />
the maintenance cycle of the installation.<br />
E min<br />
GR L<br />
L m<br />
R a<br />
This is the minimum value of illuminance that is<br />
permissible within any calculation or measurement grid.<br />
This is maximum value of glare rating that is permissible<br />
in any direction within any measurement or calculation<br />
grid.<br />
This is the maintained average luminance, that is the<br />
minimum value for average luminance provided during<br />
the maintenance cycle of the installation.<br />
This is the colour rendering index for a lamp and defines<br />
the ability of a lamp to show different colours correctly.<br />
SR This is the surround ratio, which is a value used in<br />
the design of road lighting applications. It is the ratio<br />
of the average illuminance of a strip just outside the<br />
carriageway compared to the average illuminance of a<br />
strip just inside the carriageway<br />
TI This is the threshold increment, which is a measure of<br />
the loss of visibility caused by the disability glare of the<br />
luminaires in an installation.<br />
UGR L This is the limiting maximum value of glare calculated by<br />
the unified glare rating method.<br />
Ul This is the uniformity of illuminance along a line, being<br />
defined as the minimum illuminance value within a<br />
line of measurement points divided by the average<br />
illuminance value of the line of measurement points<br />
(E min_line /Em_line).<br />
U o<br />
This is the uniformity of illuminance across any<br />
calculation or measurement grid, being defined as the<br />
minimum illuminance value within a grid of measurement<br />
points divided by the average illuminance value of a<br />
grid of measurement points (E min /E m ).<br />
14 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
Recommendations for good lighting<br />
5.1 Indoor workplaces<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings<br />
Traffic Zones<br />
Circulation areas and corridors 100 28 40<br />
Stairs, escalators, travalators 150 25 40<br />
Loading ramps/bays<br />
Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms<br />
150 25 40<br />
Canteens, pantries 200 22 80<br />
Rest rooms 100 22 80<br />
Rooms for physical exercise 300 22 80<br />
Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets 200 25 80<br />
Sick bay 500 19 80<br />
Rooms for medical attention<br />
Control rooms<br />
500 16 90<br />
Plant rooms, switch gear rooms 200 25 60<br />
Post room, switchboard<br />
Store rooms, cold stores<br />
500 19 80<br />
Store and stockrooms 100 25 60<br />
Dispatch packing handling areas<br />
Storage rack areas<br />
300 25 60<br />
Gangways : unmanned 20 - 40<br />
Gangways : manned 150 22 60<br />
Control stations<br />
Industrial activities and crafts<br />
Agriculture<br />
150 22 60<br />
Loading and operating of goods, handling equipment and machinery 200 25 80<br />
Buildings for livestock 50 - 40<br />
Sick animal pens, calving stalls 200 25 80<br />
Food preparation, dairy, utensil washing<br />
Bakeries<br />
200 25 80<br />
Preparation and baking 300 22 80<br />
Finishing, glazing, decorating<br />
Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks<br />
500 22 80<br />
Drying 50 28 20<br />
Preparation of materials, work on kilns and mixers 200 28 40<br />
General machine work 300 25 80<br />
Rough forms<br />
Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware<br />
300 25 80<br />
Drying 50 28 20<br />
Preparation, general machine work 300 25 80<br />
Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping simple parts, glazing, glass blowing 300 25 80<br />
Grinding, engraving, glass polishing, shaping precision parts, manufacture of glass instruments 750 19 80<br />
Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand grinding and engraving 750 16 80<br />
Precision work e.g. decorative grinding, hand painting 1000 16 90<br />
Manufacture of synthetic precious stones 1500 16 90<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 15
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Chemical, plastics and rubber industry<br />
Remote-operated processing installations 50 - 20<br />
Processing installations with limited manual intervention 150 28 40<br />
Constantly manned work places in processing installations 300 25 80<br />
Precision measuring rooms, laboratories 500 19 80<br />
Pharmaceutical production 500 22 80<br />
Tyre production 500 22 80<br />
Colour inspection 1000 16 90<br />
Cutting, finishing, inspection 750 19 80<br />
Electrical industry 300 25 80<br />
Cable and wire manufacture<br />
Winding<br />
300 25 80<br />
-Large coils 300 25 80<br />
-Medium-sized coils 500 22 80<br />
-Small coils 750 19 80<br />
Coil impregnating 300 25 80<br />
Galvanising<br />
Assembly work<br />
300 25 80<br />
-Rough e.g. large transformers 300 25 80<br />
-Medium e.g. switchboards 500 22 80<br />
-Fine e.g. telephones 750 19 80<br />
-Precision e.g. measuring equipment 1000 16 80<br />
Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting<br />
Food stuffs and luxury food industry<br />
Work places and zone in<br />
1500 16 80<br />
-Breweries, malting floor 200 25 80<br />
-For washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving, peeling 200 25 80<br />
-Cooking in preserve and chocolate factories 200 25 80<br />
-Work places and zones in sugar factories 200 25 80<br />
-For drying and fermenting raw tobacco, fermentation cellar 200 25 80<br />
Sorting and washing of products, milling, mixing, packing 300 25 80<br />
Work places and critical zones in slaughter houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering floor in<br />
sugar refineries<br />
500 25 80<br />
Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables 300 25 80<br />
Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes 500 22 80<br />
Inspection of glasses and bottles, product control, trimming, sorting, decoration 500 22 80<br />
Laboratories 500 19 80<br />
Colour inspection<br />
Foundries and metal casting<br />
1000 16 90<br />
Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc. 50 - 20<br />
Platforms 100 25 40<br />
Sand preparation 200 25 80<br />
Dressing room 200 25 80<br />
Work places at cupola and mixer 200 25 80<br />
Casting bay 200 25 80<br />
Shake out areas 200 25 80<br />
Machine moulding 200 25 80<br />
16 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Hand and core moulding 300 25 80<br />
Die casting 300 25 80<br />
Model building 500 22 80<br />
Hairdressers<br />
Hairdressing 500 19 90<br />
Jewellery manufacturing<br />
Working with precious stones 1500 16 90<br />
Manufacture of jewellery 1000 16 90<br />
Watch making (manual) 1500 16 80<br />
Watch making (automatic) 500 19 80<br />
Laundries and dry cleaning<br />
Goods in, marking and sorting 300 25 80<br />
Washing and dry cleaning 300 25 80<br />
Ironing, pressing 300 25 80<br />
Inspection and repairs 750 19 80<br />
Leather and leather goods<br />
Work on vats, barrels, pits 200 25 40<br />
Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins 300 25 80<br />
Saddlery work, shoe manufacturer, stitching, sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching 500 22 80<br />
Sorting 500 22 90<br />
Leather dyeing (machine) 500 22 80<br />
Quality control 1000 19 80<br />
Colour inspection 1000 16 90<br />
Shoe making 500 22 80<br />
Glove making 500 22 80<br />
Metal working and processing<br />
Open die forging 200 25 60<br />
Drop forging 300 25 60<br />
Welding 300 25 60<br />
Rough and average machining: tolerances ≥ 0.1mm 300 22 60<br />
Precision machining, grinding: tolerances < 0.1mm 500 19 60<br />
Scribing, inspection 750 19 60<br />
Wire and pipe drawing shops, cold forming 300 25 60<br />
Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5mm 200 26 60<br />
Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5mm 300 22 60<br />
Tool making, cutting equipment manufacture 750 19 60<br />
Assembly<br />
• Rough 200 25 80<br />
• Medium 300 25 80<br />
• Fine 500 22 80<br />
• Precision 750 19 80<br />
Galvanising 300 25 80<br />
Surface preparation and painting 750 25 80<br />
Tool, template and jig making, precision mechanics, micromechanics 750 25 80<br />
Paper and paper goods<br />
Edge runners, pulp mills 200 25 80<br />
Paper manufacture and processing, paper and corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture 300 25 80<br />
Standard bookbinding work e.g. folding, sorting, gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing 500 22 80<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 17
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Power stations<br />
Fuel supply plant 50 - 20<br />
Boiler house 100 28 40<br />
Machine halls 200 25 80<br />
Side rooms e.g. pump rooms, condenser rooms, etc., switchboards (inside buildings) 200 25 60<br />
Control rooms 500 16 80<br />
Outdoor switch gear<br />
Printers<br />
20 - 20<br />
Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving, work on stones and platens, printing machines,<br />
matrix making<br />
500 19 80<br />
Paper sorting and hand printing 500 19 80<br />
Type setting, retouching, lithography 1000 19 80<br />
Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 16 90<br />
Steel and copper engraving<br />
Rolling mills, iron and steel works<br />
2000 16 80<br />
Production plants without manual operation 50 - 20<br />
Production plants with occasional manual operation 150 28 40<br />
Production plants with continuous manual operation 200 25 80<br />
Slab store 50 - 20<br />
Furnaces 200 25 20<br />
Mill train, coiler, shear line 300 25 40<br />
Control platforms, control panels 300 22 80<br />
Test, measurement and inspection 500 22 80<br />
Underfloor man-sized tunnels, belt sections, cellars, etc.<br />
Textile manufacture and processing<br />
50 - 20<br />
Work places and zones in baths, bale opening 200 25 60<br />
Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work, drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting,<br />
pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning<br />
300 22 80<br />
Spinning, plying, reeling, winding 500 22 80<br />
Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting 500 22 80<br />
Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches 750 22 80<br />
Manual design, drawing patterns 750 22 90<br />
Finishing, dyeing 500 22 80<br />
Drying room 100 28 60<br />
Automatic fabric printing 500 25 80<br />
Burling, picking, trimming 1000 19 80<br />
Colour inspection, fabric control 1000 16 90<br />
Invisible mending 1500 19 90<br />
Hat manufacturing<br />
Vehicle construction<br />
500 22 80<br />
Body work and assembly 500 22 80<br />
Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber 750 22 80<br />
Painting, touch-up, inspection 1000 19 90<br />
Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 19 80<br />
Final inspection<br />
Wood working and processing<br />
1000 19 80<br />
Automatic processing e.g. drying, plywood manufacturing 50 28 40<br />
Steam pits 150 28 40<br />
Saw frame 300 25 60<br />
Work at joiners bench, gluing, assembly 300 25 80<br />
18 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Polishing, painting, fancy joinery 750 22 80<br />
Work on wood working machines e.g. turning, fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting,<br />
sawing, sinking<br />
500 19 80<br />
Selection of veneer woods 750 22 90<br />
Marquetry, inlay work 750 22 90<br />
Quality control, inspection 1000 19 90<br />
Offices<br />
Offices<br />
Filing, copying, etc. 300 19 80<br />
Writing, typing, reading, data processing 500 19 80<br />
<strong>Technical</strong> drawing 750 16 80<br />
CAD work stations 500 19 80<br />
Conference and meeting rooms 500 19 80<br />
Reception desk 300 22 80<br />
Archives<br />
Retail premises<br />
Retail premises<br />
200 25 80<br />
Sales area 300 22 80<br />
Till area 500 19 80<br />
Wrapper table<br />
Places of public assembly<br />
General areas<br />
500 19 80<br />
Entrance halls 100 22 80<br />
Cloakrooms 200 25 80<br />
Lounges 200 22 80<br />
Ticket offices<br />
Restaurants and hotels<br />
300 22 80<br />
Reception/cashier desk, porters desk 300 22 80<br />
Kitchen 500 22 80<br />
Restaurant, dining room, function room - - 80<br />
Self-service restaurant 200 22 80<br />
Buffet 300 22 80<br />
Conference rooms 500 19 80<br />
Corridors<br />
Theatres, concert halls, cinemas<br />
100 25 80<br />
Practice rooms, dressing rooms<br />
Trade fairs, exhibition halls<br />
300 22 80<br />
General lighting<br />
Libraries<br />
300 22 80<br />
Bookshelves 200 19 80<br />
Reading area 500 19 80<br />
Counters<br />
Public car parks (indoor)<br />
500 19 80<br />
In/out ramps (during the day) 300 25 20<br />
In/out ramps (at night) 75 25 20<br />
Traffic lanes 75 25 20<br />
Parking areas 75 - 20<br />
Ticket office 300 19 80<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 19
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Educational premises<br />
Nursery school, play school<br />
Play room 300 19 80<br />
Nursery 300 19 80<br />
Handicraft room<br />
Educational buildings<br />
300 19 80<br />
Classrooms, tutorial rooms 300 19 80<br />
Classroom for evening classes and adult education 500 19 80<br />
Lecture hall 500 19 80<br />
Black board 500 19 80<br />
Demonstration table 500 19 80<br />
Art rooms 500 19 80<br />
Art rooms in art schools 750 19 90<br />
<strong>Technical</strong> drawing rooms 750 16 80<br />
Practical rooms and laboratories 500 19 80<br />
Handicraft rooms 500 19 80<br />
Teaching workshop 500 19 80<br />
Music practice rooms 300 19 80<br />
Computer practice rooms (menu driven) 300 19 80<br />
Language laboratory 300 19 80<br />
Preparation rooms and workshops 500 22 80<br />
Entrance halls 200 22 80<br />
Circulation areas, corridors 100 25 80<br />
Stairs 150 25 80<br />
Student common rooms and assembly halls 200 22 80<br />
Teachers rooms 300 19 80<br />
Library: bookshelves 200 19 80<br />
Library: reading areas 500 19 80<br />
Stock rooms for teaching materials 100 25 80<br />
Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools (general use) 300 22 80<br />
School canteens 200 22 80<br />
Kitchen 500 22 80<br />
Health care premises 500 22 80<br />
Rooms for general use 750 22 80<br />
Waiting rooms 200 22 80<br />
Corridors (during the day) 200 22 80<br />
Corridors (at night) 50 22 80<br />
Day rooms<br />
Staff rooms<br />
200 22 80<br />
Staff office 500 19 80<br />
Staff rooms<br />
Wards, maternity wards<br />
300 19 80<br />
General lighting 100 19 80<br />
Reading lighting 300 19 80<br />
Simple examinations 300 19 80<br />
Examination and treatment 1000 19 90<br />
Night lighting, observation lighting 5 - 80<br />
Bathrooms and toilets for patients 200 22 80<br />
20 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Examination rooms (general)<br />
General lighting 500 19 90<br />
Examination and treatment 1000 19 90<br />
Eye examination rooms<br />
General lighting 300 19 80<br />
Examination of the outer eye 1000 - 90<br />
Reading and colour vision tests with vision charts 500 16 90<br />
Ear examination rooms 750 22 80<br />
General lighting 300 19 80<br />
Ear examination 1000 - 90<br />
Scanner rooms<br />
General lighting 300 19 80<br />
Scanners with image enhancers and television systems 50 19 80<br />
Delivery rooms<br />
General lighting 300 19 80<br />
Examination and treatment 1000 19 80<br />
Treatment rooms (general)<br />
Dialysis 500 19 80<br />
Dermatology 500 19 90<br />
Endoscopy rooms 300 19 80<br />
Plaster rooms 500 19 80<br />
Medical baths 300 19 80<br />
Massage and radiotherapy 300 19 80<br />
Operating areas<br />
Pre-op and recovery rooms 500 19 90<br />
Operating theatre 1000 19 90<br />
Intensive care unit<br />
General lighting 100 19 90<br />
Simple examinations 300 19 90<br />
Examination and treatment 1000 19 90<br />
Night watch 20 19 90<br />
Dentists 200 25 80<br />
General lighting 500 19 90<br />
At the patient 1000 - 90<br />
Operating cavity 5000 - 90<br />
White teeth matching 5000 - 90<br />
Laboratories and pharmacies<br />
General lighting 500 19 80<br />
Colour inspection 1000 19 90<br />
Decontamination rooms 300 22 80<br />
Sterilisation rooms 300 22 80<br />
Disinfection rooms 300 22 80<br />
Autopsy rooms and mortuaries<br />
General lighting 500 19 90<br />
Autopsy table and dissecting table 5000 - 90<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 21
5.1 Indoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of task or activity E m UGR L R a<br />
Transportation areas 300 22 80<br />
Airports<br />
Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim areas 200 22 80<br />
Connecting areas, escalators, travolators 150 22 80<br />
Information desks, check-in desks 500 19 80<br />
Customs and passport control desks 500 19 80<br />
Waiting areas 200 22 80<br />
Luggage store rooms 200 25 80<br />
Security check areas 300 19 80<br />
Air traffic control tower 500 16 80<br />
Testing and repair hangers 500 22 80<br />
Measuring areas in hangers 500 22 80<br />
Railway installations<br />
Covered platforms and passenger subways 50 28 40<br />
Ticket hall and concourse 200 28 40<br />
Ticket and luggage offices and counters 300 19 80<br />
Waiting rooms 200 22 80<br />
22 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
5.2 Outdoor workplaces<br />
Type of area, task or activity E m R a Uo GR L<br />
General circulation areas<br />
Walkways exclusively for pedestrians 5 20 0.25 50<br />
Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles (max 10km/h) e.g. bicycles, trucks<br />
and excavators<br />
10 20 0.40 50<br />
Regular vehicle traffic (max 40km/h) 20 20 0.40 45<br />
Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points<br />
Airports<br />
50 20 0.40 50<br />
Hanger apron 20 20 0.10 55<br />
Terminal apron 30 40 0.20 50<br />
Loading areas 50 40 0.20 50<br />
Fuel depot 50 40 0.40 50<br />
Aircraft maintenance stands<br />
Building sites<br />
200 60 0.50 45<br />
General lighting at building sites 50 20<br />
Clearance, excavation and loading 20 20 0.25 55<br />
Drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary and storage tasks 50 20 0.40 50<br />
Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work, wooden mould and<br />
framework mounting, electric piping and cabling<br />
100 40 0.40 45<br />
Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and pipe mountings 200 40 0.50 45<br />
Canals, locks and harbours<br />
Waiting quays at canals and locks 10 20 0.25 50<br />
Gangways and passages exclusively for pedestrians, waiting areas 10 20 0.25 50<br />
Outport embankment ballasting at canals and locks 20 20 0.25 55<br />
Lock control area 20 20 0.25 55<br />
Cargo handling, loading and unloading 50 20 0.25 55<br />
Passenger areas in passenger harbours 50 20 0.40 50<br />
Coupling of hoses, pipes and ropes 50 20 0.40 50<br />
Dangerous part of walkways and driveways (see also parking areas)<br />
Farms<br />
50 20 0.40 45<br />
Farm yard 20 20 0.10 55<br />
Equipment shed (open) 50 20 0.20 55<br />
Animals sorting pen<br />
Fuel filling service stations<br />
50 20 0.20 45<br />
Vehicle parking and storage areas 5 20 0.25 50<br />
Entry and exit driveways – dark environment 20 20 0.40 45<br />
Entry and exit driveways – light environment (i.e. urban) 50 20 0.40 45<br />
Air pressure and water checking points and other service areas 150 20 0.40 45<br />
Meter reading area 150 20 0.40 45<br />
Industrial sites and storage areas 500 80<br />
Short term handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of<br />
solid bulk goods<br />
20 20 0.25 55<br />
Continuous handling of large units and raw materials, loading and unloading of<br />
freight, lifting and descending location for cranes, open loading platforms<br />
50 20 0.40 50<br />
Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms, use of tools, ordinary<br />
reinforcement and casting tasks in concrete plants<br />
100 20 0.50 45<br />
Demanding electrical, machine and piping installations, inspection 200 60 0.50 45<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 23
5.2 Outdoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of area, task or activity E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Off-shore gas and oil structures<br />
Drill floor and monkey board 300 40 0.50 40<br />
Rotary table 500 40 0.50 40<br />
Regular vehicle traffic (max 40km/h) 20 20 0.40 45<br />
Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and unloading points 50 20 0.40 50<br />
Derrick 100 40 0.50 45<br />
Mud sampling room 300 40 0.50 40<br />
Test station, shale shaker, wellhead<br />
Process areas<br />
200 40 0.50 45<br />
Pumping areas 200 20 0.50 45<br />
Crude oil pumps 300 40 0.50 45<br />
Treatment areas 100 40 0.50 45<br />
Ladders, stairs, walkways 100 20 0.25 45<br />
Plant areas 300 40 0.50 40<br />
Boat landing areas transport areas 100 20 0.25 50<br />
Life boat areas 200 20 0.40 50<br />
Sea surface below the rig 30 20 0.25 50<br />
Helideck<br />
Parking lots<br />
100 20 0.40 45<br />
Light traffic e.g. parking areas of shops, schools, churches, terraced<br />
and apartment houses<br />
5 20 0.25 55<br />
Medium traffic e.g. parking areas of department stores, office buildings, sports<br />
and multipurpose building complexes<br />
10 20 0.25 50<br />
Heavy traffic e.g. parking areas of major shopping centres, major sports and<br />
multipurpose building complexes<br />
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries<br />
20 20 0.25 50<br />
Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated valves, starting and<br />
stopping motors, lighting of burners<br />
20 20 0.25 55<br />
Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with risk free substances,<br />
inspection of leakage, piping and packing<br />
50 20 0.40 50<br />
Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons with dangerous substances,<br />
replacements of pump packing, general service work, reading of instruments<br />
100 40 0.40 45<br />
Repair of machines and electrical devices 200 60 0.50 45<br />
Fuel loading and unloading sites 100 20 0.40 45<br />
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants<br />
Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas 5 20 0.25 50<br />
Handling of servicing tools, coal 20 20 0.25 55<br />
Overall inspection 50 20 0.40 50<br />
General servicing work and reading of instruments 100 40 0.40 45<br />
Wind tunnels – servicing and maintenance 100 40 0.40 45<br />
Repair of electric devices<br />
Railway areas<br />
200 60 0.50 45<br />
Open platforms - small stations, rural and local trains 15 20 0.25 50<br />
Open platforms - medium size stations, suburban and regional trains 20 20 0.40 45<br />
Open platforms - large stations, inter-city services 50 20 0.40 45<br />
Covered platforms - medium size stations, suburban and regional trains 50 40 0.40 45<br />
Covered platforms - large stations, inter-city services 100 40 0.50 45<br />
Stairs - small and medium size stations 50 40 0.40 45<br />
Stairs - large stations 100 40 0.50 45<br />
Walkways 20 20 0.40 50<br />
24 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
5.2 Outdoor workplaces (continued)<br />
Type of area, task or activity E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Freight areas<br />
Freight track – short duration operations 10 20 0.25 50<br />
Freight track – continuous operation 20 20 0.40 50<br />
Open platforms 20 20 0.40 50<br />
Covered platform – short duration operations 50 20 0.40 45<br />
Covered platform – continuous operation 100 40 0.50 45<br />
Railway yards handling areas 30 20 0.40 50<br />
Railway yards – flat marshalling, retarder and classification yards 10 20 0.40 50<br />
Hump areas 10 20 0.40 45<br />
Wagon inspection pit 100 40 0.50 40<br />
Coupling area 30 20 0.40 45<br />
Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 20 0.25 50<br />
Servicing trains and locomotives 20 40 0.40 50<br />
Level crossings 20 20 0.40 45<br />
Saw mills<br />
Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and chip conveyors 20 20 0.25 55<br />
Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading points and sawn timber<br />
loading points, mechanical lifting to timber conveyor<br />
50 20 0.40 50<br />
Reading of addresses and marking of sawn timber 100 40 0.40 45<br />
Grading and packaging 200 40 0.50 45<br />
Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 300 40 0.50 45<br />
Shipyards and docks<br />
Short term handling of large units 20 20 0.25 55<br />
Cleaning of ship hull 50 20 0.25 50<br />
Painting and welding of ship hull 100 60 0.40 45<br />
Mounting of electrical and mechanical components 200 60 0.50 45<br />
General lighting of shipyard area, storage areas for prefabricated goods<br />
Water and sewage plants<br />
20 40 0.25 55<br />
Handling of service tools, utilisation of manually operated valves, starting and<br />
stopping of motors, piping packing and raking plants<br />
50 20 0.40 45<br />
Handling of chemicals, inspection of leakage, changing of pumps,<br />
general servicing work, reading of instruments<br />
100 40 0.40 45<br />
Repair of motors and electric devices 200 60 0.50 45<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 25
5.3 Sports<br />
This table contains lighting recommendations for a variety of<br />
sports. Lighting requirements may differ according to the level<br />
of competition of a sport, and therefore requirements are shown<br />
for different lighting classes. There are three lighting classes:<br />
Class I Top level competition that will generally involve a<br />
large amount of spectators and may involve long<br />
viewing distances<br />
Class II Medium level competition that will generally involve<br />
a medium amount of spectators and may involve<br />
medium viewing distances. Professional level training<br />
may also be class II.<br />
Class III Low level competition that will generally involve small<br />
amounts<br />
Level of competition Lighting Class<br />
I II III<br />
International or national 3<br />
Regional 3 3<br />
Local 3 3 3<br />
Training 3 3<br />
Recreational/education 3<br />
Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Aerobics (recreational) 200 20 0.50<br />
Archery (lane/target) 200/Ev 750 60 0.5/0.8<br />
Athletics (indoor)<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II 300 60 0.60<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Athletics (outdoor, all disciplines)<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 200 60 0.50 55<br />
Class III 100 20 0.50 55<br />
Badminton<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
26 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Basketball (indoor)<br />
Basketball<br />
Billiards<br />
Boccia (indoor)<br />
Boccia (outdoor)<br />
Boules (indoor)<br />
Boules (outdoor)<br />
10 pin/9 pin bowling<br />
Boxing<br />
Climbing<br />
Cricket (infield/outfield)<br />
Cricket nets<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 200 60 0.60 50<br />
Class III 75 20 0.50 55<br />
Class I 750 80 0.80<br />
Class II 500 80 0.80<br />
Class III 500 80 0.80<br />
Class I 300 60 0.70<br />
Class II 200 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 200 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 100 20 0.70 50<br />
Class III 50 20 0.50 55<br />
Class I 300 60 0.70<br />
Class II 200 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 200 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 100 20 0.70 50<br />
Class III 50 20 0.50 55<br />
Lanes 200 60 0.50<br />
Pins 25m lane Ev 1000 0.80<br />
Pins 50m lane Ev 2000 0.80<br />
Class I 2000 80 0.80<br />
Class II 1000 80 0.80<br />
Class III 500 60 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750/500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 500/300 60 0.70 50<br />
Class III 300/200 20 0.70 55<br />
Class I 1500 60 0.80 50<br />
Class II 1000 60 0.80 50<br />
Class III 750 20 0.80 55<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 27
Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Curling (target / playing area) 300/200 0.70 0.70<br />
Cycling (indoor) 50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Cycling (outdoor)<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 300 60 0.70 50<br />
Class III 100 20 0.50 55<br />
Dancing<br />
Darts<br />
Fencing<br />
Football (indoor)<br />
Football (outdoor)<br />
Gymnastics<br />
Handball (indoor)<br />
Handball (outdoor)<br />
Hockey (indoor)<br />
Hockey (outdoor)<br />
28 | Recommendations for Good Lighting<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II 300 60 0.60<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I Eh 200/Ev 750 60<br />
Class II Eh 100/Ev 500 60<br />
Class III Eh 50/Ev 300 20<br />
Class I Eh 750/Ev 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II Eh 500/Ev 300 60 0.70<br />
Class III Eh 300/Ev 200 20 0.70<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 200 60 0.60 50<br />
Class III 75 20 0.50 55<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II 300 60 0.60<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 200 60 0.60 50<br />
Class III 75 20 0.50 55<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 200 60 0.70 50<br />
Class III 200 20 0.70 55
Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Ice hockey (indoor)<br />
Ice hockey (outdoor)<br />
Ice skating<br />
Judo<br />
Kendo / Karate<br />
Netball (indoor)<br />
Netball (outdoor)<br />
Petanque (indoor)<br />
Petanque (outdoor)<br />
Racketball<br />
Roller skating<br />
School sports<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 200 60 0.60 50<br />
Class III 75 20 0.50 55<br />
Class I 300 60 0.70<br />
Class II 200 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 200 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 100 20 0.70 50<br />
Class III 50 20 0.50 55<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II 300 60 0.60<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 29
Type of area, task or activity Class E m R a Uo GR L<br />
Shooting (lane/target) 200/Ev 750 60 0.5/0.8<br />
Snooker<br />
Class I 750 80 0.80<br />
Class II 500 80 0.80<br />
Class III 500 80 0.80<br />
Speed skating<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II 300 60 0.60<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Squash<br />
Swimming<br />
Table tennis<br />
Tennis (indoor)<br />
Tennis (outdoor)<br />
Weight lifting<br />
Wrestling<br />
30 | Recommendations for Good Lighting<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70<br />
Class II 300 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.70<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 300 20 0.50<br />
Class I 500 60 0.70 50<br />
Class II 300 60 0.70 50<br />
Class III 200 20 0.60 55<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50<br />
Class I 750 60 0.70<br />
Class II 500 60 0.70<br />
Class III 200 20 0.50
5.4 Emergency<br />
Illuminance limits (CEN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007)<br />
Description of space Illuminance limits (lux) Diversity limits<br />
(Imin / Imax)<br />
Escape route Along centre line ≥ 1.0lx<br />
In central band ≥ 0.5lx<br />
0.025 (1:40)<br />
Open area Across area ≥ 0.5lx 0.025 (1:40)<br />
High risk task area ≥ 10% maintained level but not less than15.0lx 0.1 (1:10)<br />
Disability glare limits (CEN 1838:1999 and CIE S 020/E:2007)<br />
Mounting height above<br />
floor level<br />
H in m<br />
Escape route and open area (anti<br />
panic) lighting maximum luminous<br />
intensity<br />
I max in cd<br />
High risk task area<br />
lighting maximum<br />
luminous intensity<br />
I max in cd<br />
H < 2.5 500 1000<br />
2.5 ≤ H < 3.0 900 1800<br />
3.0 ≤ H < 3.5 1600 3200<br />
3.5 ≤ H < 4.0 2500 5000<br />
4.0 ≤ H < 4.5 3500 7000<br />
4.5 ≤ H 5000 10000<br />
For escape routes and open areas response times and durations<br />
are;<br />
CEN 1838:1999<br />
50% of the required illuminance within 5s, and 100% within<br />
60s with a minimum duration of 1 hour<br />
CIE S 020/E:2007<br />
50% of the required illuminance within 20s, and 100% within<br />
60s (if the visual task or risk to people requires a shorter<br />
response time then it should be shortened to 50% of the<br />
required illuminance within 5s) with a minimum duration of<br />
1 hour (if the visual task or risk to people requires a longer<br />
duration then it should be extended to 3 hours)<br />
For high risk task areas response times and durations are;<br />
CEN 1838:1999<br />
Either 100% required illuminance permanently or within 0.5s,<br />
depending upon the application with a minimum duration<br />
covering the time the risk exists<br />
CIE S 020/E:2007<br />
Either 100% required illuminance permanently or within 0.5s,<br />
depending upon the application with a minimum duration of<br />
1 hour<br />
Note that these values may differ across countries. For example;<br />
UK (CEN 1838:1999)<br />
Escape route along centre line ≥ 0.2lx<br />
in central band ≥ 0.1lx<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 31
Escape route and open area duration may be extended from<br />
5s to 15s in premises for the most part likely to be occupied by<br />
persons who are familiar with them<br />
France (CEN 1838:1999)<br />
Certified luminaires only may be used<br />
On escape routes maximum spacing of luminaires is 15m<br />
For open areas 5lm/m 2 (luminaire lumens) is required and<br />
luminaires may not be spaced more than 4 times their mounting<br />
height apart, with a minimum of 2 luminaires per room<br />
Therefore, whilst these values may be used for guidance local<br />
regulations should be consulted.<br />
5.5 Roads<br />
For road lighting the lighting criteria are selected dependant<br />
upon the class of road being lit. The class has a range of<br />
sub-classes, from the strictest to the most relaxed, and these are<br />
chosen dependant upon factors, such as typical speed of users,<br />
typical volumes of traffic flow, difficulty of the navigational task,<br />
etc. The basic lighting classes are defined as:<br />
ME This class is intended for users of motorised vehicles on<br />
traffic routes. In some countries this class also applies to<br />
residential roads. Traffic speeds are medium to high.<br />
The ME classes go from ME1 to ME6, with ME1 defining<br />
the strictest requirements. For wet road conditions the<br />
MEW classes go from MEW1 to MEW6.<br />
Luminance<br />
L m U 0 U L SR TI<br />
ME1 ≥ 2.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%<br />
ME2 ≥ 1.5 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%<br />
ME3A ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.70 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
ME3B ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
ME3C ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
ME4A ≥ 0.75 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.60 ≤ 15%<br />
ME4B ≥ 0.75 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
ME5 ≥ 0.50 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.35 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
ME6 ≥ 0.3 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.35 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
MEW1D ≥ 2.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%<br />
MEW1W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -<br />
MEW2D ≥ 1.5 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 10%<br />
MEW2W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -<br />
MEW3D ≥ 1.0 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 ≥ 0.60 ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
MEW3W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -<br />
MEW4D ≥ 0.75 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.40 - ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
MEW4W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -<br />
MEW5D ≥ 0.5 cd/m 2 ≥ 0.35 - ≥ 0.50 ≤ 15%<br />
MEW5W - ≥ 0.15 - ≥ 0.50 -<br />
32 | Recommendations for Good Lighting<br />
KEY Emin - minimum illuminance<br />
Em - maintained average illuminance<br />
Lm - maintained average luminance<br />
Uo - overall uniformity<br />
U L - longitudinal uniformity<br />
TI - threshold increment<br />
SR - surround ratio
CE This class is intended for users of motorised vehicles in<br />
conflict areas such as road intersections, roundabouts,<br />
etc. These areas also allow provision for cyclists and<br />
pedestrians.<br />
The CE classes go from CE0 to CE5, with CE0 defining<br />
the strictest requirements.<br />
S This class is intended for cyclists and pedestrians on<br />
footpaths, cycle paths, residential roads, pedestrian<br />
streets, parking areas, etc. The S class and the A class are<br />
for similar situations, but the S class criteria are defined<br />
in terms of horizontal illuminance as preferred by certain<br />
countries.<br />
The S classes go from S1 to S6, with S1 defining the<br />
strictest requirements.<br />
A This class is intended for cyclists and pedestrians on<br />
footpaths, cycle paths, residential roads, pedestrian<br />
streets, parking areas, etc. The A class and the S class are<br />
for similar situations but the A class criteria are defined in<br />
terms of hemispherical illuminance as preferred by certain<br />
countries.<br />
The A classes go from A1 to A5, with A1 defining the<br />
strictest requirements.<br />
ES This class is an extension of the A and S classes for those<br />
situations where the identification of people or objects<br />
is particularly necessary, for example in high crime<br />
risk areas. The criteria are in terms of semi-cylindrical<br />
illuminance and are used in addition to the S or A class<br />
criteria.<br />
The ES classes go from ES1 to ES9, with ES1 defining the<br />
strictest requirements.<br />
EV This class is an extension of the CE, A and S classes<br />
for those situations requiring good visibility of vertical<br />
surfaces, for example toll booths. The criteria are in terms<br />
of vertical illuminance and are used in addition to the CE,<br />
S or A class criteria.<br />
The EV classes go from EV1 to EV6, with EV1 defining the<br />
strictest requirements.<br />
Horizontal illuminance<br />
E m E min U o<br />
CE0 ≥ 50.0 lux - ≥ 0.40<br />
CE1 ≥ 30.0 lux - ≥ 0.40<br />
CE2 ≥ 20.0 lux - ≥ 0.40<br />
CE3 ≥ 15.0 lux - ≥ 0.40<br />
CE5 ≥ 7.50 lux - ≥ 0.40<br />
Horizontal illuminance<br />
E m E min U o<br />
S1 ≥ 15.0 lux; ≤ 22.5 lux ≥ 5.0 lux -<br />
S2 ≥ 10.0 lux; ≤ 15.0 lux ≥ 3.0 lux -<br />
S3 ≥ 7.5 lux; ≤ 11.25 lux ≥ 1.5 lux -<br />
S4 ≥ 5.0 lux; ≤ 7.5 lux ≥ 1.0 lux -<br />
S5 ≥ 3.0 lux; ≤4.5 lux ≥ 0.6 lux -<br />
S6 ≥ 2.0 lux; ≤ 3.0 lux ≥ 0.6 lux -<br />
Hemispherical illuminance<br />
Em Uo A1 ≥ 5.0 lux ≥ 0.15<br />
A2 ≥ 3.0 lux ≥ 0.15<br />
A3 ≥ 2.0 lux ≥ 0.15<br />
A4 ≥ 1.5 lux ≥ 0.15<br />
A5 ≥ 1.0 lux ≥ 0.15<br />
Semi-cylindrical illuminance<br />
E min<br />
ES1 ≥ 10.0 lux<br />
ES2 ≥ 7.5 lux<br />
ES3 ≥ 5.0 lux<br />
ES4 ≥ 3.0 lux<br />
ES5 ≥ 2.0 lux<br />
ES6 ≥ 1.5 lux<br />
ES7 ≥ 1.0 lux<br />
ES8 ≥ 0.75 lux<br />
ES9 ≥ 0.50 lux<br />
Vertical illuminance<br />
E min<br />
EV1 ≥ 50.0 lux<br />
EV2 ≥ 30.0 lux<br />
EV3 ≥ 10.0 lux<br />
EV4 ≥ 7.5 lux<br />
EV5 ≥ 5.0 lux<br />
EV6 ≥ 0.5 lux<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 33
Recommended lighting levels<br />
When lighting adjacent areas there should not be a difference<br />
greater than two comparable classes between the areas, with<br />
the area with the highest recommended lighting level being<br />
taken as the reference area.<br />
To help apply this when adjacent area are lit to different lighting<br />
classes the table below shows lighting classes for comparable<br />
lighting levels.<br />
ME1 ME2 ME3 ME4 ME5 ME6<br />
MEW1 MEW2 MEW3 MEW4 MEW5<br />
CE0 CE1 CE2 CE3 CE4 CE5<br />
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6<br />
Lighting classes of comparable lighting level<br />
In some countries there is a preference for a particular<br />
measure of illuminance over others (for example hemispherical<br />
illuminance in preference to horizontal illuminance). The<br />
following two tables show comparable alternative lighting<br />
classes to aid in designing to local preferences.<br />
A class (hemispherical illuminance) compared to S class (horizontal illuminance)<br />
Reference class S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6<br />
Alternative class A1 A2 A3 A4 A5<br />
ES class (semi-cylindrical illuminance) and EV class (vertical illuminance) compared to CE and S class<br />
(horizontal illuminance)<br />
Reference class<br />
Alternative class<br />
CE0 CE1 CE2 CE3<br />
S1<br />
ES1 ES2<br />
EV3<br />
34 | Recommendations for Good Lighting<br />
ES3<br />
EV4<br />
ES4<br />
EV5<br />
CE4<br />
S2<br />
CE5<br />
S3 S4 S5 S6<br />
ES5 ES6 ES7 ES8 ES9
5.6 Amenity<br />
There is little standardised information for lighting requirements<br />
in amenity areas, and therefore this information should be<br />
considered guidance. Local standards and regulations should<br />
be checked to ensure compliance.<br />
Lighting classes for pedestrian areas in urban centres (see road section above)<br />
Pedestrian zones<br />
Lighting levels for underground, multi-storey and outdoor car parks zones<br />
Traffic flow pedestrians<br />
Normal High<br />
Environmental zone Environmental zone<br />
E3 E4 E3 E4<br />
Pedestrian only traffic CE3 CE2 CE2 CE1<br />
Mixed pedestrian and vehicular traffic CE2 CE1 CE1 CE1<br />
Area<br />
Em (lux)<br />
Eminimum (lux)<br />
Diversity<br />
(E /E )<br />
min max<br />
Pedestrian precincts 5.0 - 0.08<br />
Squares/open areas 5.0 - 0.10<br />
Squares (high pedestrian use) 10.0 - 0.10<br />
Level footpaths - 1.0<br />
Footpaths with steps - 5.0 -<br />
Outdoor staircase 15.0 - 0.30<br />
Underpass 60.0 - 0.30<br />
Type<br />
Area<br />
Em (lux)<br />
Eminimum (lux)<br />
Underground and multi-storey Parking bays, access area 75 50<br />
excluding roof level<br />
Ramps, corners, intersections 150 75<br />
Entrance/exit zones (vehicular) 75 night<br />
300 day<br />
-<br />
Pedestrian areas, stairs, lifts 100 50<br />
Outdoor and multi-storey roof<br />
60.0 -<br />
level<br />
Rural zones E1 and E2 15 5<br />
Urban zones E3 and E4 30 10<br />
Multi-storey roof level 30 10<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 35
5.7 Tunnel<br />
For guidance on tunnel lighting you should also refer to section<br />
7.6 on road tunnel lighting.<br />
Glare restriction<br />
Time of day Threshold zone Interior zone Exit zone<br />
Day-time TI
5.8 Lighting scheme surveys<br />
When a lighting scheme has been designed and installed<br />
it is normally necessary to perform a survey as part of the<br />
commissioning process. A survey would also be necessary in<br />
the case of any dispute over the performance of an installation.<br />
When performing a survey a grid of points is generally<br />
placed over the area to be surveyed. These grid points are the<br />
measurement points at which a reading of light will be taken.<br />
To perform a survey adequate equipment is required. This<br />
is generally either an illuminance meter or a luminance<br />
meter, dependant upon the criteria used during the design<br />
of the installation. It is essential that the equipment used is<br />
suitable for the task. It therefore needs to be calibrated, with<br />
a current calibration certificate from a competent company<br />
with traceability to national standards. It also needs to have a<br />
suitable range of sensitivity to be able to measure the light levels<br />
present in the installation. So to measure emergency light levels<br />
a more sensitive meter would be necessary that could measure<br />
low light levels.<br />
When making a scheme survey it is essential to keep a<br />
complete and accurate record of the state of the whole<br />
installation at the time of the survey, which is the lighting<br />
equipment and the space the lighting is in. (Photographs are a<br />
valuable addition to a written record.) Examples of information<br />
of note are:<br />
With regard to the measuring equipment<br />
− Type of meter, manufacturer, model, serial number and<br />
calibration date<br />
− Details of any additional equipment, such as tripods, tape<br />
measures, etc. should be noted<br />
With regard to the luminaires<br />
− The luminaire manufacturer and manufacturers’ code<br />
− Details of the lamps (number, type and age)<br />
− The supply voltage (value and stability)<br />
− The state of maintenance of the installation (lamps and<br />
luminaires)<br />
− Details of luminaire control systems being used<br />
− Geometric details of the luminaire positioning<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 37
With regard to the space<br />
− The condition of reflective surfaces<br />
− The surface reflectances<br />
− The presence of any significant obstructions<br />
− The presence/absence of daylight, including a<br />
background reading of luminance/illuminance with<br />
daylight only (luminaires turned off). Note that the quantity<br />
of daylight may vary significantly over time so ideally<br />
daylight should be excluded from measurements of electric<br />
light unless the aim is to measure a constant illuminance<br />
installation (daylight control)<br />
− The ambient temperature in the space<br />
− Any other factors which could influence the measurement<br />
Before taking any measurements it is important that the output<br />
of the luminaires is stable. Therefore the lighting should ideally<br />
be operated for one hour before taking any measurements, and<br />
at least 30 minutes. Additionally to ensure the stability of the<br />
meter photocell it should be exposed to the stable light levels for<br />
approximately five minutes before taking any measurements.<br />
When defining a measurement grid this is dependant upon the<br />
application being surveyed.<br />
Interior measurement grids<br />
Frequently for sports lighting the grid definition is defined by<br />
the sports governing body, so for an indoor sports facility any<br />
requirements specific to a particular sport should be used.<br />
However, if no specific requirements exist, or the installation<br />
is not a sports facility, the measurement points for verification<br />
of the design should be in the same location and plane as<br />
the calculation points used during the design. Therefore, if a<br />
measurement plane was calculated which was tilted to mimic<br />
the orientation of the task, the same measurement plane should<br />
be used for verification.<br />
Note that during design it should be ensured that the grid<br />
spacing does not coincide with the spacing of the luminaires<br />
in the installation as this can distort the calculated results, and<br />
therefore the scheme performance.<br />
38 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
Exterior measurement grids – sports and area<br />
Frequently for sports lighting the grid definition is defined by<br />
the sports governing body, so any requirements specific to<br />
a particular sport should be used. However, if no specific<br />
requirements exist, or the installation is not a sports facility, the<br />
measurement points for verification of the design should be in<br />
the same location and plane as the calculation points used<br />
during the design. Therefore, if a measurement plane was<br />
calculated which was tilted to mimic the orientation of the task,<br />
the same measurement plane should be used for verification.<br />
Exterior measurement grids – road<br />
For road lighting the grid is normally defined in the relevant<br />
standard and is generally related to the spacing of the road<br />
lighting lanterns. Therefore the relevant standard should be<br />
referenced for the grid definition which should be the same as<br />
the grid used for calculation during design.<br />
When marking the measurement grid in the area to be<br />
measured the method of marking is dependant upon the<br />
measurements to be taken. When measuring illuminance<br />
small markers (such as sticky dots) may be placed upon the<br />
surface to show the measurement point. However when<br />
measuring luminance this would invalidate the reading and so<br />
for luminance readings markings should be used to sight the<br />
luminance meter, and then moved before the reading is taken.<br />
When taking luminance readings in a road lighting installation<br />
the position of the meter will be a significant distance from the<br />
measurement point. This has two implications:<br />
− The luminance meter must be able to restrict the angle of<br />
measurement to allow only the relevant grid position to be<br />
measured, typically to two minutes of arc in the vertical<br />
plane and 20 minutes of arc in the horizontal plane.<br />
− The grid markings must be visible from a large distance.<br />
Therefore three-dimensional objects should be used to<br />
mark the grid points and removed individually as each<br />
grid point is measured.<br />
The method of marking out the grid should be recorded with<br />
details of equipment used and fixed reference points used<br />
to locate the grid. To record the measured values a diagram<br />
should be used to assign reference numbers to each grid point.<br />
A table of values may then be completed containing the grid<br />
reference number and the measured value.<br />
Recommendations for Good Lighting | 39
Some points of note when taking the readings are<br />
− When taking measurements it should be ensured that<br />
no additional shadowing is introduced due to the<br />
measurement technique.<br />
− When taking measurements it is advisable to wear dark<br />
matt clothing to prevent light reflecting from clothing onto<br />
the photocell, giving abnormally high readings. However,<br />
if safety requirements require high visibility clothing,<br />
care should be taken to minimise light reflection onto the<br />
photocell.<br />
− The use of a tripod is advisable, especially for luminance<br />
readings or readings using heavy equipment.<br />
− For measurement grids that are not at ground level the use<br />
of a stand, at the correct height and orientation for the task<br />
plane, can help ensure a photocell is correctly positioned<br />
at a measurement position.<br />
− It is good practice to measure the background light levels<br />
without the lighting installation turned on. Even moonlight<br />
can have a noticeable effect on light levels. Also to take<br />
these measurements after measuring the installation with<br />
the lights turned on, as the background light levels may<br />
vary considerably during the warm-up time for the lighting.<br />
− When measuring horizontal illuminance it cannot be<br />
assumed that the ground is horizontal, especially in<br />
outdoor applications. Care must be taken to ensure<br />
the photocell is horizontal, even if this is not a true<br />
representation of the ground.<br />
− Correction factors should be applied to readings to<br />
compensate for the lamp type used in the schemes.<br />
However, highly coloured or monochromatic light sources<br />
will give erroneous readings using conventional light<br />
meters.<br />
40 | Recommendations for Good Lighting
6 Applications and Techniques<br />
6.1 General Considerations<br />
The application of the right light is paramount in<br />
lighting design. The simple golden rule for design<br />
considerations is to provide the right light to the<br />
right place at the right time. This rule is valid for<br />
all places where lighting for people is needed<br />
so that they can see and perform the visual<br />
tasks efficiently and in comfort. The specific<br />
lighting requirements of people and places<br />
vary according to the type of place, activity<br />
and people involved. The visual tasks can differ<br />
in character, location, size, colour, duration,<br />
dynamics and ergonomics. It is very important<br />
to assess these parameters and to formulate the<br />
right design objectives for the specific lighting<br />
application area. Once the task analyses<br />
have been completed and listed the required<br />
lighting design criteria can be selected and the<br />
lighting design process can start. See also the<br />
list of recommendations within the appropriate<br />
lighting application standards referenced in this<br />
book.<br />
This section of the handbook gives an insight to the activities<br />
and visual tasks found in the various lighting application<br />
segments and gives advise on the important points to consider.<br />
It recommends the most appropriate lighting design techniques<br />
and suitable lighting solutions. The list of application segments<br />
is not exhaustive but the main types covered include the lighting<br />
of indoor and outdoor industry, offices, education buildings,<br />
super and hypermarkets, roads, amenity areas, architectural<br />
elements and healthcare premises. For each case the lighting<br />
techniques employed should start by considering a holistic<br />
approach to design and should include PEC – performance,<br />
efficiency and comfort - attributes and fulfilment. This means<br />
addressing all the lighting design parameters and balancing the<br />
requirements and constraints to yield the best possible solution.<br />
In the holistic framework the key elements for consideration<br />
are visual function, visual amenity, architectural integration,<br />
energy efficiency, installation costs and maintenance. The<br />
individual elements may not carry equal weight, but they<br />
Applications and Techniques | 41
Applications and Techniques<br />
all need consideration separately and combined with each<br />
other. PEC extends this consideration to include the changing<br />
human factors and environmental challenges. By fulfilling PEC<br />
we ensure that quality lighting will be provided that gives<br />
effective light for visual performance, with high operating<br />
energy efficiency, be sustainable and kind to the environment,<br />
and give people comfort, stimulation and total satisfaction. It is<br />
well proven that good lighting is essential to mankind, without<br />
this the human activity will be seriously impaired and valuable<br />
energy and resource will be wasted. It is also important to<br />
recognise that this lighting not only illuminates the task but will<br />
also contribute to the quality of the visual environment and<br />
wellbeing of the people.<br />
Much of the success of a lighting installation depends on<br />
making the right decisions at the design stage, selecting the<br />
right equipment and providing adequate instructions on how<br />
to operate, manage and service the scheme through it’s life.<br />
In the section “Specific Techniques” guidance is given on<br />
techniques that are applicable to several application segments.<br />
These include, lighting for display screen equipment, lighting<br />
for education, emergency lighting, road and amenity lighting,<br />
controlling obtrusive light, lighting for crime prevention, lighting<br />
for health, lighting controls, lighting maintenance and tunnel<br />
lighting. The consideration of these form an integral part of the<br />
design process to yield the most appropriate lighting solution.<br />
42 | Applications and Techniques
Healthcare<br />
Section 5.6<br />
Urban –<br />
decorative<br />
roadlighting &<br />
amenity areas<br />
Section 5.9<br />
Sports lighting<br />
Section 5.11<br />
Super/<br />
Hypermarket<br />
Section 5.7<br />
Urban –<br />
architectural<br />
floodlighting<br />
Section 5.10<br />
Education<br />
Section 5.3<br />
Office<br />
Section 5.2<br />
Road lighting<br />
Section 5.8<br />
Industry –<br />
indoor<br />
Section 5.4<br />
Industry – outdoor<br />
Section 5.5<br />
Fig. 6.1 City plan showing the diversity of<br />
lighting needs. This section gives hints<br />
on lighting techniques for each of these<br />
application areas, helping the reader<br />
to tackle such everyday projects with<br />
greater understanding.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 43
6.2 Office<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
Office lighting is a general term that covers many tasks. These tasks can use different<br />
mediums such as paper, computer screen, or involve face-to-face meetings. Additionally<br />
the tasks can vary in content and may be mainly clerical in nature or may be more<br />
specialised such as engineering tasks and CAD work. Points of note are:<br />
Office workers tend to have a sedentary work routine. Therefore they will be<br />
looking in essentially the same direction for large amounts of time. Poor<br />
lighting can cause various health problems, from headaches due to<br />
discomfort glare to muscle strain due to sitting at an awkward angle to avoid<br />
reflections in computer screens or glossy publications. Care must be taken to<br />
design a lighting installation that minimises discomfort caused by lighting.<br />
A balanced ambience creates a pleasant work environment. Ensuring light<br />
falls onto the walls and ceiling helps prevent dark surfaces creating an<br />
oppressive atmosphere. Generally, ensuring wall lighting levels are 50% of<br />
the horizontal task lighting level and ceiling levels are 30% of the horizontal<br />
task level will give a good balance. Careful use of wall-washing luminaires<br />
and indirect lighting can help produce a positive environment.<br />
Lamps with a colour-rendering index of 80 or more should be used to<br />
enhance visual performance and visual satisfaction.<br />
If the positions of the workstations are known and fixed it is more efficient to<br />
design the lighting to supply the correct amount of lighting to the task, but less<br />
lighting to circulation areas. For areas that may be reconfigured lighting<br />
controls may be used to set the light levels for individual luminaires in an array<br />
of luminaires to achieve the same effect.<br />
For rooms containing display screen equipment luminaires with suitable<br />
optical control to remove any bright luminance above 65° should be used.<br />
44 | Applications and Techniques
Office<br />
Drawing office<br />
Lighting for technical areas is critical to minimise errors. Any error in a drawing could be<br />
costly and potentially dangerous.<br />
Although drawing boards are becoming less common some offices do still<br />
use them. In such cases the lighting should provide adequate light levels over<br />
a reasonable range of tilt angles of the board, and be positioned so as to<br />
minimise shadowing onto the board.<br />
For CAD workstations luminaires should be chosen which have a minimal<br />
luminance at high angles from the downward vertical (e.g. angles close to<br />
the horizontal plane of the luminaire). When using indirect or direct/indirect<br />
luminaires care should be taken to ensure that the ceiling luminance is not too<br />
high as this can produce images on the computer screen.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Reception desk<br />
Main objective is to provide visitors with a visible first point of contact and employees<br />
with a transition zone from exterior and interior lighting levels.<br />
Light naturally attracts people so a well lit reception area and reception desk<br />
will help orientate visitors by giving them a visible point of reference.<br />
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous<br />
pathway<br />
Entrances with high ceilings lend themselves to the use of uplighting or<br />
suspended lighting, both of which tend to provide good modelling.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 45
Office<br />
Conference rooms<br />
Main objectives are to ensure that people have adequate light to perform their tasks<br />
(such as reading, writing), that any presentation aids used are clearly visible, and that<br />
modelling is suitable to allow good communication between people.<br />
A good vertical illuminance component should exist to aid the visibility of<br />
wall-displays and improve modelling. Moderately strong modelling is<br />
desirable for formal communication, whilst softer modelling is more suitable<br />
for informal or close contact. Modelling is of special importance in areas<br />
that may be used by people with special needs who may utilise lip-reading<br />
or signing.<br />
Specialised lighting for whiteboards may be installed to ensure good visibility<br />
for all participants. These luminaires should not cause glare for the user of the<br />
whiteboard and should be positioned to minimise shadowing during use. If<br />
audio-visual projectors are used the luminaires should not impede the<br />
projector beam and cause shadowing.<br />
Flexible luminaire controls should be employed to allow the use of projectors<br />
or other audio-visual equipment and to set a luminous environment suitable for<br />
the meeting purpose.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
General office<br />
Main objective is to ensure that people have adequate light to perform their tasks quickly<br />
and accurately without any stress or strain caused by poor light levels or poorly<br />
positioned lighting causing visual disability or discomfort.<br />
Whilst recommendations and standards define suitable lighting levels for<br />
office based work consideration should also be given to the demands of the<br />
task. For work involving small or complex detail lighting levels required for<br />
accurate working will be higher than those necessary for more general office<br />
tasks. If a minority of people in a large office perform these tasks local<br />
lighting may be suitable for these workers.<br />
46 | Applications and Techniques
Office<br />
Care should be taken when positioning luminaires and workstations to ensure<br />
that the worker does not create shadows on the task. Ensuring that all<br />
workstations are lit by more than one luminaire and from a variety of<br />
directions can prevent this occurring.<br />
Tasks frequently involve the transfer of paper-based information onto a<br />
computer. In many instances special attachments are used to hold the paper<br />
next to the computer screen in a vertical or near vertical orientation. Therefore<br />
it must be ensured that the vertical illuminance is sufficient to allow good<br />
visibility of the paper-based task.<br />
When writing, typing or reading paper-based material the contrast rendering<br />
factor (CRF) of the task is important. This indicates how effectively the lighting<br />
system minimises unwanted shiny reflections in the task. The CRF is sensitive to<br />
the geometry between the luminaires, task and observer and should either be<br />
calculated or measured. If the CRF is too low altering the lighting layout or<br />
moving the location of the task should be considered.<br />
It should be ensured that light levels on the walls are suitable for comfortable<br />
use of notice boards, whiteboards, etc. However, overly aggressive or poorly<br />
designed lighting of shiny artefacts on the walls (such as whiteboards or<br />
glazed pictures) may result in some workers having problems with reflected<br />
glare.<br />
When filing or retrieving information from a storage system it is frequently<br />
necessary to read information on a vertical surface, such as the front of a drawer<br />
of a filing cabinet. Therefore, adequate vertical illuminance levels should be<br />
provided.<br />
Luminaires should be positioned to ensure that the user does not create<br />
shadowing over filing systems or copiers when standing in front of them.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 47
Office<br />
Schemes<br />
Office lighting<br />
Scheme: Meeting room, 4.4m x 4.4m x 2.8m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 9 Corsa 200 2x26W TC-D<br />
Desk: Eav = 468 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.86<br />
Scheme: Boardroom, 7m x 6.5m x 2.8m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 12 Corsa 200 2x26W TC-D and 16 Chalice LV 50W<br />
Desk: Eav = 479 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.62<br />
Scheme: Civil circuit judge court, 7m x 6.5m x 2.8m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 23 MenloSoft 3x24W T16 and 5 Planor 2x24W T16 wall mounted<br />
Workplane: Eav = 569 lux. (1m above floor)<br />
48 | Applications and Techniques<br />
Scheme: Circulation routes, 2.8m wide x 2.8m high<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Indi-Quattro 2x36W TC-L on 3m<br />
centres<br />
Desk: Eav = 255 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.41
Office<br />
Recessed MenloSoft luminaires lighting a large open plan<br />
office. The appearance of the luminaire gives a lively feel to the<br />
ceiling, which might otherwise appear uninteresting. A good<br />
distribution of light prevents walls appearing dark and<br />
uninviting.<br />
Pendant Planor luminaires lighting a small office area.<br />
Small offices frequently feel enclosed and cramped. The light<br />
distribution from the luminaire lights the ceiling and walls,<br />
making the space feel larger and more cheerful, and the fittings<br />
seem to float in the space.<br />
Recessed luminaires controlled by the SensaLink system<br />
(see Section 6.1). The luminaires have integrated detectors<br />
allowing them to adjust the lighting levels according to the<br />
amount of daylight flowing in from the large window on the<br />
edge of the office.<br />
Quattro T Line luminaires with reflector optics in a large<br />
open plan office. This minimises potential problems of the<br />
lighting causing reflections in computer screens (see Section<br />
6.2) and allows a clean uncluttered feel to the ceiling. Care<br />
needs to be taken to prevent dark walls and ceiling making the<br />
room feel gloomy and uninviting.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 49
6.3 Education<br />
Techniques:<br />
General<br />
The purpose of a school or college building is to provide a facility that aids and<br />
promotes learning for all age groups in a safe and fulfilling environment. The lighting<br />
should support this aim in all teaching and ancillary areas.<br />
Luminaires need to be physically robust, not easily damaged, and easy to<br />
maintain<br />
The ambience of different areas should be suitable for the activity performed<br />
there. For example by treating an art or music room as more than just another<br />
classroom the lighting can contribute to providing an inspiring atmosphere.<br />
Additional consideration should be given to any uses of the teaching space<br />
for extra-curricular activities or adult learning classes. If a large number of<br />
older students use the space light levels should be suitable, taking into<br />
account deterioration of the eye with age.<br />
Emergency lighting will be required in many parts of the building.<br />
Entrance hall<br />
Main objective is to provide visitors with a visible first point of contact and students and<br />
staff with a transition zone from exterior and interior lighting levels.<br />
Light naturally attracts people so a well lit reception area and reception desk<br />
will help orientate visitors by giving them a visible point of reference.<br />
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous<br />
pathway<br />
Entrances with high ceilings lend themselves to the use of uplighting or<br />
suspended lighting, both of which tend to provide good modelling.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
50 | Applications and Techniques
Education<br />
Corridors/Staircases<br />
Main objective is to allow students and staff to move around the building safely.<br />
As corridors and staircases are also main exit routes for emergency situations good<br />
emergency lighting with way-guidance is necessary. Points of note are:<br />
Bright ceilings and walls can make corridor areas seem more open and<br />
appealing.<br />
Wall mounted fittings can model peoples faces better.<br />
Luminaires should be placed to help orientation by providing a luminous<br />
pathway<br />
For walls with an interesting texture using luminaires with a significant<br />
downlight component positioned close to the wall can create an interesting<br />
effect.<br />
Stairs should be well lit and glare free. Lighting should prevent heavy<br />
shadowing of steps, but must allow sufficient contrast for people to easily<br />
identify changes in level.<br />
Display lighting in corridors should be glare free for corridor users. Special<br />
care is needed near stairs to prevent display lights causing glare to people on<br />
the staircase.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Classrooms/Lecture halls<br />
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to perform their<br />
tasks (such as reading, writing), that students can see any teaching aids used (such as a<br />
whiteboard or projected information), that modelling is suitable to allow good<br />
communication between students and staff.<br />
A good vertical illuminance component should exist to aid the visibility of<br />
wall-displays and improve modelling. Moderately strong modelling is<br />
desirable for formal communication, whilst softer modelling is more suitable<br />
for informal or close contact. Modelling is of special importance in areas for<br />
students with special needs who may utilise lip-reading or signing.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 51
Education<br />
To help in the visibility of written text and diagrams a high contrast rendering<br />
factor (CRF) should exist at all desks.<br />
Specialised lighting for blackboards and whiteboards should be installed to<br />
ensure good visibility for all students. These luminaires should not cause glare<br />
for the user of the blackboard or whiteboard and be positioned to minimise<br />
shadowing during use. If audio-visual projectors are used the luminaires<br />
should not impede the projector beam and cause shadowing.<br />
For rooms containing display screen equipment luminaires with suitable<br />
optical control to remove any bright luminance above 65° should be used<br />
Flexible luminaire controls should be employed to allow the use of projectors or<br />
other audio-visual equipment. Flexible controls can also maximise the benefits of<br />
daylight by dimming selected luminaires under good daylight conditions.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Laboratories/Workshops<br />
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to perform their<br />
tasks (such as science experiments or craft projects) and that the lighting aids good<br />
visibility and therefore safety. Points of note are:<br />
Light falling on any position should be from multiple sources to prevent heavy<br />
shadowing of the task by the student. However a general drift of light should be<br />
present to help with modelling, as patterns of light and shade are essential to<br />
allow objects to be correctly discerned and to create an interesting environment.<br />
Good colour rendering is required.<br />
For areas using machinery high frequency control gear should be used to<br />
prevent any problems with stroboscopic effects resulting in rotating machinery<br />
appearing to be stationary.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
52 | Applications and Techniques
Education<br />
Sports halls<br />
Main objectives are to ensure that students and staff have adequate light to safely<br />
participate in sporting activities. These may require visibility of relatively small objects<br />
moving at high speed, or visual conditions suitable for the use of gymnastic equipment.<br />
Points of note are:<br />
All required sports should be defined and a design produced for the most<br />
stringent requirements.<br />
A good component of vertical illuminance should exist to aid the modelling of<br />
objects and people.<br />
Good colour rendering aids in the discrimination of team colours and sporting<br />
equipment such as balls, etc. against the hall background.<br />
The lighting should illuminate the entire three dimensional space, allowing<br />
high objects to be easily seen.<br />
The infinitely variable viewing positions of sports participants require good<br />
glare control.<br />
Luminaires should be robust and have protection against stray objects striking<br />
them (such as a wire guard to protect the lamps). Ideally luminaires should be<br />
designed and mounted to minimise the risks of object becoming trapped<br />
within or behind them.<br />
Lighting controls should be flexible to produce optimum conditions for all<br />
required sports.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Assembly halls<br />
Main objectives are to produce a suitable visual environment for all activities required<br />
within the space. These may be school meetings, rehearsals and performances of school<br />
productions, a space for formal written examinations, or others. Points of note are:<br />
This is a place where the school presents itself to visitors at open events such<br />
as school open days, meetings with parents or school productions and<br />
concerts. Lighting should be designed to project a suitable image for the<br />
school.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 53
Education<br />
Lighting control should be flexible to allow for lighting suitable for public<br />
meetings, and also lighting that provides the flexibility of a small theatre for<br />
public productions and concerts.<br />
Lighting should have no flicker to minimise possible stress in examination<br />
conditions.<br />
Lighting should prevent shadowing of the task by the student, such as question<br />
papers in formal examinations. Lighting should also gives a good CRF to<br />
ensure good visibility of written text and diagrams.<br />
Generally a viewing direction is defined by the hall design. Glare free<br />
viewing in this direction should be ensured under all lit conditions.<br />
For areas designed for presentations or performances, such as staging, good<br />
vertical illuminance and colour rendering are required to aid in modelling and<br />
discrimination.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
54 | Applications and Techniques
Education<br />
Schemes<br />
Classrooms<br />
Scheme: Design and Technology classroom, 15m x 7m x 2.7m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 15 custom 2x35W T16 luminaire<br />
Floor: Eav = 558 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.75<br />
Scheme: Circulation routes, varies x 2.7m high<br />
Sche me: Circulation rout es, Luminaire(s) varies x 2.7m used: high Chalice 190 2x26W TC-D on 2.4m<br />
Lumi naire(s) use d: Ch alice Floor: 190 2x26W Eav = 143 TC-D lux o; n Emin/Eav 2.4m ce = 0.22 ntres.<br />
Scheme: Storeroom, 1.7m x 3.5m x 2.8m Floor: Eav = 143lux; E min/Eav = 0.22<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 1 Diffusalux II 1x35W T16<br />
Floor: Eav = 96 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.88<br />
Scheme: Classroom, 7.5m x 5.5m x 2.6m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 6 Omega BD/MB 4x18W T26 and 2 Punch<br />
1x58W T26 lighting front board<br />
Desks: Eav = 518 lux ; Emin/Eav = 0.70<br />
Applications and Techniques | 55
Education<br />
Suspended linear direct/indirect luminaires in a<br />
university library. The ceiling adds significantly to the visual<br />
interest of the scene and the linear luminaires mimic the<br />
architecture of the ceiling beams, also producing a component<br />
of uplight that lights up the ceiling and give it life.<br />
Lyric ceiling mounted luminaires lighting a school corridor. The<br />
line of luminaires helps give guidance as to the shape of the<br />
corridor, and their appearance brightens the space and visually<br />
lifts the ceiling, making the corridor appear pleasant and airy.<br />
Recessed fluorescent luminaires lighting a classroom. The<br />
luminaires are laid out to permit maximum flexibility within the<br />
space and the walls are pleasantly lit to exhibit poster and<br />
displays children’s work. However, a lack of controls mean<br />
luminaires remain lit in unused sections of the room, and are<br />
unable to save energy by using the daylight spilling in from<br />
windows on the right of the photograph.<br />
56 | Applications and Techniques
6.4 Industry indoor<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The purpose of industrial lighting is to enable quick and accurate work, safely, and in a<br />
good visual environment. Points of note are:<br />
Illuminance on the task is the main criteria used for industrial lighting.<br />
Therefore the extent of the task area needs to be determined.<br />
Illuminance is often required for a vertical task. Illuminance on a vertical<br />
surface is much more sensitive to changes in the spacing between luminaires<br />
than illuminance on a horizontal surface.<br />
Industrial areas generally contain obstructions that affect the lighting. For<br />
overhead obstructions where possible install lighting below the obstruction. If<br />
the area contains a few large obstructions ensure that all parts of the space<br />
are lit by at least two luminaires. If the space contains multiple or extensive<br />
obstructions the spacing between luminaires will need to be reduced to<br />
counteract these and additional low level supplementary lighting may be<br />
required. In all cases care should be taken to ensure obstructions do not<br />
cause shadowing on the task.<br />
For lamps used in industrial lighting a colour-rendering index of not less than<br />
80 is required for all continuously occupied spaces. An exception is high bay<br />
applications where HST/HSE lamps are acceptable.<br />
In areas containing rotating machinery stroboscopic effects should be<br />
eliminated or reduced by either using high frequency control gear (if<br />
available) or by having alternate luminaires on different electrical phases and<br />
ensuring that critical areas receive light in approximately equal proportions<br />
from more than one luminaire. Alternatively lighting of the machinery may be<br />
supplemented using local luminaires.<br />
Emergency lighting will be required to aid in the safe evacuation of the<br />
building when the normal lighting fails. In some industrial applications there is<br />
an additional requirement to ensure all processes are in a safe and stable<br />
state before evacuating the area. For others there is a need to continue<br />
operations, even though the normal lighting has failed. The extent and nature<br />
of the emergency lighting required is determined by the type of occupancy,<br />
the size and complexity of the site and the processes involved.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 57
Industry indoor<br />
Luminaires should be chosen to ensure they are suitable for the environmental<br />
conditions in the space. Many industrial spaces have conditions of excessive<br />
heat, cold, vibration or a corrosive atmosphere. Information on any airborne<br />
chemicals is important as plastics and rubbers have differing resistance to<br />
specific chemicals. Additionally in hazardous environments the lighting<br />
equipment has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire<br />
or explosion (see chapter on directives and standards).<br />
Many industrial environments have impurities in the power supply due to<br />
electrical motors running, or couplers connecting/disconnecting huge loads<br />
giving spikes and voltage fluctuations. In conditions with poor quality of<br />
power low loss magnetic ballasts should be considered instead of electronic<br />
ballasts as they could be more durable and tolerant. Alternatively industrial<br />
high frequency circuits with extra protection may be available.<br />
At the design stage consideration should be given as to how the lighting<br />
installation is to be maintained. Frequently, access to light fittings is difficult<br />
and methods to improve ease of access should be considered, along with<br />
use of technology that minimises the necessity for intervention for<br />
maintenance.<br />
Factory spaces - Points of note are;<br />
Traditional factory spaces for heavy engineering and manufacturing have<br />
high ceilings combined with a dirty environment. High bay lighting is most<br />
suitable in these areas.<br />
More modern manufacturing areas tend to have lower ceilings and a cleaner<br />
environment. Linear fluorescent lighting is suitable for these areas and a<br />
selection of mounting methods exist, from track mounting to catenary systems.<br />
Lighting should take into account the possibility of moving overhead gantries<br />
and moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
58 | Applications and Techniques
Industry indoor<br />
Workshops - Points of note are;<br />
Tasks in a workshop vary from large tasks with little visual difficulty to small<br />
task with high visual difficulty. The designer needs to understand the degree<br />
of difficulty of the task to ensure that the task is adequately lit for the degree of<br />
difficulty.<br />
Generally ceiling heights are intermediate to low, and uniform lighting is<br />
required across the entire space. Therefore either linear fluorescent reflector<br />
luminaires or low bay luminaires with HID lamps are suitable<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Assembly work - Points of note are;<br />
Assembly work can vary from large tasks with little visual difficulty to small task<br />
with high visual difficulty. Additionally colour discrimination may be of little<br />
importance or essential. The designer needs to understand the degree of<br />
difficulty of the task to ensure that the task is adequately lit for the degree of<br />
difficulty.<br />
In areas with lower ceilings fluorescent lighting is most suitable. The<br />
advantages of this are the ability to produce fairly shadow free conditions, a<br />
wide choice of lamps of different colour rendering capabilities and colour<br />
appearance, and the ease of using lighting controls and emergency lighting.<br />
For ceiling heights of 6m or less, care should be taken when using low bay<br />
luminaires to prevent excessive glare.<br />
Lighting should take into account the safety of pedestrians in the presence of<br />
moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.<br />
Store rooms - Points of note are;<br />
For bulk storage at floor level it is generally important to avoid dense<br />
shadows. A reasonable illuminance on vertical surfaces is required if the<br />
reading of identification marks or labels is frequently necessary.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 59
Industry indoor<br />
A suitable method of lighting these spaces is to use a closely spaced overhead<br />
layout of luminaires with a wide distribution.<br />
Lighting should take into account the safety of pedestrians in the presence of<br />
moving vehicles such as forklift trucks.<br />
Storage rack areas - Points of note are;<br />
High racking can reduce lighting levels by up to 50%. Therefore an empty<br />
space calculated for 300 lux will only achieve approximately 150 lux if high<br />
racks are installed with narrow aisles.<br />
It is good practice to light narrow aisles with runs of fluorescent luminaires<br />
with narrow distributions arranged along the aisles to even out the vertical<br />
illuminance from top to bottom of the racking whilst giving adequate<br />
illumination along the aisle.<br />
For mounting heights above 15m HID lamps may be used in luminaires with<br />
a narrow lighting distribution across the aisle and a wide lighting distribution<br />
along the aisle.<br />
Cold stores - Points of note are;<br />
It must be ensured that the lamp and luminaire chosen are capable of<br />
operating within the low temperatures involved.<br />
Thermally insulated fluorescent lamps may be used. Alternatively high pressure<br />
sodium lamps can operate reliably at –40°C.<br />
Food and drink processing plants - Points of note are;<br />
The food and drink industry covers a vast range of working areas, where<br />
ambient temperatures can range from –30°C to 50°C, from oil or fat vapour<br />
laden atmospheres to hazardous environments where the lighting equipment<br />
has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire or<br />
explosion. Therefore great care must be taken to ensure a suitable luminaire is<br />
chosen for the specific conditions.<br />
Where food product is processed luminaires near the product should be<br />
housed in an enclosure that prevents the lamp or any part of the luminaire<br />
accidentally falling into the product.<br />
The luminaire should be easily cleaned, maintained and re-lamped, having<br />
minimum horizontal surface area upon which dust can rest and smooth lines<br />
with no crevices in which fungus can grow (IP55 minimum).<br />
60 | Applications and Techniques
Industry indoor<br />
Schemes<br />
Aircraft Hanger<br />
Scheme: Aircraft maintenance hanger, 125m x 40m, varying height<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Concavia XL 1000W HIE, mounting height 15m, Concavia L 400W HIE, mounting<br />
height 9m and Concavia L 250W HIE, mounting height 7m<br />
Hanger area floor: E av = 591 lux ; E min /E av = 0.71<br />
Applications and Techniques | 61
Industry indoor<br />
Schemes<br />
Storage racking<br />
Scheme: Storage racking, racks 5.1m long x 6m high<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 12 Indus RDx 2x49W T16, mounting height 6m<br />
Racking: Eav (vertical) = 137 lux<br />
A train workshop lit using fluorescent battens mounted on<br />
trunking. The luminaires are positioned between the trains to<br />
give a good vertical component of light falling on the sides of<br />
the carriages.<br />
Factory lighting using Popular Range luminaires. The<br />
luminaires are track mounted to allow easy modification of the<br />
lighting layout. It may therefore be easily adjusted to suit the<br />
requirements or any changes to the layout of the factory space.<br />
62 | Applications and Techniques
Industry indoor<br />
Low-bay luminaires lighting a machine workshop. The Lopak<br />
luminaires provide a good even illumination, allowing work<br />
upon complex machines with minimum shadowing. Note that<br />
this task has no special requirement for colour discrimination. If<br />
this was the case the lamp type should be chosen to show<br />
colours correctly.<br />
Hi-bay luminaires lighting a large factory space. The luminaires<br />
need to be able to cope with the relatively hostile and dirty<br />
environment, and due to problems of access maintenance<br />
requirements for the luminaires need to be minimal. The shape<br />
of the luminaire aids in self-cleaning, directing air within the<br />
reflector to help remove dirt, and the use of high pressure<br />
sodium lamps ensures a long lamp life.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 63
6.5 Industry outdoor<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The purpose of industrial lighting is to enable quick and accurate work, safely, and in a<br />
good visual environment. Points of note are:<br />
Illuminance on the task is the main criteria used for industrial lighting.<br />
Therefore the extent of the task area needs to be determined.<br />
Illuminance is often required for a vertical task. Illuminance on a vertical<br />
surface is much more sensitive to changes in the spacing between luminaires<br />
than illuminance on a horizontal surface.<br />
Industrial areas generally contain obstructions that affect the lighting. For<br />
overhead obstructions where possible install lighting below the obstruction. If<br />
the area contains a few large obstructions ensure that all parts of the space<br />
are lit by at least two luminaires. If the space contains multiple or extensive<br />
obstructions the spacing between luminaires will need to be reduced to<br />
counteract these and additional low level supplementary lighting may be<br />
required. In all cases care should be taken to ensure obstructions do not<br />
cause shadowing on the task.<br />
Luminaires should be chosen to ensure they are suitable for the environmental<br />
conditions in the space. Many industrial spaces have conditions of excessive<br />
heat, cold, vibration or a corrosive atmosphere. Information on any airborne<br />
chemicals is important as plastics and rubbers have differing resistance to<br />
specific chemicals. Additionally in hazardous environments the lighting<br />
equipment has to be carefully selected to ensure it does not pose a risk of fire<br />
or explosion (section 9 - Directives and Standards).<br />
Many industrial environments have impurities in the power supply due to<br />
electrical motors running, or couplers connecting/disconnecting huge loads<br />
giving spikes and voltage fluctuations. In conditions with poor quality of<br />
power low loss magnetic ballasts should be considered instead of electronic<br />
ballasts as they could be more durable and tolerant. Alternatively industrial<br />
high frequency circuits with extra protection may be available.<br />
At the design stage consideration should be given as to how the lighting<br />
installation is to be maintained. Frequently access to light fittings is difficult<br />
and methods to improve ease of access should be considered, along with<br />
use of technology that minimises the necessity for intervention for<br />
maintenance.<br />
64 | Applications and Techniques
Industry outdoor<br />
Building sites<br />
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain<br />
machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians, along with building materials,<br />
excavations and incomplete structures.<br />
Building sites can provide a special environment, in that it is common for a<br />
maximum permissible voltage of 110V to be stipulated for all equipment that<br />
is accessible to site workers. This excludes the use of high-pressure discharge<br />
fixtures except where installed at a height that excludes access by normal site<br />
personnel. Temporary lighting is normally by special linear fluorescent or<br />
tungsten halogen luminaires.<br />
Luminaires should be sited to allow for vehicular access to all necessary<br />
areas.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Cargo handling, storage areas<br />
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain<br />
machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians and in which the size and position of<br />
obstructions may vary over time.<br />
Care should be taken to avoid lighting obscuring or decreasing the visibility<br />
of signalling equipment. This can include direct light and reflected light from<br />
other surfaces.<br />
Lighting equipment should be sited to ensure it does not obstruct movement of<br />
cargo handling equipment, and should not be in too close proximity to<br />
electrified lines.<br />
Higher light levels are required in areas where goods are loaded/unloaded<br />
and for potential conflict areas where cargo is sorted into handling bays or<br />
railway sidings.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 65
Industry outdoor<br />
For large container storage areas general area lighting may be insufficient for<br />
giving adequate light on the task. Additional task lighting in the form of<br />
floodlights mounted on crane structures, or low voltage sealed beam units<br />
mounted on forklift trucks can be used. Additional local lighting can also be<br />
used mounted on fixed hoppers and conveyors. It should be ensured that the<br />
transition between areas with higher light levels to those with lower light levels<br />
is gradual to allow the eye to adapt to the changed light level.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Petrochemical and other hazardous areas<br />
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area which may contain a<br />
hazardous atmosphere, machinery, motorised vehicles and pedestrians and in which the<br />
consequences of safety issues may be especially serious.<br />
For petrochemical facilities and tank farms plant layout is normally complex<br />
with major light obstruction and work being performed at many levels above<br />
ground level. High mounted floodlights in a number of positions situated<br />
outside the main area can provide adequate light for safe movement and<br />
some task work. Additional task lighting may be required for specific<br />
locations.<br />
Luminaires used should be correct for the environment they are used in.<br />
Environments are classified using the ATEX system and luminaires should be<br />
adequate for the ATEX classification of the environment (section 9, Directives<br />
and Standards).<br />
66 | Applications and Techniques
Industry outdoor<br />
Quarries and open cast workings<br />
Main objective is to provide a safe work environment in an area that may contain<br />
machinery, motorised vehicles, pedestrians and uneven and loose ground conditions.<br />
With quarries and open cast mines the dimensions of the area to light will<br />
change over time. Therefore the lighting installation should be designed for<br />
the expected maximum dimensions of the excavations, both in size and depth<br />
of workings. This will help prevent the need to relocate lighting masts, and<br />
will allow forward planning for additional lighting to be installed as the<br />
workings increase in size. As the workings increase in size re-aiming of<br />
existing luminaires may be required.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Sales areas<br />
Main objective is to advertise the presence of the sales area, and to allow customers to<br />
examine and purchase goods. For areas such as petrol filling stations, safety is also very<br />
important and local regulations for these should be consulted.<br />
The illuminance of the sales area should be proportional to the brightness of<br />
the surrounding district and should respect the requirements for the<br />
environmental lighting zone classification (see section on control of obtrusive<br />
light).<br />
A high vertical component of light is generally required to show the sales<br />
goods. Additionally the colour rendering qualities of the lighting should be<br />
chosen to ensure the goods are displayed with a good colour appearance.<br />
If the sales area is adjacent to a road care should be taken to ensure the<br />
lighting does not introduce glare to motorists or pedestrians.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 67
Industry outdoor<br />
Lorry parks<br />
Main objective is to provide a safe environment in an area that contains large motorised<br />
vehicles and pedestrians.<br />
Where possible lorry parks should be lit from the boundaries of the parking<br />
area. This minimises the risk of columns and lighting being damaged by<br />
manoeuvring vehicles. If columns have to be mounted within the parking area<br />
they should be protected by crash barriers or similar.<br />
Lighting should be mounted as high as possible (12m or more above ground<br />
level) to minimise shadowing from lorry trailers.<br />
Ease of maintenance should be considered during design, and head-frames<br />
that may be raised and lowered should be considered.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
68 | Applications and Techniques
Industry outdoor<br />
Schemes<br />
Transformer sub-station<br />
Scheme: Transformer sub-station<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Troika 400W HST (main building) and PRT 500W QT-DE with 3m mounting<br />
height (transformer areas)<br />
Typical transformer area: E av = 23 lux<br />
Applications and Techniques | 69
Industry outdoor<br />
Schemes<br />
Railway lighting<br />
Scheme: Railway lighting, section 100m x 24m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Victor Stora 150W HST catenary mounted with 7.3m mounting height,<br />
3 luminaires per wire, and 250W HST mounted columns with 10.3m<br />
mounting height, 1 luminaire per column. Columns spaced at 25m<br />
Track area: E av = 41 lux ; E min /E av = 0.22<br />
Floodlighting at a port facility. The floodlights mounted on<br />
the top of the structure light the suspended walkway, whilst<br />
additional floodlights mounted below the walkway prevent<br />
deep shadows being cast by the walkway onto the dockside.<br />
70 | Applications and Techniques
6.6 Healthcare<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The lighting of healthcare spaces presents one of the most difficult tasks for any lighting<br />
designer, lighting both for an enormous range of tasks, some times requiring extreme<br />
levels of visual performance and yet creating a space that satisfies today’s energy<br />
requirements and just as importantly the comfort needs of the patients, staff and visitors.<br />
The choice of lighting can affect task performance, well-being and whether patients and<br />
visitors feel the space is clean and safe. The information given below is in two sections,<br />
the fundamental requirements for lighting for healthcare and lighting requirements for<br />
specific locations.<br />
The fundamental requirements for lighting for healthcare could be as follows:<br />
Cleanliness<br />
Infection control is of prime importance in all healthcare buildings. Airborne<br />
particulates as small as 0.5µm can transfer harmful bacteria. In addition,<br />
transmission by the touch of a hand can add to the spread of infection. In<br />
lighting terms we need to defend against this by using luminaires that have<br />
the minimum area of horizontal or near horizontal surfaces on which dust may<br />
collect. All luminaires that could collect dust or be touched by hand should be<br />
designed to be easily cleaned.<br />
In areas of high infection risk, luminaires with only downward and vertical<br />
faces or those specifically designed for clean environments. Such luminaires<br />
will utilise materials impervious to bacteria, and also designed with suitable<br />
ingress protection for dust and moisture both into the luminaire and from the<br />
ceiling void through the luminaire into the clean space.<br />
Daylight<br />
Research shows that daylight and window view can have positive effects on<br />
patients, their sleep patterns, circadian rhythms and recovery rates form many<br />
illnesses. Thus it is common practice for modern spaces to include good<br />
daylight design. Given that good levels of daylight should be expected in<br />
areas for treatment, administration, waiting, circulation and overnight stay, the<br />
use of lighting controls offers not only added comfort but also impacts heavily<br />
on energy. The addition of lighting controls can allow for changing tasks,<br />
changes in daylight and add levels of user comfort to a space.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 71
Healthcare<br />
Fields of view<br />
Colour<br />
Remember that the field of view in many healthcare spaces may include the<br />
ceiling and upper walls and often may include luminaires. The point of view<br />
of a recumbent patient will need to be thought about to limit discomfort glare<br />
in many circulation and treatment spaces.<br />
Skin tone and eye colour in many healthcare establishments are often<br />
important in diagnosis. This is extended to include flesh and other colours<br />
during invasive treatments. Hence the ability of light sources to render true<br />
colours is vital in all areas where diagnosis and treatment is carried out, and<br />
a consistent, high quality source of colour rendering should be provided. All<br />
lamps within these areas should have an Ra of at least 90.<br />
In other spaces where diagnosis and treatment is not carried out colour<br />
rendering can be relaxed to an Ra of 80, but on no account should lamps of<br />
different colour rendering be mixed in the same space.<br />
The other aspect to colour is that of colour temperature. Common practice is<br />
to use 4000K lamps in all healthcare spaces, but in areas where there is a<br />
wish to provide a more homely feel, the colour temperature may need to be<br />
matched to that prevalent at home, for example nearer 2700K for the UK.<br />
Similarly different colour temperatures should not be mixed in any one space.<br />
Emergency lighting<br />
Emergency lighting is required for the movement of patients, staff and visitors<br />
to a place of safety. In certain healthcare buildings the emergency lighting<br />
will need to take account of tasks that have to continue even when other<br />
spaces may be evacuated, this is called Standby lighting. In critical areas,<br />
such as operating theatres, delivery rooms and high dependency units, the<br />
illuminance provided by the standby lighting should equal 90% of the normal<br />
mains illuminance or there about. Other important tasks but in non-critical<br />
areas will require standby lighting generally to 50% of the normal level.<br />
Some patients will almost certainly be physically or mentally incapacitated. In<br />
this case it is likely that the condition of patients will mean it is difficult to<br />
evacuate them in an emergency. Emergency lighting for these situations<br />
should be sufficient to allow progressive evacuation, or to allow time at points<br />
of refuge. Apart from the above emergency lighting should be designed to<br />
meet the requirements of EN1838.<br />
A generator will generally supply standby lighting and special account of the<br />
changeover and run up time will be needed. Escape routes generally will be<br />
covered by luminaires with integral emergency control gear.<br />
72 | Applications and Techniques
Healthcare<br />
Light for comfort<br />
Recent research shows strong links between good lighting, the colour of light<br />
and human comfort. For instance warm colour temperatures make patients<br />
look healthier and improve patient moral, but care must be taken to prevent<br />
compromising the ability for clinical diagnosis.<br />
Recent research also indicates that light therapy may have potential for<br />
improving the quality of life for elderly people. The reception of blue light<br />
decreases with age due to the aging of the eye reducing its efficiency,<br />
especially at the blue end of the spectrum. Also in the elderly the reduction in<br />
mobility and tolerance of adverse weather (such as cold, wind and rain)<br />
mean elderly people experience a reduction in ability to go out of doors.<br />
Therefore they receive less exposure to bright light, and especially bright light<br />
of the correct wavelengths. Additionally the circadian functions may be<br />
compromised through age and damage caused by small strokes. All of these<br />
result in poor quality of sleep. Light therapy may be used to help improve<br />
sleep quality, using both artificial light and by designing the environment to<br />
aid access to natural light and to make the outdoor environment more<br />
attractive and friendly. However the use of blue biased white light for health is<br />
still a relatively new concept with limited knowledge on benefits and potential<br />
side-effects so at present blue biased white light should be used sparingly and<br />
with care.<br />
Artificial lighting should incorporate features to help provide sufficient light<br />
during waking hours for health benefits, but during the night only provide<br />
minimum light for safety, preferable amber, orange or red in colour, to preserve<br />
the bodies sleep cycle. Importantly, the consequences of any artificial lighting<br />
on the carers should be carefully considered to prevent further problems.<br />
Colour and reflectance<br />
High reflectance materials are required to give visual lightness, otherwise the<br />
surface and hence the space itself will appear dark. Equally areas of strong<br />
colour, such as murals in children’s wards, will need to be well lit to give full<br />
vibrancy.<br />
High chroma colours will affect clinical diagnosis – Grey is a good, if boring,<br />
clinical background and has been shown to relax and reduce stress. But the<br />
effect of surface colour can be immense, not only in terms of reflected light but<br />
also energy efficiency and wellbeing. For instance colour should be chosen to<br />
flatter the patients appearance, soft lighting enhances this. Also consider<br />
colour psychology e.g. Use of blues and green (used for calming effect in<br />
mental health institutions) may actually exacerbate depression, the modern<br />
fashions (greys and browns) may be under stimulating for long-term patients.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 73
Healthcare<br />
The lighting requirements for specific locations could be as follows:<br />
Entrance canopies<br />
It is important that entrances are clearly lit to advertise the way into the<br />
building whilst providing sufficient light for the task perhaps including driving,<br />
unloading ambulances, access for wheel chairs, and so on.<br />
Lighting solutions should provide good vertical illumination avoiding down<br />
lights with harsh cut-offs. This will provide good facial recognition for CCTV.<br />
Entrance halls, waiting areas and lift lobbies<br />
Reception<br />
Lighting here should emphasise points of interest such as reception desks,<br />
signage and onward routes.<br />
Where there are a number of routes to different departments signage may<br />
take the form of coloured lines, flooring or other decoration, the lighting<br />
should enhance this where ever possible<br />
These areas, including enquiry and patient reception, should make the patient<br />
and visitor feel welcome and provide both staff and visitors with good facial<br />
modelling through good vertical illuminance.<br />
Staff here will often have to use computer display screens, but the emphasis<br />
on this should never out weigh user comfort. An approach focused on the<br />
many tasks and points of view is important.<br />
Hospital streets and other circulation routes<br />
Hospital “streets” form the major links between clinical departments with<br />
smaller corridors often running off to other areas. Streets will have relatively<br />
high use and will be wider and often higher than conventional corridors. In<br />
many corridors, certainly those in areas occupied by patient’s overnight, the<br />
lighting will require dimming or switching to a lower level at night. This is can<br />
be achieved either through dimming or switching, care being needed to<br />
maintain uniformity above 0.2.<br />
Where there is sufficient daylight savings can be made using daylight linked<br />
dimming controls.<br />
Spill light and glare to patient rooms and to trolley bourn patients must also<br />
be considered, the latter being achieved through asymmetric luminaires<br />
mounted along one side of the corridor.<br />
74 | Applications and Techniques
Healthcare<br />
Stairs<br />
Ward corridors need specific night lighting techniques to allow safe<br />
movement of staff without affecting patient rest. The lighting near the doors to<br />
bedded wards will require careful illuminance and luminance control. Three<br />
hour self-contained emergency lighting is needed on all escape routes.<br />
Stairs require careful lighting and tread colour design to ensure the tread is<br />
clear to all users including those with visual disability. Treads need clear and<br />
reasonably uniform lighting with some element of contrast to the riser.<br />
Glare from wall-mounted fittings should be limited by using lower brightness<br />
light sources, whereas soffit mounted luminaires often create installation and<br />
maintenance problems.<br />
Stairs will need careful emergency lighting.<br />
WCs, washrooms and changing areas<br />
Lighting should be sympathetic avoiding harsh directional light or shadowing.<br />
Lighting should be positioned for lockers, mirrors sinks and make up areas<br />
with the task, facial modelling and veiling reflections in mind.<br />
In wet or humid environments the lighting should be of a suitable ingress<br />
protection, normally IP54 or better.<br />
Lighting of bedded areas<br />
The general lighting must be adequate for the care of the patients by the<br />
nursing staff. For these duties to be performed efficiently the illuminance inside<br />
a curtained bedded area should be no less than 300 lux from a combination<br />
of ambient and task lighting and the illuminance in the central space between<br />
the bed foot rails should be not less than 100 lux (75 lux when all curtains<br />
are closed), measured at floor level. Good glare control is needed with UGR<br />
limited to 19. However, note that in some countries additional luminaire<br />
luminance limits are also specified.<br />
The balance of brightness and colour of the surroundings should help to<br />
provide a visually pleasing interior. To achieve this the reflectance of the major<br />
surfaces should be of the order of 0.7 for the ceiling, 0.5 for the walls and<br />
0.2 for the floor, though higher ceiling and wall reflectance is essential when<br />
lighting the ward from the bed head position.<br />
Suspended luminaires: The ceiling height for suspended luminaires should not<br />
be less than 3m to ensure adequate clearance for mobile apparatus used at<br />
the bedside. The mounting height above the floor should not be less than<br />
2.7m nor greater than 3.5m.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 75
Healthcare<br />
Ceiling mounted luminaires: The ceiling height may be 3m or less. In areas<br />
with ceiling heights between 2.4m and 2.7m, it is possible to provide the<br />
recommended illuminance at the bedhead only by using ceiling mounted<br />
luminaires.<br />
Wall mounted luminaires: Modern lighting systems comply with the general<br />
recommendations using only semi direct wall mounted luminaires with<br />
fluorescent lamps. The most suitable height for wall-mounted luminaires is a<br />
minimum of 1.7m.<br />
Recessed and semi-recessed luminaires: Recessed and semi-recessed<br />
luminaires may be used in ceilings between 2.4m and 3m high. If these<br />
luminaires will not provide the illuminance required at the bedhead a dual<br />
system will be required.<br />
Dual systems: For dual systems in which supplementary lighting along the side<br />
walls of the bedded area is used, ceiling mounted luminaires may still be<br />
suitable.<br />
Reading lights/examination lighting: The patient’s reading light is required to<br />
give 300 lux directly on a task area in front of the patient. Staff or nursing<br />
tasks at the bedhead can also use the reading light. If treatment is given at<br />
the bedside requiring an illuminance exceeding 300 lux, either a mobile<br />
examination luminaire is required or the reading light is to be designed to<br />
provide this illuminance by switching. Hand-held switches, if used, should be<br />
of the extra low voltage type. Reading lights are usually provided for all beds<br />
in hospitals, but it may be undesirable to have them within easy reach of<br />
children and mentally ill patients. For such circumstances, high-level wall or<br />
ceiling mounted luminaires should be used and the switches should be out of<br />
the patient’s reach.<br />
Night lighting: Night lighting is required to provide enough light for safe<br />
movement of patients and staff. It should not disturb lightly sleeping patients.<br />
The luminance of any luminaire left on during the night should not exceed<br />
30 cd/m2 as seen by patients from their beds, the cut off angle being 20°<br />
within the curtained area and 35° in central zones. The illuminance for the<br />
circulation space should be an average 5 lux on circulation spaces, 0.85m<br />
off the floor and a maximum of 10lux. The illuminance on the bedhead<br />
should not exceed 0.5 lux<br />
Watch lighting: The purpose of watch lighting is to allow continuous<br />
observation of a particular patient after the general lighting has been<br />
switched off, without the disturbance, which would be caused by the patient’s<br />
reading light. An illuminance of 15-20 lux is adequate.<br />
76 | Applications and Techniques
Healthcare<br />
Nurses’ stations and staff bases<br />
Nurses’ stations provide for a number of tasks including dispensing medicine,<br />
ad hoc meetings, greeting visitors and PC use. Lighting should allow for all<br />
these tasks both during the day and at night. To do so will require lighting that<br />
has good luminance control both to reduce glare to PC users and patients<br />
sleeping nearby.<br />
Dimming control is essential to allow staff to reduce the illuminance at night.<br />
Operating Theatres and associated clinical spaces<br />
Lighting here needs to provide for clinical examination, preparation, treatment<br />
and movement, this will include good vertical illuminance from the ambient<br />
lighting. The theatre surgical lights are specialist and should be provided as<br />
part of the overall theatre equipment.<br />
Lighting colour rendering and temperature should be chosen for clinical<br />
diagnosis rather than energy efficiency.<br />
In an emergency all lighting should be retained at full brightness.<br />
Lighting also needs to provide good uniformity, be dimmable to suit the<br />
surgical need and take account of the high number of monitoring screens,<br />
often using negative polarity displays.<br />
Luminaires chosen for these spaces must be easy to clean and maintain and<br />
should have an IP rating of 65 from below and 54 or better from above.<br />
Ancillary areas & other specialist spaces<br />
Healthcare buildings contain many ancillary areas to do with the efficient and<br />
safe functioning of the whole building. Many of these are covered elsewhere,<br />
but special care may need to be paid to protecting healthcare environments<br />
from hospital bourn diseases. Improved IP ratings or luminaires suitable for<br />
regular wash down and cleaning may need to be considered.<br />
In specialist treatment and examination rooms not mentioned above there may<br />
be other requirements too, such as dimming and glare control in ophthalmic<br />
rooms, noise and EMC control in scanner and audiology and electromedical<br />
screening rooms.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 77
Healthcare<br />
Schemes<br />
Healthcare rooms<br />
Scheme: 4-bed ward, 7.6m x 6.6m x 2.7m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Bedhead mounted uplight and reading light<br />
Ward floor: E av = 141 lux ; E min /E av = 0.68<br />
Scheme: Consulting room, 8m x 3m x 2.7m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 3 Diffusalux Hospital 2x35W T16<br />
Desk height: E av = 440 lux ; E min /E av = 0.7<br />
78 | Applications and Techniques
Healthcare<br />
Lighting in hospital wards may use bed head luminaires with<br />
integrated services such as oxygen, electricity, etc. or ceiling<br />
mounted luminaires (either surface mounted or recessed). The<br />
advantage of a bed head luminaire is the flexibility of lighting,<br />
with uplighting supplying ambient light to the ward, and<br />
differing amounts of down light allowing a patient to read or a<br />
doctor to examine the patient. An additional advantage for bed<br />
head systems is ease of access for maintenance and cleaning.<br />
Ceiling mounted luminaires allow easier centralised control of<br />
lighting by nursing staff and may be a more energy efficient<br />
solution as, unlike bed head systems, they do not rely on uplight<br />
being reflected from the ceiling to give ambient lighting to the<br />
room. When using ceiling recessed lighting it is important that<br />
it is planned in conjunction with other services to ensure a clear<br />
space in the ceiling void for the luminaire.<br />
Corridors and circulation areas should be well lit and airy.<br />
Ideally ceiling mounted lighting should avoid the centre of<br />
the corridor as recumbent patients being wheeled along the<br />
corridor should not be looking directly into a luminaire as this<br />
may be glaring, and looking into luminaires whilst travelling<br />
down the corridor may create an unpleasant flicker effect.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 79
6.7 Super/hypermarket<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The purpose of a super/hypermarket lighting scheme is to make the store as appealing<br />
as possible to customers. It also needs to satisfy more down-to-earth requirements such as<br />
facilitating orientation or to attract customer attention to special displays or points of<br />
interests. Luminaires have to be chosen in order to underline and reinforce the individual<br />
character of the shop brand or chain of stores. Colour appearance of the light<br />
determines the overall ambience but colour rendering characteristics have a direct<br />
impact on ensuring that the objects are shown to their best advantage.<br />
The fundamental requirements for shop lighting could be as follows:<br />
Creating atmosphere: the way goods are presented and lit, as well as the<br />
general atmosphere, can positively influence a customer.<br />
Creating interest: using accent lighting to create areas that make a customer<br />
curious and wanting to see more.<br />
Visual guidance: the lighting must help the customer navigate around the<br />
shop.<br />
Flexibility: marketing trends and initiatives change frequently and in order to<br />
influence customers into rediscovering a shop it should be possible to easily<br />
adapt the lighting to new requirements.<br />
Lighting should allow consumers to examine the merchandise and should help<br />
complete the sale.<br />
General lighting<br />
Main objective is to provide a background ambience and to give light for guidance,<br />
especially in the case of frequent modifications to the store layout or promotions.<br />
As well as good horizontal light levels vertical light levels are important as<br />
shop goods tend to be held in vertical shelving units<br />
As this is background store lighting a high uniformity is required<br />
Luminaires should be placed perpendicular to shelving in order to facilitate<br />
any reorganisation of the shelving and the possibility of variable spacing of<br />
shelving due to different types of goods being sold in different areas.<br />
80 | Applications and Techniques
Super/hypermarket<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Accent lighting<br />
By locally increasing or decreasing the quantity of light it is possible to create variation<br />
in shadows and brightness. The aim of this is to give a maximum expression to<br />
merchandise, enhancing form, texture and colour in contrast with the surroundings.<br />
Ideally this should optimise the relationship between space, product and customer in<br />
order to enhance the prospects of a sale.<br />
Accent lighting should be at least 3x brighter than the surround to be<br />
noticeable or 5x brighter to be meaningful.<br />
Focal-point lighting, which highlights a specific central display with feature<br />
merchandise, should be 10x brighter than the surround and generally uses<br />
spotlighting<br />
Display case lighting illuminates merchandise in glass or open cases and<br />
shelves. It can be linear fluorescent or spotlighting depending on the type of<br />
display<br />
Perimeter lighting provides vertical illumination for merchandise along walls,<br />
such as vertical shelving and can use valance systems or linear wall-washing<br />
systems<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Lighting clothing<br />
The primary purpose of lighting is to make merchandise look good, increasing the<br />
desirability of the item leading to a sale. When lighting clothing a flexible lighting<br />
solution is needed to allow the lighting to be reconfigured when displays are altered or<br />
moved. The market positioning of the store (high, mid, low-tier) should be considered<br />
when designing the installation, and also the possible options for display, as clothing<br />
Applications and Techniques | 81
Super/hypermarket<br />
may be hung on rails, displayed on shelves or shown in an entirely novel way. Differing<br />
materials used in the design of the display fittings and the size of the displays will require<br />
differing lighting techniques. However lighting should remain discrete to ensure the main<br />
focus is the merchandise, and should be as efficient as practicable.<br />
One of the main issues with clothing is colour rendering and colour<br />
temperature. Customers need to see the items they are thinking of buying in a<br />
quality of light that shows the garment correctly. Any post purchase<br />
dissatisfaction when seeing the article in the daylight must be avoided. The<br />
Ra of the lamp must be at least 85 so that colours are reproduced as faithfully<br />
as possible. Also note that the UV characteristics of the lamp should be<br />
checked to ensure that it is suitable for the material being lit and will cause no<br />
effects such as fading of colours.<br />
New generations of metal halide lamp offer a wide choice of warm or cool<br />
white light. LEDs with their improved performance are also becoming more<br />
widely used. LED luminaires can be smaller and easy to blend into the<br />
background. However, downlights and track mounted spotlights remain the<br />
most common fixtures.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Greengrocery<br />
Main objectives are to ensure that fruits and vegetables are shown under the best colour<br />
rendering bright light. Using specific type of lamps that create colourful accents can<br />
bring out freshness of produce. Warm accents are preferred with a low content of<br />
actinic radiations (to prevent fading of colour in goods) and low heat radiation.<br />
This kind of light is often realised with suspended structures hanging above<br />
the displays allowing spotlights integration.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
82 | Applications and Techniques
Super/hypermarket<br />
Bakery, cheese and delicatessen<br />
A warm, oven-fresh appearance can be created on the bread, while cream pastries<br />
appear appetising when illuminated by halogen lamps or warm white metal halide.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Wines and spirits<br />
A lower lighting level helps to recreate the atmosphere of a wine cellar. With lower dark<br />
ceilings mounted with fluorescent downlights the atmosphere may be emphasised further.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Fresh food counters<br />
The ceiling is often lower than in the rest of the hypermarket. Recessed luminaires<br />
provide a good illuminance level, accentuating the freshness of the displays with a<br />
combination of different high Ra colour lamps.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 83
Super/hypermarket<br />
Task lighting<br />
This provides illumination for a specific functional area such as the checkout counter. This<br />
is not to be confused with accent or focal-point lighting. Particular attention has to be<br />
paid to avoid any glare at the cashier position in order to assure a comfortable activity<br />
with no mistakes. The area beyond the checkout should be lit to a level that provides a<br />
transition zone for shoppers leaving the supermarket and going into daylight or the dark<br />
of night.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Guidance<br />
Indoor guidance - due to the diversity of goods a clear communication with colours,<br />
graphemes, and lighting has to be established in order to guide customers. This<br />
guidance is sometimes mandatory for safety reasons: exit ways being indicated in case<br />
of emergency evacuations.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Signage<br />
Additional to guidance the use of lighting to signal locations and features is important.<br />
For outdoor lighting, facades, communication, logos, etc. help present the sales policy<br />
and brand positioning.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
84 | Applications and Techniques
Super/hypermarket<br />
Schemes<br />
Super-store<br />
Scheme: Computer super-store, 37m x 51m x 7m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Primata II 2x58W T26 with 5m mounting height, Sirios 150W HIT-DE<br />
(spotlight) and 2x55W Voyager Twinspot (emergency lighting)<br />
Sales area: Eav = 802 lux ; E min /E av = 0.68<br />
Applications and Techniques | 85
Super/hypermarket<br />
Schemes<br />
Hypermarket<br />
Scheme: Hypermarket, 80m x 63m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Arena 2x70W T26<br />
Floor: E av = 980 lux ; E min /E av = 0.83<br />
Wall-washing luminaires illuminating food products on shelving.<br />
It is important to ensure a good level of vertical illuminance<br />
on shelving so that products are adequately lit. Colour of light<br />
can make a large impact on the appearance of goods and<br />
should be carefully matched to the requirements of the product<br />
on display.<br />
86 | Applications and Techniques<br />
Scheme: Hypermarket, 80m x 63m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Arena 2x70W T26<br />
Floor: E av = 560 lux ; E min /E av = 0.76
Super/hypermarket<br />
The lighting should allow for large obstructions such as signage<br />
and seasonal decorations to be displayed without causing<br />
shadowing.<br />
Lighting demands may vary across the store, with differing<br />
store configuration and colour needs. Accent lighting along the<br />
front of counters can make them stand out and appear more<br />
welcoming.<br />
Consideration should be given as to the goods being lit. Glass<br />
and crystal objects should be made to sparkle, light appearing<br />
to come from inside the object, whilst solid objects such as<br />
clothes need to have light projected onto them.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 87
6.8 Road lighting<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The human eye does not perform well in the dark or at dusk when visual performance is<br />
impaired by lower visual acuity, poorer colour discrimination and a much lower<br />
tolerance to disability glare – hence the increased accident risk to drivers and<br />
pedestrians.<br />
Road lighting plays a very important role in reducing accidents, and research has<br />
shown that good road lighting will significantly reduce accidents. Road lighting provides<br />
guidance through conflict areas such as junctions. This can be reinforced by the use of<br />
different lamp colours to distinguish a change of road classification or area definition.<br />
Road lighting can also have a secondary effect of preventing crime.<br />
The amount of light required on a road to reveal objects i.e. vehicles, pedestrians and<br />
obstructions depends upon the amount or density of traffic, the speed of the traffic and if<br />
pedestrians are present – mixed usage areas. Crime rates also determine the lighting<br />
level required. For traffic routes a silhouette vision system is used.<br />
Operating costs and environmental impact are important and the use of photocells to<br />
reduce the number of hours the lighting is used can be very economical. Lighting control<br />
systems can provide even further savings by allowing switching or dimming of lamps at<br />
of-peak or night time situations. Points of note are:<br />
Luminance is the main criteria for traffic route lighting, so the road<br />
characteristics and the observer positions needs to be determined.<br />
If illuminance has to be considered all the involved areas have to be taken<br />
into account including vehicles and pedestrian.<br />
As one of main concerns in road lighting is extended maintenance operations<br />
luminaires with high IP ratings are recommended<br />
In addition to extended maintenance periods it is also desirable to reduce the<br />
maintenance and installation operations to a minimum, therefore the use of a<br />
tool-free lantern is suggested.<br />
Lamps with a high luminous efficacy are mainly used, preferably HST/E ones.<br />
Additionally latest technology has improved efficacy in lamps with a higher<br />
colour rendering such as CFL and HIT-CE and some of the latest standards<br />
benefit this technology and allows using a lower class but improving the<br />
quality of the light.<br />
88 | Applications and Techniques
Road lighting<br />
The use of electronic control gear is recommended. Although this increases<br />
initial investment it is shortly repaid by extending lamp life and maintenance<br />
periods.<br />
Lighting controls for road lighting applications cover a wide range of<br />
applications, from a single fitting controlled by a photocell to a large-scale<br />
installation monitored from a remote control point and managing luminaire<br />
data in real time. Therefore lighting controls should be considered because in<br />
addition to reducing power consumption they extend lamp life and give the<br />
possibility to remotely identify failures and optimise maintenance operations.<br />
Multiple fitting enclosures are available although each has an optimal<br />
application. Polycarbonate enclosures are more resistant to vandal attacks,<br />
shallow glass maximises optical performance and flat glass reduces possible<br />
glare issues.<br />
In low mounting height installations with a risk of vandal attacks, a<br />
polycarbonate bowl is highly recommended and the use of vandal proof<br />
screws to fix the luminaire to the column and reinforced closing clips secured<br />
by special screws are also recommended.<br />
When considering a possible proposal for a road it is recommended to have<br />
information of the existing road lighting. Many projects are a continuation of<br />
previous installations or new parts from a previously light area. In these cases<br />
it is good to introduce newer technologies without confusing the users. Better<br />
optical fittings can be used but try to keep a similar layout, mounting height,<br />
etc.<br />
At the design stage not only the requirements for the road have to be<br />
considered, in all cases the adjacent areas should be taken into account and<br />
that will define the best option. When houses and the road are close to each<br />
other low mounting heights, use of brackets and low glare fittings are a highly<br />
recommended although this may not lead to be the best functional solution.<br />
Highways and high speed roads - Points of note are;<br />
These roads are designed for high speeds (>60km/h) and no pedestrians,<br />
cyclists or slow vehicles are involved. There are no intersections and access is<br />
controlled.<br />
Traditional mounting heights are above 12 m to properly light a twin<br />
carriageway with 3 or 4 lanes plus a hard shoulder at either side. Brackets<br />
should be considered to optimise performance.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 89
Road lighting<br />
Although traditionally columns have been installed in a central reservation, an<br />
opposite installation with columns behind the hard shoulder can improve<br />
maintenance operations and reduce traffic disruption when in process.<br />
As glare becomes a major concern an optimised designed optic and/or the<br />
use of flat glass enclosures are necessary.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Main Roads - Points of note are;<br />
The main usage of the road is for vehicles at high speed (>60km/h) but<br />
pedestrians, cyclists or slow vehicles may also be present on footpaths, cycle<br />
paths and slow lanes. Intersections can be present and need special<br />
attention.<br />
A common installation is using columns around 10m high and in an opposite<br />
or twin central configuration but it needs to always be related to the road<br />
layout, the number of lanes involved and the lighting criteria to achieve.<br />
Where cycle and pedestrian pathways are present the use of luminaires with<br />
different lamp settings is beneficial to comply with requirements for the road<br />
and also to be able to correctly light the pathways without needing to change<br />
the pole characteristics.<br />
As in all road lighting applications a high IP rating has to be considered to<br />
extend maintenance periods.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
90 | Applications and Techniques
Road lighting<br />
Ring roads and radial roads - Points of note are;<br />
These are usually medium speed roads and high-speed urban roads where<br />
pedestrians and cyclists are common.<br />
Luminaire mounting heights around 8 and 10m in a staggered or single sided<br />
arrangement are usual, although many other possibilities can be considered<br />
due to the multiple layouts of these roads.<br />
As these roads can be of multiple lanes the main concern is the common use<br />
by cyclist and pedestrians usage.<br />
In some cases, when a road has many lanes and cycle and/or pedestrian<br />
pathways are also present the use of twin poles may be considered (i.e.<br />
using an additional luminaire at a separate mounting height to light the<br />
adjacent pathways) or alternatively the use of bollards which also provide a<br />
physical separation between traffic types. In these cases using different light<br />
sources for motorised and other traffic (such as high pressure sodium and a<br />
white light lamp) can help to differentiate between the two areas.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Mixed traffic roads - Points of note are;<br />
These are normally medium to low speed roads with a large number of slow<br />
vehicles and pedestrians. Intersections are very common. Regional roads and<br />
urban roads are mainly part of this group as well as commercial streets.<br />
Columns no higher than 8m are commonly used in a single sided or<br />
staggered layout, although in some commercial streets with wide footpaths an<br />
additional column and luminaire may be used to achieve high quality lighting<br />
and differentiate areas.<br />
For regional roads low luminance classes should be applied and illuminance<br />
classes where pedestrian usage is relevant.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 91
Road lighting<br />
Residential and local roads - Points of note are;<br />
These roads are normally used by low speed mixed traffic. Pedestrian areas<br />
and local and residential roads are mainly part of this group.<br />
Low mounting heights are common, with column height usually under 6m.<br />
Single sided layouts may be used to reduce installation costs although layouts<br />
may vary due to multiple access points to private car parks or properties. The<br />
use of staggered layouts is common when parking lanes and wide footpaths<br />
are present.<br />
Lighting classes tend to be from lower categories and in residential areas the<br />
use of high colour rendering lamps to improve perception is recommended.<br />
In applications where crime ratios are high and facial recognition is required<br />
vertical and semi-cylindrical illuminance classes should be applied.<br />
Low glare luminaires should be considered to reduce light trespass onto<br />
adjacent residential housing. Additionally the location and the orientation of<br />
the luminaires can help avoid any light trespass into houses.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Conflict areas and junctions - Points of note are;<br />
In these areas traffic, either motorised or pedestrian, converges from many<br />
directions. Lighting in these areas has to increase awareness and guidance to<br />
drivers and pedestrians regarding the geometry of the area and the position<br />
of other users.<br />
In terms of lighting the highest applicable class should be used in these areas,<br />
using the highest class of the incoming roads.<br />
92 | Applications and Techniques
Road lighting<br />
Access and exit lanes should be highlighted, including a short section of these<br />
lanes away from the conflict area. This is to ensure any obstacle in these<br />
areas is visible.<br />
When positioning the luminaires the main aim is to help the incoming vehicles<br />
visibility. When entering a junction from a minor road a luminaire should be<br />
positioned to make vehicles visible as they approach the conflict area.<br />
Columns can play a major role not only in terms of providing lighting but also<br />
to give guidance to the geometry of the area. A common technique is to<br />
increase the height of the columns in the conflict area and on the approaches.<br />
On roundabouts columns placed in a single sided configuration around the<br />
outer part of a curve provide a clear guidance for a driver as they approach<br />
the area.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 93
Road lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Traffic<br />
Scheme: Traffic route, 3 lanes, opposite arrangement. Total width 10.95m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Triumph 1 150W HST, 10m mounting height, 36m spacing, 5° tilt<br />
Road: L av = 5.75 cd/m² ; E min /E av = 0.59;<br />
Threshold increment = 2%<br />
Scheme: Access ramp, width 4m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Orus 70W CDM-T, 0.9m mounting height, 10.5m spacing<br />
Road: E av = 33 lux ; E min = 15 lux<br />
94 | Applications and Techniques
Road lighting<br />
Lighting columns and fixtures may be themed to blend into<br />
and complement the area they are situated within. Careful<br />
choice of column height is necessary to prevent lighting<br />
becoming excessively visible and detracting from the view.<br />
However, a column height that is too low will reduce installation<br />
performance and require additional lanterns.<br />
Whenever designing an installation the impact of the lighting<br />
hardware on a scene during daylight hours should be<br />
considered, as well as the performance of the lighting during<br />
darkness.<br />
Catenary lighting solutions in which the lanterns are suspended<br />
along the centre of the carriageway are popular in many<br />
countries and remove the need for lighting columns and<br />
brackets. This can create a less cluttered environment at street<br />
level, although in architecturally interesting areas thought should<br />
be given as to the effect of the additional cabling on the field<br />
of view.<br />
Frequently lighting columns collect additional street furniture,<br />
such as banners or signage. Lighting columns are constructed<br />
to withstand a defined windage (that is the force of the wind<br />
on the column). Windage is directly related to the surface<br />
area of any furniture mounted on or fixed to the column, and<br />
therefore adding additional objects to the column will increase<br />
the windage loading, and may cause weakening of the column<br />
and structural failure.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 95
6.9 Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
Amenity lighting provides the essential lighting for the city or town shopping centres,<br />
residential streets, cycle paths, pedestrian crossings, precincts, town squares, parks, car<br />
parks both indoor and outdoor, underpasses and general security lighting. The mix of<br />
slow moving vehicles and pedestrians creates a challenge and the main emphasis is<br />
towards pedestrians, reducing accidents and helping prevent crime and the fear of<br />
crime.<br />
Lighting can fulfil both functional and decorative elements by providing sufficient lighting<br />
to provide orientation and direction with security after dark. Good amenity lighting can<br />
provide guidance through city or town areas by the use of themed lighting, whether by<br />
using styled lighting equipment or by the use of different colour appearance light sources<br />
to provide aesthetic interest.<br />
Operating costs and environmental impact are important and the use of photocells to<br />
reduce the number of hours the lighting is used can be very economical. Lighting control<br />
systems can provide even further savings by allowing switching or dimming of lamps at<br />
of-peak or night time situations.<br />
Feeder Roads - Points of note are;<br />
The risk of accidents is much greater on feeder roads from the high volume<br />
and speed of vehicles, particularly where children, elderly, partially sighted<br />
and handicapped pedestrians are present. Correctly designed lighting<br />
systems however will help drivers and pedestrians recognise potentially<br />
dangerous situations and will also help reduce crime against people, vehicles<br />
and property.<br />
Feeder Roads generally use asymmetric light distribution street lanterns on<br />
8–10m columns with outreach arms to position the lantern in the optimum<br />
location for road geometry. Alternatively lanterns can be post top mounted<br />
(without the outreach arm) but the lanterns will need the ability to re-direct the<br />
lantern peak intensity (typically using an adjustable lampholder) into road<br />
centre to improve efficiency and reduce installation and running costs.<br />
For dual carriageway installations lanterns mounted back to back on centrally<br />
mounted lighting columns provide good economy and lighting efficiency.<br />
However it is important to ensure the pavements are adequately illuminated.<br />
96 | Applications and Techniques
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
White light sources – Metal halide, compact fluorescent and induction lamps<br />
provide good colour rendering conditions for drivers and pedestrians,<br />
improving visual perception and helping to provide early warning of<br />
impending situations. High-pressure sodium light sources are more efficient but<br />
suffer from poorer colour rendering characteristics.<br />
Vandalism should not be a problem to lanterns mounted at 8-10m but in<br />
extreme cases polycarbonate bowls might be required.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Local and residential roads - Points of note are;<br />
For local and residential roads post top lanterns on 5-8m poles with a<br />
symmetric or asymmetric distribution will help provide good vertical<br />
illuminance. Light above the horizontal should be avoided to reduce sky<br />
glow, improve efficiency and create less glare to drivers and residents.<br />
Narrow pavements may need lanterns mounted using wall brackets.<br />
Lanterns can be themed or styled to suit neighbourhood road and architectural<br />
layout. Strongly themed lanterns may require a lower mounting height 4-5m.<br />
White light sources provide good colour rendering conditions for drivers and<br />
pedestrians improving visual perception and helping to provide early warning<br />
of impending situations.<br />
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires may be required using polycarbonate.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 97
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Open Pedestrian/Shopping Precincts<br />
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrian’s with a feeling<br />
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:<br />
For arcades and canopied areas lighting levels should be relatively high to<br />
match those of the surrounding shop windows. Good colour rendering is<br />
important and therefore compact fluorescent and metal halide white light<br />
sources are preferred.<br />
Creating visual interest can help to highlight architectural features within the<br />
areas and can also provide guidance through the area.<br />
Post top lanterns on 4-6m high columns with a symmetric lighting distribution<br />
will help provide a good balance between the horizontal and vertical<br />
surfaces. Wall mounted luminaires or recessed IP rated downlights can be<br />
used to reduce installation costs associated with lighting columns.<br />
Architecturally/period styled lighting equipment will provide a good<br />
integration into the surrounding building architecture. This is especially<br />
important where daytime integration needs to be considered in architecturally<br />
sensitive areas.<br />
Light above the horizontal should be avoided to reduce sky glow, improve the<br />
efficiency of the installation and help prevent glare to drivers.<br />
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires may be required.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Squares/Open areas<br />
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrian’s with a feeling<br />
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:<br />
Access to squares is often through mixed vehicle and pedestrian access routes<br />
requiring high levels of illuminance for safety.<br />
A pleasing effect may be created using decorative or themed post top<br />
lanterns mounted on 5-6m high columns with architectural/themed styling.<br />
98 | Applications and Techniques
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Additional feature lighting for fountains, trees/shrubs and pathways should be<br />
used. The use of LED or low wattage metal halide ground inset uplights can<br />
create exciting lighting effects, guidance and interest, particularly when using<br />
colour and movement, helping to attract pedestrians into the square. Care<br />
must be taken to ensure good drainage is allowed for all inset uplights.<br />
Lighting bollards can help to reduce the visual impact of lighting equipment<br />
during the day. However care must be taken in positioning high brightness<br />
light sources at almost the same height as a car driver’s eye-line. The use of<br />
internal louvres or refractors will help reduce glare by shielding the bare<br />
lamp.<br />
The lighting of statues and adjacent buildings must be co-ordinated with the<br />
general ambient lighting level within the square so they compliment the overall<br />
effect.<br />
Fountains can be effectively lit using submersible floodlights beneath the<br />
falling water to make the light refract and spread over a wider area. The use<br />
of colour filters will also help the effect. Fibre optics and LED’s can be used to<br />
create colour and movement, particularly if the light emitting elements are<br />
positioned adjacent or inside the fountain spouts.<br />
Shrubberies, trees and flowerbeds can benefit from localised lighting to<br />
provide a contrasting effect at night. Light and shadow can be effective<br />
particularly on trees, even in winter. The use of colour filters can also help, but<br />
too much colour will reduce the efficiency of the lighting system.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Footpaths<br />
The object of the lighting should promote easy movement of pedestrian’s with a feeling<br />
of general security and well-being. Points of note are:<br />
The level of lighting is primarily determined by the crime risk whilst also<br />
providing guidance and the ability to negotiate obstructions and stairways.<br />
Dark patches and high light/dark contrasts should be avoided as they can<br />
affect adaptation and impair visibility. The lighting of areas adjacent to<br />
footpaths will help to improve the feeling of safety.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 99
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
For open areas such as parks the same lighting principles apply however<br />
crime prevention may require a higher uniformity and extra lighting to the<br />
sides of the footpath to create a safer feel to the pathway. Good vertical light<br />
onto adjacent areas to reveal shrubs and risk areas will help create a feeling<br />
of safety.<br />
Lighting is generally either by post top symmetric lanterns mounted on 5-6m<br />
columns, bulkhead or amenity lanterns mounted on adjacent walls or<br />
surfaces, or by low-level bollards. For areas with a high crime rate high level<br />
floodlighting may be required.<br />
White light sources provide good colour rendering conditions for pedestrians,<br />
improving visual perception.<br />
Vandal and impact resistant luminaires will be required.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Cyclepaths - Points of note are;<br />
With increasing numbers of cycle paths being built from re-claimed railway<br />
track beds and new build in city centres and housing developments it is<br />
important that the safety of the cyclist is considered against possible collisions<br />
with other cyclists, potholes or bumps on the pathway. At speeds of up to<br />
40km/h good uniformity of the cycle path surface is paramount to allow<br />
reasonable perception of danger as early as possible.<br />
If cycle paths are set back from a main road or outside built up areas a<br />
separate lighting system is required. This can comprise 5-6m high columns<br />
with asymmetric post top lanterns that have a wide angled distribution to<br />
provide a minimum number of lighting points. The wide beam distribution will<br />
also provide a good vertical illuminance helping guidance along the path.<br />
Metal halide, high-pressure sodium and compact fluorescent light sources will<br />
provide the correct optical and economic running cost solutions. However, the<br />
use of “white” light is preferred.<br />
100 | Applications and Techniques
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Pedestrian crossings - Points of note are;<br />
It is important to ensure that all pedestrian crossings are lit to provide a safe<br />
route to users across all traffic routes, whether they are routes with heavy<br />
volumes of traffic, or relatively rural areas where traffic density is much lower.<br />
In the dark it must be as safe as during the daytime and safety is enhanced<br />
by the use of additional signalling and the use of a separate lighting system.<br />
Light sources having a different colour to the general road lighting create<br />
additional alertness or signalling effects.<br />
By positioning lighting columns 0.5 -1.0 times the mounting height from each<br />
side of the pedestrian crossing good positive contrast is achieved in the zone<br />
helping motorists quickly see pedestrians.<br />
When lighting a pedestrian crossing the lanterns are normally mounted<br />
between 5- 6m and need to have a double asymmetric light distribution with<br />
good glare control to ensure drivers are not dazzled. In some instances<br />
additional baffling may be required on the lanterns. The lighting distribution<br />
should be narrow along the road axis and wider along the axis of the<br />
pedestrian crossing to ensure pedestrians on the edges of the crossing are<br />
visible.<br />
High-pressure sodium light sources should be considered if white light metal<br />
halide or compact fluorescent lamps are used for the general road lighting.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 101
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Indoor multi-storey car-parks - Points of note are;<br />
The provision of good lighting will aid in user orientation, ensure high levels<br />
of visibility of vehicles and pedestrians and give a feeling of safety to<br />
pedestrians. Good vertical lighting is required for all these criteria, especially<br />
for approach roads, entrances and exits.<br />
Additional or supplementary lighting should be installed in the access and exit<br />
zones of the car park and also on ramps, corners and intersections for<br />
additional guidance.<br />
Emergency lighting will be required to allow the safe evacuation of<br />
pedestrians in the event of an emergency.<br />
The orientation and location of luminaires in the driver’s line of sight should be<br />
arranged to prevent glare or distracting visual effects.<br />
Good quality T16 or T26 fluorescent luminaires will provide good uniformity<br />
and levels of vertical illuminance combined with low luminaire brightness to<br />
prevent glare issues. When using T16 luminaires additional thermal protection<br />
of the lamps may be necessary. Integration of emergency lighting is a normal<br />
requirement.<br />
Metal halide and high-pressure lamp luminaires may be used but care must<br />
be taken to control glare and to ensure a separate lamp emergency lighting<br />
system is provided.<br />
All lighting equipment should be vandal-resistant.<br />
Fluorescent, metal halide, and induction lamps all have good colour<br />
rendering and will provide good colour perception. This is particularly<br />
important in multi-storey car parks that identify floors by colour theme.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
102 | Applications and Techniques
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Outdoor car-parks - Points of note are;<br />
Outdoor car parks are more likely to be subject to high crime rates of both<br />
car theft and robbery. They are normally situated on the periphery of towns,<br />
stations, schools and retail centres. Access routes, ticket dispensers, entrance<br />
barriers and exits all need good lighting to ensure pedestrians and drivers<br />
safety.<br />
A common approach for lighting is to use 6–8m lighting columns, either on<br />
the edge of the car park or centrally mounted using double asymmetric low<br />
glare flat glass floodlights to provide a good level of horizontal and vertical<br />
illuminance at ground level. Care must be taken to avoid spill light onto<br />
adjacent housing, railway lines or other sensitive transport areas. The use of<br />
street lanterns with double asymmetrical light distribution is also suitable,<br />
however more centrally positioned lanterns will be required to achieve good<br />
illuminance uniformity across the car park.<br />
Supplementary white lighting at ticket dispensers, entrance barriers and exits<br />
will help colour and perception, particularly if reading is required.<br />
Multi-storey car park roof levels use a similar approach to outdoor car parks<br />
where the column height is 6-8m and their location is co-ordinated into the<br />
structural elements of the roof structure. Luminaires should be double<br />
asymmetric distribution street lanterns as they have better glare and spill light<br />
control.<br />
Metal halide, high-pressure sodium and compact fluorescent lamps are the<br />
preferred lighting sources to ensure low running and maintenance costs as<br />
many car parks are illuminated through the night.<br />
All lighting equipment should be vandal-resistant.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 103
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Underpasses / pedestrian tunnels - Points of note are;<br />
All pedestrian underpasses require artificial lighting as they have a small cross<br />
section, which means daylight decreases rapidly. Adaptation is less of a<br />
problem for pedestrians as they move slowly compared to motorists; even so<br />
the entrance zone of an underpass should be well lit. Lighting should help<br />
pedestrians see the faces of other people to help give a feeling of security.<br />
Light wall surfaces improve the vertical illuminance important for facial<br />
recognition.<br />
Depending upon the size and complexity of the underpass emergency lighting<br />
may be required to allow the safe evacuation of pedestrians in the event of<br />
an emergency.<br />
Lighting equipment can be surface mounted or recessed, either individually or<br />
in a continuous line. All equipment must be fully vandal proof including<br />
electrical feeds. Fluorescent cornice mounted luminaires generally provide<br />
good uniformity of illuminance and a good vertical component of illuminance.<br />
These can be inset into cladding or decorative mouldings to create a clean<br />
appearance with additional security protection against vandalism. Easy<br />
access with a security key is essential to ensure good maintenance practice.<br />
Discharge lamps may be used but good glare control is important to prevent<br />
any loss of discrimination by pedestrians of other users of the underpass due<br />
to glare.<br />
As underpasses can remain illuminated throughout the night metal halide,<br />
high-pressure sodium and fluorescent lamps are the preferred lighting sources<br />
to ensure low running and maintenance costs. Care should be taken in the<br />
use of high-pressure sodium lamps where good colour rendering is required.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
104 | Applications and Techniques
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Schemes<br />
Footpaths<br />
Scheme: Amenity park area, path width 2m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 26 x Promenade 42W CFL bollards, 1m mounting height<br />
Footpath: E av = 8 lux ; E min /E av = 0.26<br />
Scheme: Amenity park area, path width 8.4m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 27 x Avenue Virtual, 70W HIT-CE, 10m spacing, 3m mounting height<br />
Footpath: E av = 21 lux; E min /E av = 0.25<br />
Applications and Techniques | 105
Urban – decorative roadlighting and<br />
amenity areas<br />
Schemes<br />
Shopping centre car parking<br />
Mica recessed luminaires illuminating a pathway. The pools of<br />
light give guidance and reassurance whilst still allowing darker<br />
more intimate areas. Splashes of light on the wall reveal the<br />
texture and warmth of the stone and provide visual interest,<br />
whilst the lighting also provides good illumination for the steps.<br />
The daylight appearance of lighting can be as important as the<br />
lit effect. Lighting hardware should, as far as is possible, blend<br />
into the surroundings and enhance the appearance of a space<br />
even when not in use.<br />
106 | Applications and Techniques<br />
Scheme: Shopping centre car parking,<br />
297m x 163m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 96 x Dyana 2 150W<br />
HIT, 8m mounting height,<br />
0° tilt<br />
Park area: E av = 21 lux ; E min /E av = 0.32
6.10 Urban – architectural floodlighting<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The purpose of architectural floodlighting is to reveal the beauty of a structure or in some<br />
cases add a dimension by showing a structure in a new way. Architectural lighting adds<br />
an aesthetic quality to a scene. Points of note are:<br />
Generally a structure will have one or more principal viewing positions.<br />
Therefore the lighting should be sympathetic for an observer positioned at<br />
these viewpoints.<br />
The light levels used on a structure should be in harmony with the light levels<br />
of the surrounding area. In darker areas comparatively little light can be used<br />
to good effect, but in areas with a large amount of ambient lighting higher<br />
light levels will be required.<br />
A coherent flow of light across a structure is often desirable, implying one<br />
general aiming orientation for the main floodlights. This direction should not<br />
coincide with the most common viewing direction for the structure as no<br />
shadows will then be visible and the scene will appear flat and uninteresting.<br />
Care should be taken when mounting the floodlighting equipment to ensure<br />
that the lighting units do not appear in silhouette against the lit scene, as this<br />
will spoil the overall effect.<br />
Structural detail<br />
The main objective is to highlight significant features of the structure whilst ensuring the<br />
structure still appears as a coherent whole. Points of note are;<br />
Light naturally attracts peoples attention so highlighting specific features will<br />
help an observer read the structure. Care should be taken to only light those<br />
details that are required, as too many highlights will destroy the effect and<br />
either makes the structure appear bland and uninteresting or disjointed and<br />
incoherent.<br />
Completeness of lighting is an important consideration to ensure a coherent<br />
whole. Care should be taken to avoid a floating appearance, caused by the<br />
base of the structure being under lit, or high level lit detail seeming<br />
unconnected due to the upper parts of the structure being insufficiently lit.<br />
Shadows can make as useful a contribution to the final lit effect as do<br />
illuminated areas. A good technique is to highlight specific features and to<br />
give a low-key wash of light to the rest of the structure. Therefore smaller<br />
lighting units are needed to highlight the detail, as well as units with a more<br />
general distribution to cover the broader area.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 107
Urban – architectural floodlighting<br />
Positioning floodlights at a distance from a structure and therefore giving light<br />
closer to the horizontal will tend to reduce the visibility of the textures of the<br />
materials used in the construction of the structure. Conversely positioning<br />
floodlights in a close offset position, and therefore giving light closer to the<br />
vertical will tend to enhance the visibility of the textures of the materials used<br />
in the construction of the structure.<br />
Daylight has a generally downward bias, forming shadows from architectural<br />
details below the detail itself. Floodlighting a structure from above can mimic<br />
this effect, whilst floodlighting from below will reverse the shadows and can<br />
often give a fresh appeal to a structure by giving it an individual day time<br />
and night time appearance. Lighting laterally will enhance any vertical<br />
features of the structure.<br />
Showing features in silhouette may enhance the lit appearance of a structure.<br />
Lighting behind features such as columns will show the form of the structure<br />
and display the columns in silhouette against the lit structure.<br />
Obtrusive light<br />
The main objective is to maximise the amount of useful light (that is light falling onto the<br />
structure) and minimise waste light that spills light onto the surroundings or upwards into<br />
the sky. Points of note are:<br />
Close off set lighting will reduce waste light by minimising light lost through<br />
scatter in the air, especially in urban areas with lower air quality.<br />
When uplighting a structure the upward light ratio (ULR) is not very useful as<br />
an indication of obtrusive light. A more useful measure is the utilisation factor,<br />
that is the amount of light actually lighting the structure compared to the total<br />
amount of light produced by the scheme. This gives the percentage useful<br />
light, and therefore the percentage waste light. It should be remembered that<br />
any reflected light will be in a predominantly upward direction and can give<br />
a significant contribution to obtrusive light. Therefore where possible<br />
uplighting should be used for structures that use low reflectance materials in<br />
their construction.<br />
To minimise obtrusive light additional attachments should be used on the<br />
floodlight such as louvres or visors to shape the floodlight beam and help it<br />
conform to the shape of the structure.<br />
Where possible niches and overhangs should be used to contain obtrusive<br />
light.<br />
108 | Applications and Techniques
Urban – architectural floodlighting<br />
Floodlight technology<br />
The main objective is to ensure that the correct technology in terms of lamp, optic and<br />
floodlight body is chosen for the application. Points of note are:<br />
The fabric of a structure has a colour, or in many cases a mixture of colours.<br />
Light sources that are monochromatic or strongly biased towards a small<br />
range of colours can distort the structure appearance. Therefore, light sources<br />
with a wide spectrum, (such as metal halide) or with a colour temperature that<br />
blends with the structure materials (such as high-pressure sodium on sandstone)<br />
should be used. Colour filters or RGB colour mixing should be used with care<br />
but can be very effective for dramatic effects or seasonal/festive events.<br />
Floodlights have a beam distribution that is mainly relative to the shape of the<br />
reflector. A round reflector will produce a conical beam useful for long-throw<br />
requirements, typically to pick out a single feature. A rectangular reflector will<br />
produce an asymmetrical beam useful for lighting areas rather than small points.<br />
Constraints in mounting position or specific application requirements often<br />
require a modified beam distribution. Additional optical components such as<br />
refractor glasses that vary the beam shape, or louvres that reduce obtrusive<br />
light are useful in getting the correct result.<br />
Floodlighting set-ups are generally aimed at night to enable fine-tuning of the<br />
finished appearance. However maintenance will be done in daylight, and<br />
often the floodlight will need to be moved to allow access to the lamp, etc.<br />
Floodlights with a re-positioning lock system are helpful to ensure the lit<br />
appearance is maintained over successive maintenance operations.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Schemes – Building facade<br />
Scheme: Building façade<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Avenue Deco bollard<br />
50W MBF, Avenue<br />
Deco 125W MBF at 3m<br />
mounting height, Efact<br />
LED, Mica B 70W HIT-DE<br />
and Contrast Pinspot<br />
70W Par 30.<br />
Road Eav = 7lux<br />
Pavement: E av = 15lux away from the façade,<br />
E av = 35lux along store façade<br />
Applications and Techniques | 109
Urban – architectural floodlighting<br />
The curved roof is washed with light, making it appear to float<br />
over the building. The structure itself glows from the interior light<br />
spilling through the glass facades.<br />
Lighting of glass facades is difficult and it is more usual to let<br />
spill light from the interior light up the building and define its<br />
night-time appearance.<br />
The suspension tower and cabling are lit to provide a distinctive<br />
appearance. Narrow beam floodlights are directed along the<br />
cables to make then glow, whilst the central tower is washed<br />
with light. The structure seems to float above the surface of the<br />
water.<br />
The appearance is built up using layers of light. The lower<br />
section of the building has a general wash of light with<br />
highlighting above the central columns. Lighter and darker areas<br />
give depth to the façade. The upper storey mainly comprises<br />
grand window openings, and these are lit with a white light<br />
to accentuate the detail of the window surrounds. The detail<br />
around the top of the façade (below the roof line) is lit to define<br />
the transition to the roof space, and additional windows within<br />
the roof space are lit, along with chimney work, with a small<br />
amount of spill light showing the roofline.<br />
110 | Applications and Techniques
6.11 Sports lighting<br />
Techniques<br />
General<br />
The purpose of sports lighting is to provide lighting that allows a sport to take place<br />
safely (i.e. designed to suit the speed of play and size of any objects used in the sport)<br />
and provide good viewing conditions, both in visibility of the sports action and comfort<br />
of the audience. Points of note are:<br />
For all sports a good level of modelling is required. Modelling is the effect of<br />
light and shadow produced when light flows from one main direction (known<br />
as key light) and additional lower levels of lighting flow from other directions<br />
(known as fill light), producing a coherent three-dimensional image of a<br />
scene. If there is insufficient key light and all the lighting is fill light objects<br />
become flat with little discernable detail. If there is insufficient fill light harsh<br />
shadowing will occur, obscuring areas in the field of view. Both cases will<br />
cause a reduction in the ability of sports participants to correctly see and<br />
react to events on the field of play, and will also cause problems for<br />
spectators and television cameras.<br />
For high-speed sports the elimination of any stroboscopic effects from high<br />
intensity discharge sources is important. Stroboscopic effects may make a<br />
moving object appear stationary, or make the object seem to jump from one<br />
position to another. For these sports the use of high frequency control gear is<br />
recommended.<br />
Lighting requirements are defined by EN 12193. Additional requirements<br />
may be defined by sports governing bodies such as FIFA, Olympic Delivery<br />
Authorities, etc. and by television authorities, such as Sky.<br />
Some sports (notably FIFA regulations for football) also define requirements for<br />
uniformity gradient (UG). This is measure of the rate of change of illuminance<br />
across an area, and is expressed as the ratio between the illuminance levels<br />
of two adjacent measurement points. That is<br />
E measurement point 1<br />
UG =<br />
Emeasurement point 2<br />
EN 12193 defines requirements based on the lighting class (I, II, or III). This<br />
is derived from the level of competition, international and national, regional,<br />
local, training and recreational. At the lower standard of play there is<br />
flexibility with the light source options (i.e. high pressure sodium, metal halide)<br />
but at class I and II metal halide or fluorescent light sources with high colour<br />
rendering abilities are required.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 111
Sports lighting<br />
Each sport has a playing area that is the principal playing area (the area<br />
inside the line marking for tennis or football for example) and a total area that<br />
is defined as the principal playing area, plus an additional safety outside the<br />
principal playing area.<br />
Lighting levels for sports are normally defined in terms of the minimum<br />
average horizontal illuminance on a reference plane, and a uniformity of<br />
illuminance. In some instances the plane of illuminance will be relevant to the<br />
sport and the spectator viewing distance, or TV camera-viewing plane. Here<br />
the normal to camera illuminance and vertical illuminance will be relevant.<br />
As some sporting areas are large, have the need for high levels of illuminance<br />
or are used for a long period in the day, highly efficient lighting systems are<br />
required to keep energy consumption low. Maintenance is also important to<br />
ensure system efficiency and functionality and therefore all lighting equipment<br />
should be safely accessible and maintainable throughout life.<br />
When lighting exterior sports facilities to achieve good uniformity lighting<br />
equipment must be mounted on masts of sufficient height to ensure floodlight<br />
aiming angles are no greater than 70°. This will ensure a high utilisation of<br />
lamp flux, minimum electrical load, and lower installed costs.<br />
When designing lighting for sports facilities it is important to minimise<br />
obtrusive and spill light. For guidance on this see section 6.8.<br />
All sports facilities require safety lighting (that is lighting designed to allow<br />
safe movement of players and spectators in the event of a power failure or<br />
emergency). Relevant guidelines form the sports governing bodies should be<br />
consulted for this information.<br />
Sports halls - Points of note are;<br />
Most sports halls are suitable for different sports and non-sporting events, all<br />
requiring different visual requirements. The most demanding visual activity<br />
should dictate the lighting design layout and light levels.<br />
One lighting layout will generally not be sufficient to meet all requirements, as<br />
specific sports require different lighting configurations. Therefore it is essential<br />
that lighting controls are used to switch a selection of luminaires for different<br />
requirements.<br />
Luminaires should be impact resistant against balls and projectiles, and<br />
designed and mounted to minimise the risk of objects becoming trapped<br />
within or behind them.<br />
112 | Applications and Techniques
Sports lighting<br />
The layout of a sports hall may be altered using partitions, and therefore care<br />
should be taken to ensure glare is controlled along all lines of sight, with and<br />
without the partitions. Additional lighting may be required when partitions are<br />
in place and this should be checked during design.<br />
For aerial sports, e.g. badminton and volleyball, the positioning of the<br />
luminaires outside the playing area may be necessary to avoid disability<br />
glare for players looking upwards.<br />
As a sports hall can support many types of activity it is important to ensure<br />
good uniformity is achieved throughout the hall. This allows competitors to<br />
quickly and accurately monitor an opponent’s movement, particularly<br />
important in combat sports.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Table tennis and badminton - Points of note are;<br />
Badminton shuttlecocks are small and fast. Players are continually required to<br />
visually follow the trajectory of the shuttlecock and there are therefore specific<br />
recommendations for luminaire positions and requirements for good vertical<br />
illuminance. A low ceiling reflection factor will help to improve the visibility of<br />
the shuttlecock.<br />
For competition table tennis it is important that excellent uniformity is achieved<br />
over the table top and up to five metres from the table edges. The elimination<br />
of any stroboscopic effects from high intensity discharge sources is important.<br />
A good level of vertical illuminance is required to ensure visibility of any high<br />
balls.<br />
Fluorescent lighting systems provide the best arrangements for high levels of<br />
horizontal and vertical uniformity over the playing areas. Pendant, surface or<br />
recessed T16 or T26 luminaires with a parabolic louvre are suitable.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 113
Sports lighting<br />
Fencing - Points of note are;<br />
Fencing has specific requirements for both horizontal and vertical illuminance<br />
as the movements are very fast with a fine foil blade and the visual task is the<br />
torso of the players.<br />
Fluorescent pendant, surface or recessed T16 or T26 luminaires with a<br />
parabolic louvre are suitable.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Boxing - Points of note are;<br />
In boxing the speed and force of movement over extremely short distances<br />
requires very high lighting levels at competition levels, normally between<br />
1000 lux and 2000 lux average horizontal illuminance. This also ensures<br />
that the referee, judges and spectators can see adequately and comfortably.<br />
Normally a purpose made lighting assembly will support the lighting<br />
equipment above the ring. Narrow beam luminaires should be used to<br />
provide the necessary high levels of illuminance efficiently.<br />
High colour rendering qualities are required from the light source, which is<br />
recommended to be metal halide with an Ra of 85+. This is also required for<br />
video and CTV transmissions.<br />
Pendant or surface narrow/medium beam metal halide floodlights are<br />
suitable with baffle/louvre attachments to control glare.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
114 | Applications and Techniques
Sports lighting<br />
Indoor tennis halls - Points of note are;<br />
Tennis can be a very fast sport demanding good visual conditions to allow<br />
judgement of the ball trajectory, its speed and anticipated bounce position on<br />
the court. Therefore good illuminance and uniformity with the elimination of<br />
shadows and glare are a requirement from the lighting system. The lighting<br />
will also need to extend beyond the playing area to cover the important<br />
zones behind the baselines and sidelines.<br />
To prevent players being dazzled when looking at high balls the luminaires<br />
should be positioned outside the playing area, and not positioned behind the<br />
baseline up to a distance of three metres where serving takes place.<br />
Luminaires should be impact resistant against balls and projectiles, and<br />
designed and mounted to minimise the risks of object becoming trapped<br />
within or behind them.<br />
Additional wall colouring or screening with low reflectance matt material will<br />
help players to get additional information about the balls position on the<br />
court.<br />
Pendant or surface mounted T16 or T26 fluorescent reflector luminaires with a<br />
protective grille are suitable. Alternatively pendant or surface mounted<br />
low-bay metal halide luminaires with a louvre assembly and protective grill.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Squash courts - Points of note are;<br />
The ball used for squash is smaller than a tennis ball, is dark coloured, travels<br />
up to 200 km/h and bounces in any plane. As the walls are used to create<br />
complex trajectories with players moving very quickly across each other’s line<br />
of sight early anticipation and vision are required to hit the ball accurately.<br />
Good illuminance on all four vertical planes together with high horizontal<br />
illuminance uniformity is needed against a light vertical background to<br />
improve perception of the ball.<br />
Fluorescent lighting is most suitable with two asymmetric distribution luminaires<br />
mounted parallel to the front to wash the wall, and an asymmetric distribution<br />
luminaire washing each of the sidewalls. Mounting the luminaires at 1m from<br />
the wall prevents reflected glare.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 115
Sports lighting<br />
Surface mounted or recessed T16 or T26 fluorescent asymmetric reflector<br />
luminaires with a protective grille are most suitable.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Figure skating and ice hockey - Points of note are;<br />
Most indoor rinks are used for recreational purposes with additional events<br />
carried out on specific occasions. Therefore the lighting installation needs to<br />
be flexible.<br />
Luminaires are normally mounted over the ice in a regular array to provide<br />
good uniformity of illuminance and general average horizontal illuminance.<br />
The ice hockey puck is black and to help spectators see it when it is flying<br />
through the air high reflectance surroundings should be used around the ice.<br />
Decreasing the spacing between luminaires near the goal increases<br />
illuminance in this critical area.<br />
Luminaires should be impact resistant if mounted less than 5m above the ice.<br />
High bay style luminaires with prismatic optics and metal halide lamps will<br />
help provide a good level of vertical illuminance and a high uniformity of<br />
illuminance on the horizontal plane whilst using the minimum number of<br />
luminaires. Floodlights can also be used but care should be taken to control<br />
both direct glare and reflected glare from the surface of the ice. The use of<br />
double asymmetric beam floodlights will help.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
116 | Applications and Techniques
Sports lighting<br />
Swimming pools - Points of note are;<br />
Swimming pool lighting caters for a variety of visual tasks. The competitive<br />
swimmer has a much different seeing task to other swimmers where the main<br />
attention is focussed on staying in lane and the turning point at the end of the<br />
lane. Water polo players need lighting with a good ambient lighting effect.<br />
Swimming instructors, coaches, pool attendants and spectators all need to<br />
see across the pool and into the water to identify swimmers and situations.<br />
For recreational swimming pools themed or decorative lighting effects may be<br />
required.<br />
Because water reflects direct incident light the positioning of the luminaires<br />
needs to be carefully selected to avoid luminaire reflections and disability<br />
glare. Luminaires positioned around the pool help to reduce unwanted<br />
reflections. When this is not possible asymmetric distribution luminaires<br />
positioned above the water may be used but maintenance of the luminaires<br />
should be considered.<br />
Underwater lighting will help to reduce reflected glare from the pool surface<br />
as well as improving viewing conditions on the pool bottom. Synchronised<br />
swimmers need underwater lighting to help monitor the movement and<br />
position of other swimmers. However for competitive swimming and water<br />
polo underwater luminaires should be switched off.<br />
For diving pools supplementary lighting is required to improve the vertical<br />
illuminance, particularly for judges who need to assess the divers<br />
performance at the point of entry into the water. For springboard diving the<br />
lighting in the diving zone requires a good ratio of horizontal to vertical<br />
illuminance.<br />
Luminaires for indoor swimming pools must be protected against chlorinated<br />
and possibly salty air and as such need to meet high standards of electrical<br />
reliability and protection against corrosion. Luminaires should be protected to<br />
IP65 and have fixings that are made of stabilised austenitic stainless steel.<br />
High ambient temperatures may require control gear to be mounted remotely<br />
to ensure long life and reliability. The use of floodlights will help resolve some<br />
of these issues as floodlights are mainly designed for exterior use and have a<br />
high degree of protection and resistance to the elements built in.<br />
Good colour rendering lamps are required to provide the correct ambience<br />
and visual comfort for competitors and bathers. Metal halide lamps with a<br />
warm or cool appearance can be used to good effect.<br />
Surface mounted or recessed fluorescent luminaires with an acrylic panel/<br />
bowl are suitable, as are metal halide or high pressure sodium floodlights<br />
wall mounted or pendant mounted for uplighting or direct lighting of the pool.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 117
Sports lighting<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Outdoor football and rugby - Points of note are;<br />
The most common approach is the use of lighting masts, approximately four<br />
each side of 12m–20m height to achieve a minimum angle above the pitch<br />
centre of 20° to the lowest floodlight, but preferably 25°. These are spaced<br />
along the long axis of the playing area, positioned away from the touchlines<br />
to avoid collisions. For football they are also positioned away from the<br />
corners to avoid glare to goalkeepers. The floodlights are normally rated<br />
1kW– 2kW and have a double asymmetric beam shape to ensure good<br />
uniformity and glare control.<br />
An alternative option is four corner masts where long throw symmetrical<br />
narrow beam floodlights are used. The same conditions apply to mast<br />
positioning and height to achieve high utilisation of lamp flux and the<br />
avoidance of glare.<br />
For rugby pitches the dead-ball zone, which can be up to 22m long, will<br />
need to be adequately illuminated. In some instances the spill light from the<br />
playing area will be sufficient but only to a depth of 6m. This is in addition to<br />
the playing area length of up to 100m between goal lines. A total area shall<br />
include a strip the length of the pitch including the dead ball area of no less<br />
than 6m wide on each side of the pitch.<br />
Lighting can be positioned on the roofs of adjacent grandstands if they are of<br />
sufficient height and location to comply with floodlight positional requirements,<br />
and of sufficient structural strength to allow the weight of the floodlights.<br />
Double asymmetric or symmetrical beam floodlights using high-pressure<br />
sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
118 | Applications and Techniques
Sports lighting<br />
Hockey - Points of note are;<br />
The playing area for hockey is slightly smaller than for football, but the lighting<br />
principles are the same with regards to mast positions and heights. The use of<br />
a smaller ball and the speed of the sport require a higher lighting level for<br />
Class III installations and a better uniformity for Classes II and III than for<br />
football and rugby.<br />
Double asymmetric or symmetrical beam floodlights using high-pressure<br />
sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Track and field - Points of note are;<br />
For track and field stadiums the most cost effective solution is to locate 6-8<br />
masts around the whole perimeter of the track with a clearance of 4.5m from<br />
the track edge. The mast height is determined as for football but with the<br />
additional requirement of a maximum mast height to ensure adequate vertical<br />
illuminance for competitors on the outside of the track. The masts mounted<br />
along the straight section of track illuminate the centre field area providing<br />
good vertical illuminance for javelin, shot, hammer and discus events.<br />
Double asymmetric or flat glass double asymmetric beam floodlights using<br />
high-pressure sodium or metal halide lamps are suitable for this application.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
Applications and Techniques | 119
Sports lighting<br />
Freestyle skiing and ski jumping - Points of note are;<br />
Downhill skiers require the whole piste uniformly illuminated from beginning to<br />
end so depressions and surface irregularities are revealed. As high speeds<br />
can be achieved the position of floodlights are important to provide the<br />
correct visual conditions, therefore floodlights are placed either side of the<br />
piste whilst being aimed across and down the slope to reduce glare to the<br />
skiers.<br />
Wide horizontal and narrow vertical angle floodlights metal halide lamps<br />
mounted on masts up to 12m high are suitable for this application.<br />
Ski-jumpers require good horizontal lighting at the take-off and at the landing<br />
or touchdown point for judging and safety. The landing area needs to have a<br />
high level of uniformity (0.7) for the class III standard of skiing. The<br />
illuminance on the jump hill is measured on the surface of the snow.<br />
Key luminaires:<br />
120 | Applications and Techniques
Sports lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Tennis court<br />
Scheme: Double tennis court, 24m x 11m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 4 x Champion 2kW HQI-TS/N/L, 12m mounting height<br />
Pitch: E av = 397 lux, E min /E av = 0.81<br />
Lighting from the edges helps prevent glare to players.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 121
Sports lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Football Stadium<br />
Scheme: Football stadium with 4 x 25m corner columns<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 48 x Mundial R 2kW HQI-TS<br />
Pitch: E av = 538 lux; E min /E av = 0.76<br />
122 | Applications and Techniques<br />
A football stadium lit using Mundial<br />
floodlights. The luminaires are mounted<br />
along the roof of the stand down<br />
two sides of the pitch, and a mix of<br />
light distributions is used to correctly<br />
illuminate all the playing area. Lighting<br />
levels for television are supplied<br />
by ensuring good levels of vertical<br />
illumination in the camera directions.<br />
Additional luminaires on the inside of<br />
the canopy lights the seating areas<br />
and ensures the security and safety of<br />
spectators.
Sports lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Ice Hockey Stadium<br />
Scheme: Ice hockey stadium, 117.5m x 17.3m x 23m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 316 x Indus XS, 2 x 80WT16, 17m mounting height<br />
Pitch: E av = 422 lux ; E min /E av = 0.07<br />
A relatively high level of illumination is required due to the fast<br />
moving nature of the game and the small size of the puck.<br />
Lighting levels by the goals are increased to aid the ability of<br />
the goalkeeper, officials and spectators to see the puck.<br />
Applications and Techniques | 123
Sports lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Indoor tennis court<br />
Scheme: Indoor tennis court, 36m x 18m x 6m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 32 x Titus Sport, 3x49W 5m mounting height<br />
Tennis court: E av = 531 lux ; E min /E av = 0.35<br />
Indoor tennis courts lit using the Sporting luminaire. The<br />
luminaires are integrated into the architecture of the roof and<br />
are positioned to light from the edges of the playing areas,<br />
preventing players having to look directly at a luminaire.<br />
124 | Applications and Techniques
Sports lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Ski shute<br />
A ski slope lit using 270 Mundial 2kW floodlights. The<br />
floodlights are positioned and aimed to prevent glare to skiers,<br />
whilst revealing the texture of the surface of the slope to ensure<br />
safety. This requires aiming away from the direction of view of<br />
skiers, and the use of glancing angles to show surface texture.<br />
Additional care should be taken to prevent reflected glare from<br />
the snow.<br />
Scheme: Ski shute, 30m x 150m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: Either 36 x Sonpak<br />
25/40 with HIT400W or<br />
27 x Sonpak 25/40<br />
with HST400W<br />
Ski slope: HIT 400W E av = 1.24 lux;<br />
E min /E av = 0.02<br />
HST 400W E av = 1.41 lux;<br />
E min /E av = 0.02<br />
Applications and Techniques | 125
Sports lighting<br />
Schemes<br />
Sports hall<br />
Scheme: Multi-purpose sports hall, 17m x 18m x 7.6m<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 18 x Titus Sport 4 x 49W, 7.6m mounting height<br />
Floor: E av = 364 lux; E min /E av = 0.61<br />
Scheme: Multi-purpose sports hall, 17m x 18m x 7.6m.<br />
Emergency lighting<br />
Luminaire(s) used: 2 x Voyager Twinspot, 6m mounting height<br />
Floor: E av = 2.46 lux; E min /E av = 0.23<br />
When lighting sports venues it is essential to consider the<br />
safety of the participants and spectators in the event of loss of<br />
power or an emergency. Therefore emergency lighting should<br />
be installed that complies with the relevant requirements and<br />
standards.<br />
126 | Applications and Techniques
7 Specific Techniques<br />
7.1 Indoor lighting controls (ILC)<br />
The purpose of Indoor Lighting Controls (ILC) is to provide the<br />
right light at the right time and place, saving as much energy as<br />
possible, whilst simultaneously providing the comfort expected<br />
for any application, such as offices, lecture and conference<br />
rooms, school classrooms, sport halls, or in hospitals and<br />
supermarkets. Industrial installations may also benefit from the<br />
energy savings provided by ILC if fluorescent luminaires such as<br />
trunking systems are being used.<br />
In offices up to 40 per cent of the energy used is needed for<br />
lighting, within schools this percentage can be even higher.<br />
In industrial applications that figure is between 10 and 15<br />
per cent depending on the lighting technology used. Potential<br />
energy savings are:<br />
Electronic ballasts + dimming: 30%<br />
Dimming + presence link: 50%<br />
Dimming + presence link + daylight link: 70%<br />
There are many different levels of controls to choose from.<br />
These should be chosen to fit the needs and activities within<br />
an application and to achieve the required energy saving and<br />
comfort.<br />
One of the most basic controls and the first step into manual<br />
dimming is “RotaryDIM”, a very simple recess wall mounted<br />
rotary DSI dimmer that can be connected to <strong>Thorn</strong> High<br />
Frequency DSI dimmable (HFD) luminaires, controlling up to<br />
20 DSI ballasts in total. The lighting can be raised, dimmed<br />
and dimmed to off, by turning the control knob. This product<br />
combines digital dimming with the intuitive operation known<br />
from domestic lighting controls.<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Pull SwitchDIM (PSWD) luminaires come with<br />
integrated pull cord momentary action switches. Typically used<br />
in offices lit with suspended luminaires. Using the pull cord<br />
momentary action switch the user may manually set the light<br />
level from 100% down to 1%, and switch the light on and off.<br />
The easiest way to automate lighting is the use of<br />
“SwitchLite” presence detectors, installed into recessed<br />
ceilings, mounted onto ceilings, into corners or onto walls.<br />
These detectors switch the lighting on when movement is<br />
detected, and, after a configurable Off delay time, switch it<br />
off when vacancy is detected. Different SwitchLite presence<br />
Fig. 7.1 RotaryDIM DSI dimmer<br />
Specific Techniques | 127
Specific Techniques<br />
detectors are available suitable for various mounting needs<br />
and detection patterns, and using passive infrared (PIR) or<br />
microwave technology to detect presence and absence.<br />
Some products additionally provide an integrated photocell<br />
that can be set so that the detector only switches lighting on<br />
when the ambient light level is below a preset level. This<br />
kind of presence detection is typically used in spaces such as<br />
corridors, staircases, warehouses, storerooms or lavatories,<br />
and can reduce the energy usage by up to 90 per cent.<br />
Instead of lamps being switched on for the whole day they are<br />
automatically switched off when not needed.<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> High Frequency SensaDigital (HFS) luminaires<br />
combine manual dimming with daylight and presence link.<br />
These luminaires provide an integrated miniature multi-sensor<br />
head. Depending upon the connections provided within the<br />
luminaire HFS luminaires may also be used to control standard<br />
HFD luminaires in a so-called master and slave arrangement.<br />
The number of DSI ballasts incorporated in the master as well<br />
as the slave luminaires can be up to four in total: E.g. in an<br />
office or a meeting room up to four single-ballast luminaires can<br />
be linked to maintain illuminance during the whole day (taking<br />
into account the available daylight as well as the ageing of<br />
lamps and dirt on the luminaires), and additionally can provide<br />
a presence-link function as described above. Alternatively for<br />
the control of a larger space with more luminaires, a remote<br />
SensaDigital head can be used, for example the “SENSA<br />
MRE SEND DSI”. This multi-sensor head can control a group of<br />
HFD luminaires incorporating up to eight DSI ballasts in total,<br />
and incorporates the same functionality as described above for<br />
the SensaDigital luminaires.<br />
This portfolio is called SensaDigital. For the manual control<br />
of SensaDigital an infra-red handheld controller “SENSA<br />
SENRC” is available, as well as an infra-red programming<br />
tool “SENSA SENP” for the configuration of Off delay time,<br />
operation mode, maintained illuminance level and many other<br />
settings.<br />
For applications such as classrooms and open plan offices<br />
either several remote SensaDigital heads connected<br />
to standard dimmable luminaires, or several master-slave<br />
arrangements of SensaDigital luminaires with standard<br />
dimmable luminaires can control several luminaire groups<br />
individually, reflecting the flow of daylight within a bigger area<br />
128 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.2 Presence detector<br />
Fig. 7.3 HFS luminaire<br />
Fig. 7.4 Handheld controller
Specific Techniques<br />
and the presence of people within the different zones lit by the<br />
luminaire groups.<br />
For versatile one-room applications the “SensaModular”<br />
system may be used. This is a Lego-like portfolio consisting<br />
of two differently sized control modules, and accessories for<br />
automation and operation. Both control modules have DSI/<br />
DALI auto detection outputs for the use of either HFD or HFX<br />
luminaires (“HFX” stands for High Frequency DALI dimmable).<br />
The large SensaModular controller shows three digital<br />
outputs, the small controller two digital outputs for controlling<br />
luminaire groups: Table 6.1 shows the number of ballasts that<br />
can be connected:<br />
To keep commissioning and maintenance simple, the<br />
addressing feature of DALI is not used with SensaModular<br />
when DALI ballasts are connected (so called “broadcast”<br />
operation). Both controllers show inputs for the connection<br />
of standard double, single momentary action or centre-off<br />
retractive switches to manually dim, brighten and switch each<br />
output individually. The large controller also shows a switch<br />
input for the joint operation of all three outputs. A standard<br />
230VAC presence detector, for example a SwitchLite<br />
detector, can be connected to the controllers, and the Off<br />
delay time and operation mode (automatic, semi-automatic or<br />
corridor) can be set via integrated rotary switches.<br />
Using the intelligent interface - a polarity-free 2-pole connection<br />
- the system can be extended. To link the luminaire groups<br />
to the incoming daylight, SensaModular provides three<br />
possibilities, all reflecting the daylight flow:<br />
• Either one look down multi-sensor head per group, ideal in<br />
larger and zoned applications such as open plan offices,<br />
or<br />
• one multi-sensor head for all groups, ideal for smaller<br />
applications such as single offices, or<br />
3-fold output controller 2-fold output controller<br />
Using DSI ballasts only 50DSI + 50 DSI + 50DSI 50DSI + 50DSI<br />
Using DALI ballasts only 25DALI + 25DALI + 25DALI 25DALI + 25DALI<br />
Using DSI and DALI ballasts 25DSI + 25DSI + 25DALI, or 25DALI + 25DALI + 25DSI 25DSI + 25DALI<br />
Table 7.1 SensaModular Controller Capacity<br />
Daylight<br />
0% 25% 50%<br />
Fig. 7.5 Look down sensors<br />
Daylight<br />
0% 25% 50%<br />
Fig. 7.6 Look out sensors<br />
500lx<br />
Artificial light<br />
Artificial light<br />
Specific Techniques | 129
Specific Techniques<br />
• one look out photocell for all groups, ideal for applications<br />
comprising rows of luminaires and not requiring infrared<br />
control, such as classrooms and sports halls, but especially<br />
any application with ceiling heights above 3m.<br />
Both the multi-sensor head and the photocell are part of the<br />
SensaModular offer. Different illuminance levels for the the<br />
two or three luminaire groups can be set and stored. With the<br />
multi-sensor heads the luminaire groups are not only linked to<br />
daylight, but also to presence and absence. The configuration<br />
of Off delay time and operation mode happens the same way<br />
as when a standard detector is used (described above).<br />
With the SensaModular infra-red handheld controller<br />
the multi-sensor heads are allocated to the luminaire groups.<br />
This remote control can also be used to set and recall three<br />
scenes, and to switch, dim and brighten each luminaire group<br />
individually.<br />
Alternatively, or additionally, the SensaModular recess wall<br />
mounted scene plate enables manual control of the luminaire<br />
groups and the setting and recall of three scenes as well, and<br />
the active scene is visualised via LED indicators.<br />
In some countries <strong>Thorn</strong> offers the “SensaAdvanced”<br />
portfolio, one of the most versatile systems on the market,<br />
allowing the control of up to 99 luminaire, blind and screen<br />
groups, in up to 99 rooms, and the possibility to create up<br />
to 20 scenes per room. This portfolio works with any type of<br />
luminaire and provides different DSI, DALI, relay outputs and<br />
phase dimmers. Blinds, blackout blinds and projection screens<br />
may also be controlled using SensaAdvanced. Different<br />
operation and commissioning units, such as wall mounted scene<br />
plates and touch panels are available, as well as infrared<br />
control and software to use a PC or laptop for recalling scenes.<br />
Time automation enables the installation to be switched at<br />
130 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.7 SensaAdvanced components
Specific Techniques<br />
certain times and days and, with sequence automation,<br />
dynamic changes of light levels, direction and colour can be<br />
achieved. Partition management enables the system to adapt<br />
to partition walls being closed or opened, and enables the<br />
individual or joint control of the adjacent areas. Scheme design<br />
and commissioning of SensaAdvanced is available as<br />
a service, please contact your <strong>Thorn</strong> representative where<br />
applicable.<br />
In some countries <strong>Thorn</strong> offers the “SensaLink” portfolio,<br />
enabling the linking of several groups of multi-sensors, either<br />
remote sensors or sensors integrated into HFL luminaires (“HFL”<br />
stands for high frequency SensaLink) within a larger space,<br />
throughout the floor of a building or through the whole building.<br />
The sensor groups work as described for SensaDigital<br />
above. Additionally these groups can be linked such that<br />
a group listens to other groups. This feature is used to keep<br />
lights on in corridors or notional corridors, and in staircases<br />
and common zones while one of the adjacent areas reports<br />
presence. Blackout blinds and projection screens may also<br />
be controlled via SensaLink. Different operation units are<br />
available such as wall mounted scene plates and infrared<br />
control, allowing storing and recall of up to six scenes.<br />
A versatile infra-red commissioning tool is used to configure and<br />
address the system. This portfolio also provides relay outputs for<br />
switchable luminaires. During commissioning DSI outputs can<br />
be changed to DALI broadcast outputs if required. The partition<br />
management functionality enables the system to adapt to<br />
partition walls being closed or opened, and enables individual<br />
or joint control of the adjacent areas. Scheme design and<br />
commissioning of SensaLink is available as service, please<br />
contact your <strong>Thorn</strong> representative where appropriate.<br />
Fig. 7.8 SensaLink components<br />
Specific Techniques | 131
Specific Techniques<br />
Instead of HFD luminaires containing DSI ballasts, DSI<br />
compatible transformers and phase dimmers are available and<br />
can be connected to any DSI output:<br />
• Phase dimmers allow the dimming of luminaires with<br />
high voltage incandescent or tungsten halogen lamps,<br />
as well as luminaires incorporating low voltage tungsten<br />
halogen lamps plus electronic or magnetic transformers.<br />
• Electronic transformers allow the control of<br />
luminaires incorporating low voltage tungsten halogen<br />
lamps without transformers.<br />
Using these DSI controllable devices the connected luminaires<br />
can be part of any scheme incorporating Indoor Lighting<br />
Controls, can be daylight-linked, can contribute to lighting<br />
scenes and much more.<br />
132 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.9 A phase dimmer<br />
Fig. 7.10 An electronic transformer
Specific Techniques<br />
7.2 Lighting for display screen equipment<br />
In areas containing display screen equipment (DSE) special<br />
care must be taken to prevent bright images being reflected in<br />
the screen from bright surfaces such as windows or luminaire.<br />
Display screen equipment is any screen used for displaying<br />
information, whether it is attached directly to a personal<br />
computer, measuring equipment or specialist applications, for<br />
instance air traffic control screens.<br />
These reflections are caused by the geometry between the<br />
glare source, screen and user allowing the image of the glare<br />
source to be reflected into the users eyes. If the glare source is<br />
a luminaire this tends to be the light emitted by the luminaire<br />
above 65° (above the black lines in Figure 6.12).<br />
To prevent this either the luminaire should have optical control to<br />
remove any bright luminance above 65°, or the display screen<br />
should be moved (either rotated or tilted) to alter the geometry,<br />
thereby removing unwanted reflections. Note, this is more<br />
critical in large rooms or open plan areas, as the geometry of<br />
small office spaces normally means that luminaires are unlikely<br />
to be seen in a display screen. Yet, in reconfigurable areas<br />
care is still needed as removing walls may convert small office<br />
spaces into an open plan area.<br />
To help a designer in choosing a suitable luminaire for DSE<br />
applications a table of luminance limits has been produced<br />
for angles of 65° or higher. This table gives luminance limits<br />
dependant upon whether modern screen technology (type<br />
I and II) or older screen technology (type III) is being used.<br />
Additionally the type of information being displayed has an<br />
impact on the susceptibility of the screen to bright images.<br />
Negative polarity information (i.e. bright text on a dark<br />
background) is more susceptible to disturbing images than<br />
positive polarity information (dark text on a light background).<br />
This information can be used along with a luminaire<br />
manufacturers data to ensure that the luminaires chosen for an<br />
installation that contains DSE are suitable.<br />
Fig. 7.11 Reflections in a computer screen<br />
caused by lighting<br />
Fig. 7.12 A polar curve showing light emitted<br />
above 65°<br />
Specific Techniques | 133
Specific Techniques<br />
For critical applications, such as air traffic control screens, these<br />
limits may need to be applied for angles of 55° or higher.<br />
However increasing the degree of glare control can produce<br />
gloomy spaces unless additional lighting is used to illuminate<br />
the ceiling and upper walls.<br />
Note, that whilst newer screen technology has been less<br />
likely to reflect disturbing images due to anti-glare coatings<br />
and matt screens, some new screens (notably for laptops)<br />
are improving technology and are no longer matt, but highly<br />
reflective. This development will continue as computers develop<br />
as entertainment systems (for watching DVD’s etc.). This is due<br />
to matt screen technology tending to blur images very slightly,<br />
reducing their sharpness, and also the technology having<br />
limited capability to correctly show black. Consequently to<br />
correctly show audio-visual content in high definition matt screen<br />
technology is not used. This will, unfortunately, mean these<br />
screens are more susceptible to problems from glare sources.<br />
134 | Specific Techniques<br />
Table 7.1 Luminance limit recommendations
Specific Techniques<br />
7.3 Light for learning<br />
The importance of light in our learning environments cannot be<br />
under estimated. Research shows that light impacts our health<br />
and level of alertness and this extends to those spaces in which<br />
we are taught. It is now widely accepted that good lighting in<br />
schools can have an important effect on educational attainment<br />
and rates of learning.<br />
We also need to consider the impact of our designs on the<br />
wider environment, from the use of material resources to the<br />
impact on the community and the pupil. Lighting in schools<br />
needs to be sustainable, to continue to serve the needs of<br />
the community and future students, taking into account likely<br />
changes in curriculum, demographics, methods of teaching,<br />
computer use and so on.<br />
Our lighting design for the future of educational facilities needs<br />
to consider the following:<br />
• The proven link between improved school environments<br />
and student/staff morale and staff retention<br />
• The need to create schools which would represent good<br />
value for money and have a long functional life<br />
• A requirement to diversify the school curriculum and to<br />
extend community use of educational facilities<br />
There is now, more than ever, an imperative to create<br />
sustainable schools, which would have a low impact on the<br />
environment, exploit natural light and ventilation and reduce<br />
use of natural resources. Lighting has a large part to play in<br />
each of these, and can do so by using the equipment and<br />
complying with the legislation around product application and<br />
performance.<br />
Fig. 7.13 A PC intensive university teaching<br />
space lit with direct/indirect luminaires<br />
Specific Techniques | 135
Specific Techniques<br />
Methods of teaching<br />
There a generally considered to be three methods of teaching:<br />
• Teacher-led discussions, an ‘interactive’ approach to<br />
learning.<br />
• Large group teaching, the more traditional formal<br />
instruction.<br />
• Small group learning, individual practical and project<br />
work.<br />
Each creates different requirements for the space in which they<br />
happen. The first requires flexible lighting, creating a relaxed<br />
informal atmosphere. The second is more focused on the tasks<br />
within the space - the teacher, the board and the ambient. The<br />
last is most specifically about ambient and task, where the task<br />
lighting will be local to the student and varied according to<br />
their need.<br />
Lighting application<br />
Generally there are two recognised illuminance levels required<br />
in classrooms and these, whilst general targets to aim for, need<br />
to be varied to account for task, time of day and the age of<br />
the pupil.<br />
Levels of ‘300-500 lux should not be exceeded, but should be<br />
focused on 300 lux for the young and 500 lux for the mature<br />
student. A task uniformity of 0.8 is desirable.<br />
To maintain this level and maximise efficiency all teaching<br />
spaces should use daylight as a primary source and dim the<br />
artificial light accordingly, initially by the windows. To give true<br />
sustainability lighting controls must be provided that are simple<br />
to understand and operate, give flexibility of use and deliver<br />
energy savings. Specific requirements will require task lighting<br />
(i.e. the need to specifically light the task, rather than creating<br />
high overall ambient lighting levels)<br />
Specular, louvred fittings are not required, except perhaps in<br />
dedicated computer suites, and even here their use should be<br />
restricted and satin, rather than full mirrored louvres used.<br />
Use of down lighting with a tight cut-off should be avoided<br />
as this will lead to strong modelling of facial features making<br />
it difficult for the visually, or hearing impaired, to see facial<br />
features and to lip-read.<br />
136 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.14 Lighting in large lecture rooms should<br />
be flexible to allow different scene<br />
setting options to be used to suit the<br />
teaching requirements
Specific Techniques<br />
It is recommended that light sources should be between<br />
2000-4000K with a colour rendering in excess of Ra80.<br />
All light fittings must be flicker-free and provide a Limiting Glare<br />
Index of 19.<br />
Primary artificial lighting choice should be direct/indirect in<br />
nature to create the right balance of performance, efficiency<br />
and comfort in learning spaces. The important thing is to put<br />
light onto all surfaces, and in particular, light the face of the<br />
teacher and pupils, so that true communicative learning can<br />
take place.<br />
While PC use is widespread, and growing, modern screen<br />
technology can easily handle high luminance well beyond that<br />
covered by EN 12464-1, but note that it has been shown<br />
recently that students do not learn well with a high proportion of<br />
self-motivated PC teaching alone. Lighting for computer screens<br />
should not impinge on lighting for effective teaching.<br />
Effective Distribution<br />
Lighting for visual comfort is not just about the light sources – it is<br />
also about the distribution of light:<br />
• Walls and ceilings need lighting with both direct and interreflected<br />
light<br />
• This requires relatively high reflectance surface finishes<br />
– e.g. >70% for the ceiling, >60% for the walls (display<br />
boards may lower this to 30-50%) and as high as<br />
practical on the floor<br />
• Gloss finishes should be avoided as they can cause<br />
veiling reflections and glare<br />
• Some walls and displays should have accent lighting, to<br />
create the effect of directional light that feeling of dappled<br />
sunlight through a window for instance<br />
• Average supplementary wall illuminance should be around<br />
2/3rds of the task illuminance<br />
The design approach should concentrate on providing ambient,<br />
task and accent lighting<br />
Fig. 7.15 Direct/indirect lighting with good light<br />
distribution onto wall displays<br />
Specific Techniques | 137
Specific Techniques<br />
The basic principle is to achieve a well-balanced lighting<br />
environment, with good brightness management, which avoids<br />
sharp, distracting lighting contrasts. It is important to remember<br />
that while working on PCs, students will probably be receiving<br />
information from a teacher at the same time, so providing good<br />
vertical lighting on the face, which might be viewed from any<br />
position in the classroom, is equally important.<br />
In fact, good vertical illuminance is important in all teaching<br />
spaces – being able to see the face of the teacher and the<br />
facial expressions of other students is a key component of good<br />
communication – and is vital to effective learning. About 80%<br />
of the information we take in is visual and in a teaching space<br />
most of that happens on the desk or within the 40° band (20°<br />
above and below the horizontal from the eye).<br />
Get the lighting wrong and it becomes difficult to see the<br />
teacher, or the board, for instance. If we can’t see the teachers<br />
face because contrast or vertical illuminance is poor, then<br />
we may fail to read their body language, or in the case of<br />
the hearing-impaired, be unable to lip read. Also consider<br />
the colour of the background compared to the teacher’s skin<br />
tone. Lighting a light skin tone against a white background<br />
presents different problems to a dark skin tone against a white<br />
background. Good design will have to cater for all the diverse<br />
ethnicities of teaching staff.<br />
Using Daylight<br />
Good daylighting is also paramount -- artificial lighting makes<br />
up 25 per cent of the energy costs of a typical school. Recent<br />
research in the US showed that high levels of daylight are<br />
associated with improvements in learning rates, increased<br />
attendance and 20 per cent higher results in reading and<br />
maths. It also can also lead to energy savings of 30-60 per<br />
cent (70 per cent if automatic blinds are used).<br />
So ecologically and on a human level we cannot ignore<br />
daylight. All schools need to use daylight as their primary<br />
light source, with daylight factors of 4-5 per cent and a<br />
minimum 20 per cent of glazing on external walls. As well<br />
as letting in daylight, this allows students and staff to retain a<br />
link to the outside weather, environment and changing light<br />
conditions throughout the day. This helps to improve morale and<br />
concentration and to maintain their circadian rhythms.<br />
138 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.16 An example of lighting with good<br />
vertical illuminance at the board<br />
Fig. 7.17 A classroom with ample daylight
Specific Techniques<br />
7.4 Emergency lighting<br />
Emergency lighting is provided when the supply to the normal<br />
lighting fails. It helps people to see their way and move to<br />
evacuate quickly to a safe place out of the building. It also<br />
avoids panic, restores confidence and enables specific tasks to<br />
be made safe.<br />
Emergency lighting should be provided in all areas where,<br />
when the normal lights fail, there is insufficient daylight or<br />
borrowed light available for those people on the premises.<br />
A risk assessment should be made to identify the places and<br />
routes where people may be at risk and need evacuating in the<br />
event of the normal lighting failing.<br />
An emergency lighting scheme should be designed with<br />
sufficient consideration to the type of premise, size, complexity,<br />
kind of activities and type of people involved. Special<br />
consideration should be given to places where the elderly and<br />
those with disabilities may be present.<br />
There are four main points to consider for an effective<br />
emergency lighting scheme:<br />
1 – Exit Signage<br />
Visible safety signs and signage to indicate the escape<br />
route and final exit should be available at all material times<br />
(luminance of the sign’s safety colours must be at least 2 cd/<br />
m²). The escape route signs must be located so that occupants<br />
from any part of the premises can see and identify the direction<br />
for evacuation.<br />
2 – Mandatory Points<br />
Emergency luminaires have to be carefully positioned to ensure<br />
a compliant emergency lighting scheme. To provide adequate<br />
illumination they need to be mounted close to potential hazards<br />
on the route, such as stairs, a change of direction or crossings<br />
and places requiring emphasis, such as first aid posts, fire<br />
fighting appliances and marshalling points. Also for places<br />
where people may need reassurance in the event the normal<br />
lights failing, such as lifts, toilets or closets.<br />
Specific Techniques | 139
Specific Techniques<br />
3 – Illumination levels and infill lighting<br />
In addition to the lighting of mandatory points, infill luminaires<br />
may be required to achieve the correct lighting levels.<br />
An adequate level of illuminance on the floor of escape areas<br />
(minimum 0.5 lx) and escape routes (minimum on centre line<br />
1.0 lx) should be made available within 5 seconds of the mains<br />
failing to avoid anxiety, and remain operative for at least 1<br />
hour, or longer if required, for safe evacuation. Additionally<br />
take care to illuminate the volume of space (from floor up to a<br />
height of 2.0m) through which people move during evacuation<br />
by mounting luminaires above head height.<br />
High-risk task areas should be illuminated to an adequate level<br />
(minimum 15 lx) within 0.5 seconds of the normal lights failing<br />
for as long as required to complete making the task safe or<br />
whilst people pass by if it is by the escape route.<br />
Illumination should be carried out with light sources having a<br />
colour rendering index of at least Ra 40 so that safety colours<br />
in an escape area or on an escape route can be seen and<br />
discriminated.<br />
Stylish luminaires should be chosen to blend in with the<br />
design of the overall lighting scheme, but they must suit the<br />
environmental conditions of the location. For example use<br />
IP65 emergency lighting luminaires outside the final exit. The<br />
luminaires may be dedicated standalone types or integrated<br />
into standard lighting luminaires. They can be self-contained or<br />
central power fed depending on the size and complexity of the<br />
premises, the operation and servicing and practicalities and<br />
through life economics of the installation.<br />
4 – Maintenance and testing<br />
Once the scheme is installed and commissioned, it is essential<br />
that the luminaires are properly maintained and ready to perform<br />
in the event of an emergency. To make sure installed emergency<br />
products are always fit for purpose, regular testing has to be<br />
conducted by the building operator. Therefore consideration<br />
should be given at the design stage to the intended method<br />
- be it local switch, automatic self-testing or an automatic<br />
remote/central controlled testing system. Also assess and plan<br />
a schedule for servicing the lamps and batteries at required<br />
intervals. Finally, remember the commissioning and certification<br />
requirements for both the design and the installed scheme.<br />
140 | Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques<br />
Emergency lighting system considerations<br />
Standby lighting is used as an alternative to normal lighting but<br />
it can also form the emergency escape lighting solution. When<br />
it does it must follow the rules governing escape lighting.<br />
Escape lighting covers the need for clearly defined escape<br />
routes in the premises formed by corridors or paths indicated by<br />
painted lines. Open areas are defined as places where there<br />
is no clear route or where the routes are changing such as a<br />
large shop, open plan office or multi purpose hall. A high-risk<br />
task area is where some uninterruptible activity is ongoing,<br />
such as a chemical dip process, or some other process that<br />
requires unbroken lighting conditions for safe shut down. In<br />
some places where there is high risk of smoke accumulation<br />
(airlines, passenger ships) low location way guidance systems<br />
are provided to supplement the escape route lighting.<br />
Emergency escape lighting<br />
Escape route lighting<br />
Low location way guidance<br />
Emergency Lighting<br />
Open area (anti-panic) lighting<br />
Standby lighting<br />
High risk task area lighting<br />
Fig. 7.18 Specific forms of emergency lighting<br />
Specific Techniques | 141
Specific Techniques<br />
Clearly defined escape routes<br />
Clearly defined escape routes are taken to be up to 2m wide.<br />
Here the horizontal illuminance at floor level on the centre line<br />
should be not less than 1 lux, and the centre band of at least<br />
50 per cent of the route width should be illuminated to at least<br />
half the centre line value. The diversity of illuminance should not<br />
exceed 40:1. Wider routes may be treated as 2m wide strips<br />
of escape routes but preferably as open areas. The design<br />
illuminance is to be provided within 60 seconds, but preferably<br />
within 5 seconds of the supply failure. To avoid dazzling<br />
people it is important not to exceed the intensity limits related to<br />
the mounting height of the luminaires.<br />
Safety signs<br />
Strategically placed signs permanently indicating the escape<br />
directions from the premises are essential to alleviate anxiety<br />
and confusion by the people present. The signs should conform<br />
to the graphic design, colour and luminance criteria given in<br />
the EN1838 standard. It is important that during an emergency<br />
only signs that give a positive indication to the way out should<br />
be illuminated and that the signs are mounted high enough<br />
(above 2.0m) so that they are not obscured.<br />
Open areas<br />
Areas where the furnishing or equipment on the floor is<br />
frequently reconfigured will not have clearly defined escape<br />
routes and are therefore treated as open areas, as defined<br />
above.<br />
In these the illuminance on the floor should be a minimum<br />
0.5 lux anywhere up to 0.5m from the walls and 50 per cent<br />
should be provided within 5 seconds, 100 per cent being<br />
provided within 60 seconds of the normal lights failing. The<br />
diversity of illuminance should not exceed 40:1. To avoid<br />
dazzling people the intensity limits for the luminaire should not<br />
be exceeded for the mounting height in the scheme.<br />
Exit signs should be located so that they are visible from any<br />
part of the space.<br />
142 | Specific Techniques<br />
not less than 0.5 lx<br />
not less than 0.5 lx<br />
50% of width<br />
not less than 1.0 lx along centreline<br />
Fig. 7.19 Escape route plan (up to 2m wide)<br />
Large areas require<br />
min 0.5 lx up to<br />
border of 0.5m<br />
of the perimeter<br />
area. Max. to min.<br />
illuminance<br />
ratio not greater<br />
than 40:1.<br />
Exit sign<br />
must be<br />
visible from<br />
all parts<br />
of open area<br />
Fig. 7.20 Escape route illuminance requirements
Specific Techniques<br />
High risk task areas<br />
During the failure of the normal lighting supply, emergency<br />
lighting is required in places where machinery, plant or other<br />
processes may present a hazard if left in operation, and that<br />
must be shut down before evacuating the area, In some cases<br />
the escape route may be alongside these hazardous tasks<br />
and therefore needs to be highlighted. There are also places<br />
where the task activity cannot be halted and needs standby<br />
emergency light (such as in an operating theatre).<br />
The high risk tasks areas should be illuminated as required by<br />
the task and in any event the maintained illuminance should<br />
be not less than 10 per cent of the required maintained<br />
illuminance for that task and should not be less than 15 lux and<br />
be available in full within 0.5 seconds. The uniformity should<br />
not be less than 0.1. For this a no-break or maintained system<br />
should be considered.<br />
Power systems for emergency lighting<br />
Emergency lighting systems are usually powered from batteries<br />
or generators that are automatically triggered by a detection<br />
system as soon as the mains system fails. The system duration<br />
or category is defined by the period the system is able supply<br />
power to the load. Usually given as 60 minutes (1 hour) or 180<br />
minutes (3 hours). The two main types of electrical systems in<br />
use are self-contained and central power:<br />
Self-contained systems<br />
Each luminaire is equipped with battery, charger, indicator<br />
and changeover device. These elements may be integral to the<br />
luminaire or housed in a separate unit mounted less than 1m<br />
from the luminaire. The mains supply charges the battery, which<br />
cuts in when the mains system fails. Self-contained systems are<br />
easy to install and extend, and require minimal maintenance.<br />
The system may include a self- testing facility that can carry<br />
out the routine monthly and annual operational tests and give<br />
local indications of the status. They can also be connected to a<br />
central managed automatic testing system and can give printed<br />
report of any defects.<br />
Each luminaire is equipped with batteries and<br />
inverter to power one lamp on mains failure<br />
The gear may be remote mounted, if so the box<br />
should be within 1m of the luminaire.<br />
Fig. 7.21 Self-contained system<br />
Specific Techniques | 143
Specific Techniques<br />
Central systems<br />
Here the power is provided by remote central batteries or<br />
generators and is distributed through sub-circuits to a number<br />
of slave luminaires. These systems are best suited for large<br />
premises. They will require space to house the large battery<br />
sets or generator. The wiring of the sub-circuits has to be<br />
protected and be of high-integrity. During design due allowance<br />
should be made for voltage drops. As part of the high<br />
integrity considerations the luminaires with loop-in/out wiring<br />
facility must also have protected glands and terminal blocks,<br />
alternatively the luminaires may be treated as an individual spur<br />
connection to a protected emergency power ring sub-circuit.<br />
The system must include monitoring of the mains supply and<br />
detection of failure of local circuits in each part of the premises<br />
to bring on the emergency lighting.<br />
Mains Mains Mains mode mode mode Emergency Emergency Emergency mode mode mode<br />
Non-ma Non-ma intained intained<br />
Non-maintained (NM)<br />
(NM) (NM)<br />
Mains mode Emergency Mains mode<br />
lamp is off<br />
lamp is on<br />
lamp lamp is off is<br />
mode<br />
off<br />
Emergency<br />
lamp lamp is on is on<br />
mode<br />
Maintained Maintained<br />
Non-ma intained<br />
(M)<br />
Mains<br />
(NM)<br />
(M) (M) mode Emergency mode<br />
Mains mode Emergenc<br />
lamp is off<br />
lamp lamp is on<br />
lamp is on<br />
lamp is on<br />
lamp is on<br />
Combined (C)<br />
Mains<br />
lamp<br />
lamp is on<br />
Non-ma mode<br />
is<br />
is<br />
on<br />
off<br />
intained Emergency<br />
lamp<br />
lamp<br />
mode<br />
is<br />
is<br />
on<br />
on<br />
Combined Non-ma<br />
Combined<br />
Maintained<br />
Mains mode Emergency mode<br />
intained<br />
(NM)<br />
(C) (NM)<br />
(C)<br />
(M) Non-ma intained<br />
lamp<br />
(NM)<br />
is off<br />
lamp is on<br />
lamp is off<br />
lamp i<br />
lamp is on<br />
lamp<br />
mains lamp<br />
mains<br />
lamp is on<br />
mains lam Maintained<br />
lamp is p lam<br />
is<br />
off is onp<br />
on<br />
on is on emergency emergency<br />
lamp is<br />
lamp is lam emergency on p lam<br />
on<br />
is lamp p on is is on<br />
Combined<br />
lamp is off<br />
lamp is on<br />
Maintained<br />
(M)<br />
(C) Maintained<br />
Fig. 7.23 Summary of modes of operation<br />
lamp<br />
Fig (M)<br />
lamp is on<br />
lamp i<br />
. Fig 6.21 (M)<br />
is on<br />
lamp is on<br />
mains lam. 6.21 p Su is mmary on Su mmary emergency of mode of mains mode s lam of lam s p oper of is p on oper is ation on ation emergency lam p is on<br />
Luminaire mode of operation lamp lamp Combined is on is on lamp lamp is on is on<br />
There Combined are Combined a number of ways that emergency (C) luminaires can<br />
of mains mode operate.<br />
(C) Fig lam s (C) of In . 6.21 p all oper is cases, on Su ation where mmary emergency a battery of mode is present, lams p of it is on charged oper ation mains lam p is on emergency<br />
by the mains supply.<br />
mains mains lam p lam is on p is on emergency lam p lam is on p is on<br />
of mode Non-maintained s of oper (NM) ation Fig . 6.21 Su mmary of mode s of oper ation<br />
The lamp is only lit when the mains fail and is operated by an<br />
Fig emergency . Fig 6.21 . 6.21 power Su mmary Su source. mmary of mode of mode s of s oper of oper ation ation<br />
Maintained (M)<br />
The lamp is lit at all material times and is powered by the mains<br />
supply under normal conditions. In an emergency, when the<br />
mains fail, an emergency power source cuts in to power the<br />
lamp.<br />
144 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.22 Central system
Specific Techniques<br />
Combined (C)<br />
This is a variant of the maintained luminaire in which one lamp<br />
is powered by the mains supply during normal conditions.<br />
A second lamp operates only under emergency conditions<br />
powered by an emergency power source. This type of<br />
luminaire provides light at all material times and is best suited<br />
for signage.<br />
Planning Schemes<br />
The lighting calculations involved in emergency lighting are<br />
straightforward. It is important to base all calculations on real<br />
photometric data for the specific lamp and luminaire, with the<br />
output in the worst (minimum) condition. The EN 13032-3<br />
European standard gives the format of the photometric data and<br />
defines the critical factors for to be used in calculations.<br />
Planning Sequence<br />
There is no precise sequence to be followed, but this<br />
checklist indicates a possible course. (It is most important that<br />
consultation with relevant bodies over the specific plans is<br />
carried out early in the design process).<br />
1. Establish licensing requirements<br />
2. Examine building plans<br />
3. Mark exits and final exits<br />
4. Mark escape routes<br />
5. Identify open areas and special locations<br />
6. Mark location of hazards, fire-fighting appliances, and<br />
alarm call points.<br />
7. Identify small toilets with no windows and toilets over 8m².<br />
8. Identify closets, control rooms, special plant rooms and lifts<br />
9. Note illuminance and other specification requirements.<br />
10. Select signs and escape luminaires fit for the purpose.<br />
11. Position luminaires at essential locations.<br />
12. Add extra luminaires to complete scheme.<br />
13. Check uniformity and glare.<br />
14. Prepare installations instruction.<br />
15. Prepare commissioning procedure, including illuminance<br />
checks.<br />
16. Prepare operation testing service instructions.<br />
17. Prepare logbook.<br />
Specific Techniques | 145
Specific Techniques<br />
Inspection and Servicing<br />
Regular inspection and servicing of emergency lighting<br />
schemes is essential. In the scheme design these matters must<br />
be considered and adequately documented. The standards EN<br />
1838 and EN 50172 provide the framework for certification<br />
of completion of installation and certification for periodic<br />
testing and servicing. The onus for these activities falls on the<br />
competent person of the owner/user of premises. Any faults<br />
noticed should be recorded in the logbook<br />
To verify that adequate emergency lighting is available at all<br />
material times the system needs to be inspected and tested<br />
monthly and to make full duration tests annually. At the end of<br />
each test the circuit is restored to charge conditions and the<br />
charge indicator should glow to show that the battery is on<br />
charge. The inspection needs to confirm that the luminaires<br />
are in place as designed, the lamp in maintained luminaires<br />
is functioning and the signs are visible. The testing may be<br />
made by automatic systems but these must provide noticeable<br />
feedback and warning if action is required.<br />
Servicing considerations are straightforward. The batteries or<br />
fuel tank for the generator may need topping up. The luminaires<br />
need cleaning, failed lamps changing and the batteries<br />
in self-contained luminaires replaced at the manufacturers<br />
recommended interval. Regular servicing will keep the systems<br />
effective and reliable for operation at all material times.<br />
146 | Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques<br />
7.5 Low mount road lighting<br />
When lighting roads there are a number of cases where<br />
conventional lanterns do not provide the best solution to the<br />
real road situation. Mounting heights may be restricted by<br />
structures or local regulations, obtrusive light may be an issue,<br />
or maintenance may have to be completed at very high speeds<br />
– for example to reduce operators’ exposure to fast-moving<br />
traffic, or where downtime for service has to be reduced to<br />
the absolute minimum. In situations such as these conventional<br />
lighting is often deficient and an alternative solution is to use a<br />
luminaire that incorporates flat beam technology, such as the<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Orus lantern. A flat beam lantern is designed to satisfy<br />
standard lighting criteria in a low height format, and therefore<br />
offers engineers a new resource in road lighting. In the case<br />
of the Orus lantern a mounting height of 0.9m is standard.<br />
Therefore where the use of high columns or other structures is<br />
an issue flat beam lanterns can deliver optimised performance<br />
without glare for road users.<br />
Fig. 7.24 A flat beam installation on a road<br />
bridge<br />
Specific Techniques | 147
Specific Techniques<br />
The flat beam concept<br />
Flat beam technology must address two issues unique to<br />
low-level mounting, glare and performance. By positioning the<br />
optical light engine below the driver’s eye line the risk of direct<br />
glare is reduced, and by projecting light transverse to the road<br />
the optical system can offer a very sharp and controlled light<br />
distribution, maximising performance. This controlled distribution<br />
lights a road surface at ‘grazing’ incidence angles, and drivers<br />
perceive higher levels of road lighting because the peak of<br />
the reflected beam is roughly in the direction of the eye. This<br />
does not mean higher glare because the light distribution is<br />
sharply reduced, practically nil when the lantern is installed at<br />
the optimum height below the driver’s eye line. Therefore flat<br />
beam technology can give road users the benefits of increased<br />
perceived ‘brightness’ and visibility. An added benefit is that the<br />
low mounting height acts as a good optical and visual guide to<br />
the road layout.<br />
With conventional luminaires, the ratio of spacing to mounting<br />
height is between 3.5 and 5, but with a flat beam lantern the<br />
figure is between 10 and 18. Similarly taking the ratio of lit<br />
width to mounting height conventional luminaires produce a<br />
figure between 0.8 and 1.2, whilst with flat beam technology<br />
the figure improves to between 8 and 13. This allows<br />
increased spacing of the lanterns, between 8m and 15m for<br />
Orus, which is important to prevent a flicker effect from the<br />
lanterns. With these spacings the eyes can adjust dependent on<br />
speed, meaning that the flicker effect is maintained below 4Hz<br />
and in most cases less than 2.5Hz, keeping driver discomfort to<br />
an acceptable minimum.<br />
Conventional Installation<br />
8m<br />
8m<br />
New concept<br />
0,90m<br />
8m<br />
148 | Specific Techniques<br />
24m<br />
24m<br />
Fig. 7.25 A flat beam lantern mounted on a<br />
bridge structure<br />
Fig. 7.26 Conventional versus low mount lighting
Specific Techniques<br />
Application of flat beam technology<br />
As mentioned flat beam lanterns can be used where traditional<br />
road lighting using columns or façade mounting is not feasible,<br />
for reasons such as:<br />
• Ease of access<br />
• Extreme weather<br />
• Structural fragility<br />
• Maintenance difficulties<br />
• In the vicinity of airfields or other sensitive areas<br />
• Risk of obtrusive light<br />
• Other environmental or resource issues<br />
Flat beam lanterns can be specified for use on roads with<br />
or without pedestrian traffic. Without pedestrians, the<br />
optical design can direct light entirely onto the road. Where<br />
pedestrians are present an alternative optical design that<br />
creates a ‘circle’ of light around the luminaire helps drivers<br />
to detect a pedestrian’s entire body. This option also allows<br />
for facial recognition by other pedestrians. Flat beam lighting<br />
is also an excellent solution where obtrusive light has to be<br />
reduced. For example, it can be specified in certain residential<br />
areas, or in areas where the surrounding buildings are<br />
illuminated and road lighting should therefore be unobtrusive.<br />
Flat beam technology is also suitable for use in parks and<br />
gardens. Here the luminaires can spread light at low level<br />
without distracting attention from other illuminated features.<br />
Durability<br />
Obviously a potential problem when using flat beam<br />
technology is the additional rigors imposed through the lanterns<br />
closeness to the road and therefore the harsh effects of road<br />
usage, and also the ease of access for vandalism. It is essential<br />
that the lanterns are constructed from high quality materials and<br />
engineered for low maintenance and a long operating life.<br />
Optical components such as the visor need to be strong, UV<br />
stabilised and scratch resistant. Tamper resistant screws will be<br />
needed and the lantern and mounting will need a suitable IK<br />
rating, such as IK10/40 joules. As the lantern is close to the<br />
road and therefore the spray caused by road traffic both optic<br />
and gear should comply with IP66.<br />
8m<br />
8m<br />
10m<br />
10m<br />
Fig. 7.27 Flat beam lighting in road<br />
configurations (upper) and pedestrian<br />
configuration (lower)<br />
Specific Techniques | 149
Specific Techniques<br />
Lighting Data for the <strong>Thorn</strong> Orus lantern<br />
When flat beam technology was integrated into Orus, priority<br />
was given to the limitation of glare. Calculations show that<br />
TI is considerably below 10 per cent while luminance and<br />
uniformity exceed relevant standards. The system is designed<br />
with a specific lamp burner cap so that direct light cannot reach<br />
the eyes of a driver or the rear mirrors of a car when installed<br />
at the compulsory height of 0.9m. In a complete installation,<br />
Orus offers drivers a unique ‘guidance’ effect which tracks the<br />
contours of the road, ahead and behind. Orus can be installed<br />
either single-sided, with luminaire spacing between 8 and 15m,<br />
or on both sides of the road with the same spacing. In the latter<br />
configuration it will cover roads up to 20m wide, giving ample<br />
coverage for roads with multiple lanes including cycle lanes<br />
and central reservations. The wide choice of lamps – from 35<br />
to 70W HIT-CE G12, or 60W HIT-CE PGZ12 CosmoWhite –<br />
gives planners ample scope to adjust Orus to any project. Light<br />
output from Orus luminaires is surprisingly resistant to obstruction<br />
by queues of traffic. Tests have shown that there is no<br />
occultation nor distracting shadows, while light emitted from the<br />
system is distributed ahead of, behind and beneath vehicles. It<br />
is also reflected by the road surface. Spacing options between<br />
8 and 15m also reduce any ‘pools’ of darkness, while lighting<br />
from vehicles further maintains lighting levels. Orus luminaires<br />
mix perfectly with classic column mounted systems. Because<br />
they use white light they can be used to highlight sections of the<br />
highway where care is required, as in a hazard black spot or<br />
area of restricted speed.<br />
150 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.28 The Orus lantern
Specific Techniques<br />
7.6 Road tunnel lighting<br />
The aim of lighting a tunnel is to create a safe environment<br />
that allows road users to pass through the tunnel without any<br />
accidents, and the lighting needs to be suitable for both<br />
daytime and night-time hours. The most critical requirement is to<br />
detect obstacles on the road, especially when you are entering<br />
and leaving the tunnel.<br />
To help in the design process tunnels are normally divided into<br />
five zones, the entrance zone, the threshold zone, the transition<br />
zone, the interior zone and the exit zone.<br />
Entrance<br />
zone<br />
Portal<br />
Threshhold<br />
zone<br />
Transition<br />
zone<br />
The entrance zone is the part of the tunnel just before the<br />
entrance, and it has a length equal to the stopping distance<br />
of a car at the traffic design speed. During daylight hours the<br />
driver is adapted to the high luminance outside the tunnel. To<br />
avoid the entrance to the tunnel appearing as a black hole and<br />
to ensure that a driver approaching the tunnel entrance can<br />
detect obstacles on the road, suitable lighting must be installed<br />
in the tunnel entrance, the threshold zone.<br />
The threshold zone is the first zone inside the tunnel and has<br />
a length equal to the stopping distance of a vehicle at traffic<br />
design speed. Luminance values (Lth) should be calculated<br />
according to the calculation method shown in the document CIE<br />
88:2004 and this is related to the luminance outside the tunnel<br />
and the speed of the traffic passing through the tunnel. The<br />
road luminance can be reduced after a distance of half of the<br />
stopping distance into the tunnel.<br />
Interior<br />
zone<br />
Exit<br />
zone<br />
Fig. 7.29 The five zones of a tunnel<br />
Fig. 7.30 The entrance zone<br />
Exit<br />
Specific Techniques | 151
Specific Techniques<br />
Between the threshold zone and the interior zone a number of<br />
transition zones occur. In these transition zones the luminance is<br />
gradually reduced until it reaches the level of the interior zone.<br />
The luminance values can be reduced in steps of 3:1, but the<br />
last step from transition zone to interior zone should not be<br />
greater than two times the interior zones values.<br />
The interior zone is the longest part of the tunnel and the<br />
luminance level should comply with the recommendations given<br />
in the standard. These recommendations give the luminance<br />
level as a function of the stopping distance and traffic flow. For<br />
very long tunnels the interior zone may be split into two subzones.<br />
The first sub-zone is equivalent to the distance of travel of<br />
a vehicle at traffic design speed. The second sub-zone contains<br />
the remaining length of the interior zone.<br />
The exit zone has to follow the same luminance level as the<br />
interior zone, but where additional hazards may occur in the<br />
tunnel, or in long tunnels, it is recommended to increase the<br />
luminance level immediately prior to the exit.<br />
For all zones the lighting levels on the walls is recommended<br />
to be at least 60 per cent of the road luminance values of<br />
the relevant zone up to a height of 2 meters above the road<br />
surface. Uniformity of luminance in the zones must be a ratio of<br />
0.4 (minimum to average on the road and walls up to a height<br />
of 2m above the road surface). A longitudinal uniformity of 0.6<br />
is required along the centre of each lane of the road.<br />
The perception of flicker can occur in a tunnel. This generally<br />
occurs when the luminaires are not mounted in a continuous<br />
row when discomfort from flicker occurs due to the luminance<br />
changes from that of the bright luminaires to the darker surface<br />
between luminaires. The length of the experience, the amount<br />
of light (peak value and duration) and flicker frequency has<br />
an impact on the experience. To minimise flicker discomfort it<br />
should be ensured that the flicker frequency is either below 2.5<br />
Hz or above 15Hz.<br />
For example: For a traffic design speed of 60Km/h<br />
(16.6m/sec) and a luminaire spacing of 4m<br />
the flicker frequency is 16.6/4 = 4.2Hz.<br />
152 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.31 The interior zone of a tunnel lit from<br />
one side by a continuous row of<br />
luminaires<br />
Fig. 7.32 A tunnel lit using floodlights in an<br />
opposite configuration
Specific Techniques<br />
Optics for a tunnel<br />
The main aim for the lighting is to provide a good contrast<br />
between the object and the road. For this luminaires may be<br />
placed either above the road surface, or at the side of the<br />
road surface. Two main types of luminaire optics exist for tunnel<br />
lighting, giving a different distribution.<br />
Symmetrical optics<br />
This optic type is often placed above the lanes and the light<br />
distribution is symmetrical both along the road and transverse<br />
to the road. Symmetrical optics may sometimes be placed in<br />
the junction between wall and ceiling making maintenance of<br />
the luminaires easier and removing the need to close the tunnel<br />
during maintenance time.<br />
Counter beam optics<br />
This optic type is asymmetrical and main beam is orientated<br />
against the traffic, to create a maximum contrast between the<br />
object and the road. Luminaires are placed above the traffic<br />
lanes<br />
To design a complete tunnel lighting installation takes a high<br />
amount of knowledge and experience. The international<br />
document CIE 88:2004 gives information on designing a<br />
tunnel lighting scheme, and local standards should be consulted<br />
for relevant national requirements.<br />
Fig. 7.33 Symmetrical optics<br />
Fig. 7.34 Counter beam optics<br />
Specific Techniques | 153
Specific Techniques<br />
7.7 Lighting maintenance<br />
When a lighting installation is first commissioned conditions<br />
are at their optimal, that is the luminaires, lamps and reflective<br />
surfaces in the space are new and clean. Through the life of<br />
the installation these conditions will deteriorate as age and dirt<br />
reduce the effectiveness of the lighting. Consequently when<br />
designing a lighting installation it is common to design for a<br />
maintained lighting value, that is the lighting level achieved<br />
when the luminaires, lamps and reflective surfaces are at their<br />
oldest or dirtiest.<br />
To calculate maintained lighting levels it is necessary to<br />
calculate the light loss at the point when the luminaires, lamps<br />
and reflective surfaces are at their oldest or dirtiest. This means<br />
that the maintenance cycle for the installation must be defined.<br />
The maintenance cycle consists of three main activities:<br />
1. Cleaning and maintaining the luminaire<br />
2. Cleaning and maintaining the lamp<br />
3. Cleaning and maintaining the reflective surfaces in the<br />
lit space. In exterior area lighting the impact of reflective<br />
surfaces may be negligible. However in applications<br />
such as tunnels and underpasses, and also the lighting<br />
of building facades regular cleaning can improve the<br />
performance of the lighting scheme.<br />
154 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.35 The maintenance cycle
Specific Techniques<br />
An example is shown in Figure 7.35, in which the luminaire<br />
is cleaned every two years, and is cleaned and re-lamped<br />
and the reflective surfaces are cleaned every six years. In this<br />
example the installation maintenance factor is 67 per cent,<br />
so at worst case only 67 per cent of the initial lighting level is<br />
being realised. Note, the installation will never reach the initial<br />
lighting levels achieved when new, as deterioration of some of<br />
the components within the luminaire, and of the surface finishes<br />
within the space, cannot be fully recovered by cleaning.<br />
The main factors that influence the loss of lighting performance<br />
through life for an installation are:<br />
• The cleanliness of the environment. In industrial or urban<br />
environments airborne dirt will be much higher than in<br />
clean room or rural environments. Therefore either the<br />
luminaires and reflective surfaces within the space will<br />
need cleaning more often or the maintenance factor for<br />
the installation will be reduced.<br />
• The type of luminaire specified within the installation. In<br />
dirty environments using an open luminaire will allow<br />
dirt deposition within the luminaire that is very difficult to<br />
clean. Using a sealed unit prevents dirt from entering the<br />
luminaire and therefore only the external surfaces require<br />
cleaning and may be cleaned more vigorously.<br />
• The lamp technology used within the installation. Different<br />
lamp types have different characteristics with respect to<br />
lumen maintenance and lamp life and deciding when<br />
to relamp is a compromise between these two factors.<br />
Selecting a lamp with good lumen maintenance through<br />
life will reduce the light loss due to lamp aging. However,<br />
the installation performance also relies on all (or at least<br />
the majority) of lamps working. So either a spot lamp<br />
replacement system must be used where any failed lamps<br />
are immediately replaced, or the installation maintenance<br />
factor must include an adjustment for the percentage of<br />
broken lamps expected before relamping. Therefore,<br />
relamping must be done when the lamp lumens have<br />
reached a minimum acceptable value and the number of<br />
failed lamps in the installation has reached a maximum<br />
acceptable level.<br />
Specific Techniques | 155
Specific Techniques<br />
The installation maintenance factor is then the product of all the<br />
maintenance factors of the installation components.<br />
MF installation = luminaire MF x lamp lumen MF x lamp<br />
survival MF x reflective surface MF<br />
Where<br />
luminaire MF the amount of light lost due to the<br />
luminaire through aging and dirt<br />
deposition on the luminaire<br />
lamp lumen MF the amount of light lost due to a<br />
reduction in lamp flux as the lamp ages<br />
lamp survival MF the amount of light lost due to failed<br />
lamps which are not immediately<br />
replaced<br />
reflective surface MF the amount of light lost due to reduced<br />
reflection from surfaces within the<br />
installation<br />
Data for these factors should be available from manufacturers.<br />
However the data will assume the unit is operating within<br />
normal conditions as specified by the manufacturer. Operating<br />
outside these conditions could (and probably will) alter the<br />
characteristics of the unit. For example operating a lamp in a<br />
hot environment may increase the lumen output of the lamp, but<br />
at expense of lumen maintenance and lamp life.<br />
Many lighting design software allow the maintenance<br />
schedule to be defined and use this to calculate an installation<br />
maintenance factor. However further guidance on calculating<br />
and using maintenance factors may be found in publications<br />
CIE 97-2006 - Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems<br />
and CIE 154:2003 - The Maintenance of Outdoor Lighting<br />
Systems<br />
Standard tables for luminaire and room surface maintenance<br />
factors exist in CIE 97 and in the absence of more<br />
comprehensive manufacturers data these may be used. They<br />
rely on the classification of the environment being lit into very<br />
clean, clean, normal or dirty, and classification of the luminaire<br />
according to its resistance to the effects of dirt (type A to G).<br />
156 | Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques<br />
Table 7.2 gives help in deciding which environment should be<br />
used, along with advice on typical cleaning intervals.<br />
Inspection interval Environment Activity or Task area<br />
3 years<br />
Very Clean Clean rooms, semi conductor plants, hospital clinical areas*, computer centres<br />
Clean<br />
Offices, schools, hospital wards<br />
2 years Normal Shops, laboratories, restaurants, warehouses, assembly areas, workshops<br />
1 year Dirty Steelworks, chemical works, foundries, welding, polishing, woodwork<br />
Table 7.2 Typical inspection periods for differing environmental conditions<br />
Table 7.3 gives guidance on deciding the type of luminaire,<br />
which is then used in the luminaire maintenance table to<br />
determine the luminaire maintenance factor.<br />
Type Luminaire type Luminaire description<br />
A Bare batten Bare lamp luminaires<br />
B<br />
C<br />
Open top housing<br />
(natural ventilated and<br />
“self cleaning” types)<br />
Closed top housing<br />
(unventilated)<br />
*In clinical areas more frequent inspections may be required<br />
Direct-indirect luminaires without cover, direct-indirect luminaires with indirect reflector and<br />
closed optical device, wallwashing luminaires (vertical opening), wall mounted luminaires<br />
open top and base, downlights with open top<br />
Recessed and surface mounted luminaires (e.g. with louvres), downlights, spotlights<br />
D Enclosed IP2X General purpose luminaires with closed covers and optics<br />
E Dust proof IP5X Dust proof IP5X (protected, clean room luminaires)<br />
F<br />
Indirect lighting and<br />
uplight<br />
Free standing, pendant, wall mounted uplighters with closed base, cove lights<br />
G<br />
Air handling and forced<br />
ventilated<br />
Air handling body and optic used with air-conditioning or ventilation systems<br />
Table 7.3 Luminaire type and description<br />
When the environment and luminaire type have been<br />
determined the tables shown below may be used to give the<br />
luminaire maintenance factor and room surface maintenance<br />
factor. The room surface maintenance factor depends upon<br />
the downward flux fraction (DFF) for the luminaire, which is<br />
defined as<br />
DFF = downward light output ratio / total light output ratio.<br />
Specific Techniques | 157
Specific Techniques<br />
Elapsed time<br />
between<br />
cleanings<br />
in years<br />
0 0.5 1.0 1.5<br />
Environment<br />
Luminaire type<br />
Any VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D<br />
A 1 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.88 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.80<br />
B 1 0.96 0.95 0.91 0.88 0.95 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.94 0.87 0.83 0.79<br />
C 1 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.94 0.89 0.81 0.75 0.93 0.84 0.74 0.66<br />
D 1 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.93 0.85 0.79 0.73<br />
E 1 0.94 0.96 0.93 0.91 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.92 0.92 0.88 0.83<br />
F 1 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.85 0.93 0.86 0.81 0.74 0.91 0.81 0.73 0.65<br />
G 1 1,00 1.00 0.99 0.98 1.00 0.99 0.96 0.93 0.99 0.97 0.94 0.89<br />
Elapsed time<br />
between<br />
cleanings<br />
in years<br />
0 2.0 2.5 3.0<br />
Environment<br />
Luminaire type<br />
Any VC C N D VC C N D VC C N D<br />
A 1 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.78 0.93 0.87 0.82 0.75 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.73<br />
B 1 0.92 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.91 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.89 0.79 0.74 0.68<br />
C 1 0.91 0.80 0.69 0.59 0.89 0.77 0.64 0.54 0.87 0.74 0.61 0.52<br />
D 1 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.90 0.81 0.75 0.68 0.89 0.79 0.73 0.65<br />
E 1 0.93 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.92 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.92 0.90 0.84 0.79<br />
F 1 0.88 0.77 0.66 0.57 0.86 0.73 0.60 0.51 0.85 0.70 0.55 0.45<br />
G 1 0.99 0.96 0.92 0.87 0.98 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.98 0.95 0.90 0.85<br />
Table 7.4 Luminaire maintenance factors based upon type and environment<br />
158 | Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques<br />
time/yrs 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00<br />
reflectances<br />
environment room surface maintenance factors – utilisation plane<br />
ceiling/walls/floor<br />
0.80/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95<br />
clean 1.00 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91<br />
normal 1.00 0.88 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85<br />
dirty 1.00 0.81 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80<br />
0.80/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97<br />
clean 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94<br />
normal 1.00 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
dirty 1.00 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85<br />
0.80/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98<br />
clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
normal 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
dirty 1.00 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
0.70/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
clean 1.00 0.94 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
normal 1.00 0.89 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87<br />
dirty 1.00 0.83 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81<br />
0.70/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97<br />
clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94<br />
normal 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
dirty 1.00 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86<br />
0.70/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98<br />
clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
normal 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
dirty 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91<br />
0.50/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
clean 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
normal 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89<br />
dirty 1.00 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84<br />
0.50/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97<br />
clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95<br />
normal 1.00 0.94 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
dirty 1.00 0.89 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88<br />
0.50/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98<br />
clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97<br />
normal 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95<br />
dirty 1.00 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
Table 7.5 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=1.0 (direct luminaires)<br />
Specific Techniques | 159
Specific Techniques<br />
time/yrs 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00<br />
reflectances<br />
environment room surface maintenance factors – utilisation plane<br />
ceiling/walls/floor<br />
0.80/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
clean 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87<br />
normal 1.00 0.81 0.78 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77<br />
dirty 1.00 0.70 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67<br />
0.80/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95<br />
clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
normal 1.00 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.82<br />
dirty 1.00 0.76 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73<br />
0.80/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
clean 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
normal 1.00 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86<br />
dirty 1.00 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78<br />
0.70/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
clean 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88<br />
normal 1.00 0.83 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79<br />
dirty 1.00 0.72 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69<br />
0.70/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95<br />
clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91<br />
normal 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83<br />
dirty 1.00 0.77 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75<br />
0.70/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
clean 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
normal 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87<br />
dirty 1.00 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80<br />
0.50/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95<br />
clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
normal 1.00 0.86 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83<br />
dirty 1.00 0.76 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.74<br />
0.50/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96<br />
clean 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
normal 1.00 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86<br />
dirty 1.00 0.81 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79<br />
0.50/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97<br />
clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94<br />
normal 1.00 0.92 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
dirty 1.00 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84<br />
Table 7.6 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=0.5 (direct/indirect luminaires)<br />
160 | Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques<br />
time/yrs 0.00 0.50 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00<br />
reflectances<br />
environment room surface maintenance factors – utilisation plane<br />
ceiling/walls/floor<br />
0.80/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89 0.89<br />
clean 1.00 0.86 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81<br />
normal 1.00 0.72 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66<br />
dirty 1.00 0.54 0.50 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49<br />
0.80/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91<br />
clean 1.00 0.88 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84<br />
normal 1.00 0.76 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71 0.71<br />
dirty 1.00 0.59 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55<br />
0.80/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
clean 1.00 0.90 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87<br />
normal 1.00 0.80 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75<br />
dirty 1.00 0.64 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60<br />
0.70/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90<br />
clean 1.00 0.86 0.83 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.81<br />
normal 1.00 0.73 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67<br />
dirty 1.00 0.55 0.51 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50<br />
0.70/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
clean 1.00 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84<br />
normal 1.00 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72<br />
dirty 1.00 0.60 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55<br />
0.70/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93<br />
clean 1.00 0.91 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87<br />
normal 1.00 0.80 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75<br />
dirty 1.00 0.65 0.61 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60<br />
0.50/0.70/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.94 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91<br />
clean 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83<br />
normal 1.00 0.75 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69 0.69<br />
dirty 1.00 0.57 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52<br />
0.50/0.50/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92<br />
clean 1.00 0.90 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85<br />
normal 1.00 0.78 0.74 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73<br />
dirty 1.00 0.61 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57<br />
0.50/0.30/0.20 very clean 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94<br />
clean 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88<br />
normal 1.00 0.81 0.78 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.77<br />
dirty 1.00 0.66 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61<br />
Table 7.7 Room surface maintenance factors for DFF=0 (indirect luminaires)<br />
Specific Techniques | 161
Specific Techniques<br />
To determine the lamp lumen maintenance factor and lamp<br />
survival factor data published by lamp manufacturers should be<br />
used. Examples are shown below.<br />
Maintenance %<br />
120<br />
100<br />
80<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
0<br />
100<br />
162 | Specific Techniques<br />
Lumen maintenance FH/FQ and FC<br />
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000<br />
Lifetime hours<br />
Figure 7.36 Example lumen maintenance curve (courtesy Osram)<br />
Maintenance %<br />
120<br />
100<br />
80<br />
60<br />
40<br />
20<br />
0<br />
100<br />
Lumen maintenance T5 FQ HO, FH HE and FC<br />
Lifetime hours<br />
FC<br />
FC<br />
FH/FQ<br />
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000 16000 18000 20000<br />
Figure 7.37 Example lamp survival curve (courtesy Osram)<br />
FH/FQ
Specific Techniques<br />
For example, a closed top recessed louvred luminaire with an<br />
upward light output ratio of zero uses 14W T16 lamps (Osram<br />
FH), and is installed in an office with surface reflectance’s<br />
of ceiling:70%, walls:50% and floor:20%. The room and<br />
luminaires are cleaned every three years, and the lamps are<br />
replaced every 8000 hours. Therefore:<br />
Luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)<br />
Luminaire is a closed top recessed louvred fitting, which<br />
is type C. As the luminaire is installed in an office this is a<br />
clean environment. Therefore, from Table 7.4 for a cleaning<br />
interval of three years the luminaire maintenance factor is<br />
given as 0.74.<br />
Room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)<br />
As the luminaire has an upward light output ratio of zero<br />
the downward light output ratio must be the same as the total<br />
light output ratio, and therefore the DFF equals one. Using<br />
Table 7.5 for reflectance’s 0.80/0.50/0.20 gives a room<br />
surface maintenance factor of 0.94.<br />
Lamp lumen maintenance factor (LLMF)<br />
From Figure 7.36 when the lamp has been running for 8000<br />
hours the lamp lumens has reduced to 92% of the original<br />
output (red curve).<br />
Lamp survival factor (LSF)<br />
From the red curve on Figure 7.37 when the lamps have<br />
been operating for 8000 hours 96% of the lamps will still be<br />
functional (e.g. 4% of the lamps will have failed).<br />
Thus the maintenance factor is:<br />
MF = MF * RSMF * LLMF * LSF<br />
= 0.74 * 0.94 * 0.92 * 0.96<br />
= 0.614<br />
Specific Techniques | 163
Specific Techniques<br />
7.8 Control of obtrusive light<br />
Obtrusive light is the light that does not illuminate a task or<br />
reference area but spills onto other non-related areas. This<br />
not only reduces the efficiency of the lighting installation as a<br />
proportion of the light produced is being wasted, but can also<br />
cause inconvenience or damage in the surrounding areas.<br />
Obtrusive light may be thought of as having three components;<br />
• Spill light, which is light emitted by a lighting installation<br />
that falls outside the boundaries of the property for which<br />
the lighting is designed.<br />
• Sky glow, which is light that contributes to the brightening<br />
of the night sky.<br />
• Light trespass, which is a special case of spill light when<br />
light spills onto surrounding properties. An additional form<br />
of light trespass is when the direct view of bright luminaires<br />
from normal viewing directions causing annoyance,<br />
distraction or discomfort.<br />
Light<br />
trespass<br />
164 | Specific Techniques<br />
Waste light<br />
Waste light<br />
ULOR<br />
DLOR<br />
Fig. 7.38 An example of an installation<br />
producing sky glow<br />
Sky glow direct and reflected flux<br />
Spill light<br />
Reference area Immediate surrounds Surrounds<br />
Fig. 7.39 The components of obtrusive light
Specific Techniques<br />
A selection of lighting technical parameters are used to define<br />
limits for obtrusive light, depending upon the type of obtrusive<br />
light being experienced or measured. All the parameters<br />
depend upon the environmental zone the installation is within,<br />
which effectively defines the amount of background brightness<br />
from the surround area. The environmental zones are shown in<br />
Table 7.8.<br />
Zone Surrounding Lighting Environment Examples<br />
E1 Natural Dark National parks and protected sites<br />
E2 Rural Low brightness Industrial or residential rural areas<br />
E3 Suburban Medium brightness Industrial or residential rural suburbs<br />
E4 Urban High brightness Town centres and commercial areas<br />
Table 7.8 Definitions of environmental zones<br />
The lighting technical parameters used to define limits for<br />
obtrusive light are;<br />
• ULR, the upward light ratio. This is the proportion of light<br />
that is emitted at or above the horizontal when a luminaire<br />
is mounted in its installed position. For an installation it is<br />
the sum of individual luminaire upward light ratios in their<br />
installed orientation and this indicates the contribution of<br />
an installation to sky glow.<br />
Light<br />
<strong>Technical</strong><br />
Parameter Application Conditions<br />
Upward<br />
Light Ratio<br />
(ULR)<br />
Table 7.9 Upward light ratio limits<br />
Ratio of luminous flux incident on horizontal<br />
plane just above luminaire in its installed<br />
position, to total luminaire flux.<br />
Environmental Zones<br />
E1 E2 E3 E4<br />
0 0 – 5 0 – 15 0 – 25<br />
Specific Techniques | 165
Specific Techniques<br />
• Ev, the vertical illuminance on surrounding properties.<br />
Limits apply to nearby dwellings and special attention<br />
should be taken to vertical illuminance on windows. If land<br />
has been designated for dwellings but no construction has<br />
occurred these limits still apply for the potential dwellings.<br />
Light<br />
<strong>Technical</strong><br />
Parameter Application Conditions<br />
• I, the maximum intensity of a luminaire in a designated<br />
direction. Limits apply to every luminaire in an installation,<br />
and are evaluated from every direction where views of<br />
bright surfaces of luminaires are likely to be disturbing to<br />
residents. Mind you, this only applies where the viewing<br />
direction is not short-term, but is likely to be maintained.<br />
166 | Specific Techniques<br />
Environmental Zones<br />
E1 E2 E3 E4<br />
Illuminance in vertical plane (Ev) Pre-curfew: 2 lux 5 lux 10 lux 25 lux<br />
Table 7.10 Vertical illuminance limits on properties<br />
Light<br />
<strong>Technical</strong><br />
Parameter Application Conditions<br />
Luminous intensity emitted by<br />
luminaires (I)<br />
Table 7.11 Luminous intensity limits in a designated direction<br />
Post-curfew: 0 lux 1 lux 2 lux 5 lux<br />
Environmental Zones<br />
E1 E2 E3 E4<br />
Pre-curfew: 2500 cd 7500 cd 10000 cd 25000 cd<br />
Post-curfew: 0 cd 500 cd 1000 cd 2500 cd
Specific Techniques<br />
• TI, the value of threshold increment. Threshold increment is<br />
a measure of the loss of visibility caused by the disability<br />
glare from a luminaire installation. The limits apply where<br />
users of a transport system are subject to a reduction in<br />
visibility caused by a non-transport installation, and limiting<br />
values are for positions and viewing directions relevant to<br />
the direction of travel for users of the transport system.<br />
Light<br />
<strong>Technical</strong><br />
Parameter<br />
Threshold<br />
Increment<br />
TI<br />
Light<br />
<strong>Technical</strong><br />
Parameter Application Conditions<br />
Building Facade Luminance (L b )<br />
Sign Luminance (L s )<br />
Taken as the product of the<br />
design average illuminance and<br />
reflectance factor divided by �.<br />
Taken as the product of the<br />
design average illuminance and<br />
reflectance factor divided by<br />
�, or for self-luminous signs the<br />
average luminance.<br />
Road classification (see section 4.05)<br />
No road lighting M5 M4 / M3 M2 / M1<br />
15 %<br />
based on adaptation<br />
luminance of 0.1 cd/m 2<br />
Table 7.12 Threshold increment limits<br />
15 %<br />
based on adaptation<br />
luminance of 1 cd/m 2<br />
• L b , the luminance of a building façade. This is the<br />
average luminance of the building façade, and may be<br />
approximated using<br />
E x � av<br />
L = b �<br />
Where E av is the average illuminance of the building<br />
façade and � is the reflectance of the building façade.<br />
• Ls, the luminance of a sign. This is the average luminance<br />
of a sign and may be approximated similar to that<br />
described above, using the average illuminance and<br />
reflectance values for the sign.<br />
Table 7.13 Luminance limits for building facades and signs<br />
15 %<br />
based on adaptation<br />
luminance of 2 cd/m 2<br />
Environmental Zones<br />
15 %<br />
based on adaptation<br />
luminance of 5 cd/m 2<br />
E1 E2 E3 E4<br />
0 5 cd/m 2 10 cd/m 2 25 cd/m 2<br />
50 cd/m 2 400 cd/m 2 800 cd/m 2 1000cd/m 2<br />
Specific Techniques | 167
Specific Techniques<br />
To control obtrusive light various strategies may be used<br />
depending upon the application;<br />
• Using floodlights that have a tightly controlled beam<br />
allows more precise control of the light. Therefore the best<br />
level of beam control for the application should be used.<br />
• Using floodlights that allow the luminaire to be aimed<br />
close to the vertical (i.e. with the face of the floodlight<br />
nearly horizontal and pointing downwards) reduces<br />
the impact on sky glow due to reduced upward light.<br />
Applications which can use specialist “flat-glass”<br />
floodlights (which are designed to be mounted with the<br />
front face of the floodlight horizontal) should do so, as<br />
these are ideal for controlling obtrusive light.<br />
• A higher mounting height can allow floodlights to be<br />
aimed closer to the vertical, and can allow floodlights with<br />
tighter beam control to be used. This allows better control<br />
of glare and spill light. However, the structures will be<br />
more intrusive during daylight hours.<br />
• Similarly the closer a column is to the area to be lit the<br />
better the control of the lighting as this allows floodlights to<br />
be aimed closer to the vertical and floodlights with a wide<br />
distribution can be used with simplified shielding (such as<br />
a visor).<br />
• Using luminaires with lamps that have a lower lumen<br />
output leads to a reduced mounting height, which<br />
helps reduce spill light. However, more luminaires will<br />
be required which may reduce the efficiency of the<br />
installation (but consider that if the control of light is better<br />
then more of the light is being usefully utilised within the<br />
scheme, therefore less light overall may be required. This<br />
is because a scheme that has less light control is over<br />
lighting to compensate for the spill light).<br />
Relevant publications for further reading are<br />
CIE S 015/E:2005 Lighting of Outdoor Work Places<br />
EN12464-2:2007 Lighting of workplaces – part 2: outdoor<br />
work places<br />
168 | Specific Techniques
Specific Techniques<br />
7.9 Lighting for crime prevention<br />
A firm body of evidence now exists to support the theory that<br />
lighting can have a positive effect on crime prevention. With<br />
the increasing prevalence of CCTV cameras in shops and<br />
public spaces lighting also has an important role in aiding the<br />
authorities in identifying suspects. These benefits however have<br />
to be designed into a lighting installation, and it should be<br />
accepted that improvements in lighting cannot overcome bad<br />
design of structures or of a space. (For example the pedestrian<br />
tunnel shown has untended shrubs, a perfect hiding place, and<br />
an overhang ideal for a person to hide on, even before the<br />
pedestrian has entered the blackness of the tunnel).<br />
Lighting can be used to affect two aspects related to crime<br />
• Actual crime. This is the act of a criminal event occurring.<br />
Lighting can either inhibit crime, or aid in the identification<br />
of a suspect.<br />
• The fear of crime. This is the mental worry of a criminal act<br />
occurring. Fear of crime tends to be more prevalent than it<br />
used to be due to improved communications. Knowledge<br />
of crime that occurs in a different geographical area can<br />
induce fear of crime in a totally unrelated area, however<br />
irrational. Lighting can be used to create a safe and<br />
reassuring atmosphere.<br />
It is important to understand that when considering lighting for<br />
a space it is not always possible to understand the problems<br />
of the space without seeing it in all conditions. Frequently the<br />
daytime appearance is completely different to that at night.<br />
How can lighting be used as a tool in the fight against<br />
crime? Some general points can be made. For exterior areas,<br />
including car parks, light fixtures and fittings should incorporate<br />
vandal resistant features such as polycarbonate or reinforced<br />
glass fittings with sources positioned out of reach. The effect of<br />
lighting should not be restricted, either by internal fixtures and<br />
furnishings or by exterior structures or landscaping.<br />
Lighting columns/fixtures should not aid access, for example<br />
over perimeter fencing/walls. And cables and wiring serving<br />
lighting systems should be enclosed to restrict accidental<br />
damage or criminal attacks.<br />
Fig. 7.40 A forbidding entrance to a pedestrian<br />
tunnel<br />
Specific Techniques | 169
Specific Techniques<br />
When lighting for crime prevention the main requirement of<br />
lighting is to ensure a high level of visibility and modelling. It<br />
must be understand that whilst precisely targeted increases in<br />
lighting generally have crime reduction effects, more general<br />
increases in lighting seem to have crime prevention effects<br />
but this outcome is not universal. However, even untargeted<br />
increases in lighting generally make people less fearful of crime<br />
and more confident of their own safety.<br />
To increase visibility and modelling requires consideration to the<br />
illumination on the vertical or semi-cylindrical planes. Pedestrians<br />
need to be able to see other people clearly at a maximum<br />
distance, to be able to perceive any possible threat, either from<br />
facial expression, posture or objects carried (such as a knife)<br />
allowing them sufficient time to react to the threat.<br />
When considering street lighting a change in design approach<br />
is required. Generally street lighting is designed for maximum<br />
efficiency, using the fewest lanterns/columns and switching<br />
lanterns dependant on time. However, lighting should be<br />
designed for both road users and pedestrians, either by using<br />
lanterns that have a high level of performance in lighting both<br />
the road and paths, or with combined lighting units (Figure<br />
7.41), or by separate lighting units for each task. Lighting<br />
should provide maximum quality and reduce shadows. Hence,<br />
lower wattage lamps spaced closer together are preferable,<br />
and lamp type should be chosen carefully to ensure a good<br />
colour of light and colour rendering (white light has been<br />
shown to increase peoples feelings of security, whilst a lamp<br />
that obviously renders colour incorrectly reduces a person’s<br />
confidence in the lighting).<br />
If lighting units are dimmed or switched off during the night high<br />
levels of maintenance are essential as the failure of a lighting<br />
unit will have a larger effect if only some of the lighting units are<br />
lit compared with the case if all the lighting units were on.<br />
When lighting footpaths and cycle paths they should be lit in<br />
a manner that shows the direction that the path takes. Care<br />
should be taken where necessary to illuminate beyond the<br />
boundaries of the path in order to increase the visual area and<br />
provide more confidence to people using those routes. It should<br />
170 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.41 Combined lighting units with high<br />
mount lanterns and bollard height<br />
lighting
Specific Techniques<br />
be recognised that steps and changes in level are also part of<br />
the path and they should not be considered as independent<br />
areas. In urban areas it is important not to rely on lighting from<br />
commercial premises to supplement the amenity lighting as if the<br />
commercial lighting is switched off heavy shadows may occur.<br />
Lighting of commercial buildings should be controlled to prevent<br />
high levels of illumination resulting in adjacent areas appearing<br />
gloomy or dark (as shown). For open areas such as parks or<br />
large pedestrian spaces the lighting should give guidance on<br />
the configuration of the space.<br />
A specific hazard for footpaths are pedestrian tunnels. These<br />
generally have two problems, dark inside and light outside<br />
during the daytime, or light inside and dark outside during the<br />
night. This has implications for visibility as the eye has to adjust<br />
to the different conditions which takes time, especially when<br />
passing from relatively bright light into darkness. The lighting<br />
needs to be controllable to adjust to the different lighting<br />
requirements (e.g. higher light levels during the day and lower<br />
light levels at night with lighting outside the tunnel matched to<br />
the light levels inside the tunnel). As lighting units in pedestrian<br />
subways are generally accessible by the public they should be<br />
vandal-resistant and maintained to a high standard.<br />
Car parks should also be considered as pedestrian areas.<br />
N.B.;<br />
• Cars are generally stationary at entrance and exit points.<br />
Therefore these areas need higher lighting levels.<br />
• Special consideration should be given to stairwells, lift<br />
areas and areas with payment machines.<br />
• If possible light coloured surface treatments should be<br />
applied to ceilings, columns and walls to maximise and<br />
reflect the effect of the lighting system<br />
Fig. 7.42 Façade lighting creating areas of<br />
deep shadows<br />
Specific Techniques | 171
Specific Techniques<br />
When lighting for CCTV cameras additional points need<br />
consideration. To aid in the production of a good image the<br />
following ratios should be checked;<br />
Ratio 1 = Upward horizontal illuminance<br />
Downward horizontal illuminance<br />
Ideally Ratio 1 > 0.3<br />
Ratio 2 = Downward horizontal illuminance<br />
Vertical illuminance towards camera<br />
Ideally Ratio 2 < 5.0<br />
Ratio 3 = Average luminance of subject Ideally Ratio 3 > 0.3<br />
Average luminance of background and < 3.0<br />
Ratio 4 = Vertical illuminance left Ideally Ratio 4 > 0.3<br />
Vertical illuminance right and < 3.0<br />
Ratio 5 = Vertical illuminance to the back<br />
Vertical illuminance toward the camera<br />
Ideally Ratio 5
Specific Techniques<br />
7.10 Lighting and health<br />
When producing a lighting design the ability of lighting to<br />
provide an atmosphere by manipulating the lit effect is one of<br />
the key skills of the designer. The feel of a space can affect<br />
the experience of an observer within that space. Within the<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> PEC philosophy this is the Comfort attribute, and has<br />
descriptors such as calm, lively, balanced, reassuring, inspiring,<br />
welcoming, glitter, etc. This use of the lit experience whilst<br />
possibly affecting our mood does not normally affect our health,<br />
except under inappropriate use of lighting for a given situation.<br />
Recent research, however, has shown that how we design<br />
luminaires and lighting installations does have implications on<br />
our health. Research has discovered a third receptor in our<br />
eye, which exists along with the rods and cones that allow us<br />
to see. This receptor does not produce a visual effect and has<br />
an action spectrum towards the blue end of the visible light<br />
spectrum (the yellow curve labelled NI in the diagram).<br />
Fig. 7.44 The photic, scotopic and non-image forming receptor response curves<br />
Fig . 6.45 The pho tic, scotop ic and non -image forming<br />
rece ptor respon se curves<br />
Specific Techniques | 173
Specific Techniques<br />
The third receptor has direct implications on our feelings of<br />
wellness and well-being. It links into the body’s hormone<br />
mechanisms, affecting the body clock, alertness, mood<br />
and others. This opens up the possibilities of using light and<br />
designing lighting to modify the operation of the body, thereby<br />
affecting a person’s physical health. Indeed this is already<br />
used in the treatment of seasonal affective disorder (SAD) when<br />
very high levels of blue rich light are used to help alleviate<br />
this condition, and light has shown promise in treating sleep<br />
disorders caused by illnesses such as Alzheimer’s disease, in<br />
treating sufferers of delayed phase sleep disorder which is<br />
characterised by late sleep onset and late awakening (generally<br />
younger people) and in treating advanced phase sleep<br />
disorder which is characterised by early sleep onset and early<br />
awakening (generally elderly people).<br />
174 | Specific Techniques<br />
Vision<br />
roads and cones<br />
Non-vision<br />
wellness<br />
3rd receptor<br />
Fig. 7.45 Effects due to the visual and non-visual pathways. The red and blue<br />
lines indicate light signal paths through the head.<br />
Nevertheless it is a large step from using light therapy for<br />
treatment of specific conditions in a controlled environment to<br />
applying this knowledge in general lighting applications to<br />
aid health, with a consequent shift of responsibility towards<br />
rigorous medical ethics and testing. Research shows it is quite<br />
possible to modify the biological clock to optimise its timing<br />
for night shift workers. It is also possible to give a burst of blue<br />
light at suitable times during the day to enhance alertness, or<br />
in a nursing home to increase sleep quality at night. However<br />
research also raises questions as to possible side effects.<br />
• Visual acuity<br />
• Visual performance<br />
• Emotions<br />
• Hormones (melatonin)<br />
• Sleep quality<br />
• Biological clock<br />
• Mood and depression<br />
• Alertness
Specific Techniques<br />
A body of knowledge indicates, for example, that during<br />
periods of darkness the body produces hormones which<br />
act as inhibitors to cancer. The implication of this is that by<br />
manipulating the bodies hormone production we would also be<br />
affecting the bodies defence against some diseases.<br />
Equally using lighting for health in situations such as residential<br />
care homes or nursing homes could be beneficial to the<br />
patients, but at the expense of care staff that may be working<br />
shift patterns at odds with their patients sleep patterns.<br />
As well as medical factors, practical problems arise. With<br />
respect to the shifting of the body clock for night workers the<br />
process of shifting the body clock can take several days, which<br />
would be inappropriate for rapidly changing shift patterns. Also<br />
given a worker will probably travel to or from work in daylight<br />
conditions, and daylight normally supplies a much larger<br />
illuminance at the eye than that achieved by artificial lighting,<br />
this would inhibit the effects of trying to reset the body clock.<br />
However, evidence suggests that the body clock does become<br />
adjusted without any direct intervention for those doing semipermanent<br />
night shift work, taking a period of approximately<br />
15 nights for adaptation.<br />
It is necessary to understand and accept that people react<br />
differently to a stimulus and internal research within <strong>Thorn</strong><br />
indicates that some people are more sensitive to blue enhanced<br />
light than others. As an example, in blue enriched light some<br />
workers found white paper to be a glare source, producing<br />
headaches. Additionally there was a case of a worker<br />
who had had eye surgery finding the blue enhanced light<br />
uncomfortable when returning to work immediately after the<br />
operation.<br />
Manipulating the lit effect to produce stimulating and interesting<br />
environments or controlling light to give dynamically changing<br />
spaces can improve the quality of life for users of the space.<br />
Yet, until more is known about the effects and side effects of<br />
the non-visual effects of lighting, designing to modify biological<br />
mechanisms should be treated with extreme caution.<br />
Specific Techniques | 175
Specific Techniques<br />
7.11 Sustainability<br />
One of the worlds most pressing concerns is achieving<br />
a sustainable environment. So what is “sustainability?<br />
Sustainability, just like light, is essential to life and needs to be<br />
taken seriously. It encompasses the need to conserve resources,<br />
reduce energy demands, limit harmful emissions, reduce waste<br />
and encourage renewable processes.<br />
All these considerations are to protect our natural environment<br />
and life for the future. The urgent need for action is recognised<br />
by all and there are an increasing number of national and<br />
international initiatives and legislations to drive for sustainable<br />
living. A sustainable approach will ensure that the needs<br />
of today are fulfilled without compromising the ability of<br />
future generations to meet their needs. The ideal sustainable<br />
arrangement is when a solution can be perpetually used,<br />
reused or renewed with no waste. Electric lighting has a major<br />
impact on sustainability. The key to sustainability in lighting is<br />
ecodesign, efficient operation and planned recycling at the end<br />
of the product life. These are fundamental considerations in the<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> PEC programme. Eco-design is practiced in the creation<br />
of a lighting product, whilst operation is when the product is put<br />
into service in lighting schemes. End of life is when the product<br />
is no longer required or is unable to fulfil its function.<br />
Maintain<br />
End of life<br />
Recycle<br />
176 | Specific Techniques<br />
Extraction<br />
Refining<br />
raw<br />
materials<br />
LCA<br />
Distribute<br />
Install<br />
Operate<br />
Fig. 7.47 Product life cycle analysis (LCA)<br />
Design<br />
Manufacture<br />
Package<br />
Sustainable design<br />
Fig. 7.46
Specific Techniques<br />
Eco-design is design of product with the entire life cycle in<br />
mind. The life cycle covers consideration of the product from<br />
extraction and refining of raw materials, through design,<br />
manufacture, installation, use and maintenance to the end of<br />
useful life, when dismantling and recycling of the materials<br />
commences. Employing life cycle assessments will check the<br />
environmental impact of the solution through life. It ensures that<br />
care is taken during design to employ absolutely the minimum<br />
amount of restricted hazardous substances and that the<br />
minimum amount of virgin materials, water and energy are used<br />
during manufacture.<br />
Consider also the energy efficiency during the operation<br />
phase and the need to dismantle the product quickly and<br />
without waste at the end of life. Luminaires should be designed<br />
for disassembly and dematerialisation (eg use of snap fit<br />
connectors rather than screws) and making parts multifunctional.<br />
All products should be marked for easy identification and<br />
removal. The generation of electrical energy required for<br />
lighting is a major contributor to CO emissions. For every<br />
2<br />
kWh of energy 0.42kg * of CO is liberated and added to<br />
2<br />
the “greenhouse” gases in the atmosphere, increasing global<br />
warming. The proportion of energy demand by lighting<br />
products can be split into three phases: creation (12%), use<br />
(80%) and disposal (8%). The most energy consumption by the<br />
product is clearly during operation and much of this can be<br />
influenced by prudent design and component selection. The key<br />
elements of this selection are lamps and control circuit including<br />
ballast type. Today the most useful and efficacious light source<br />
is the fluorescent lamp. It can be linear or compact and employ<br />
poly-phosphor coatings yielding good colour and light output.<br />
The lamp requires a ballast to operate, which can be magnetic<br />
or electronic. Magnetic ballasts (copper and iron) have the<br />
advantage of being lower in cost and recyclable. Electronic<br />
ballasts, however, can operate the lamp at high frequencies, in<br />
excess of 10 kHz thus eliminating flicker, are more efficacious,<br />
use less energy, and are lightweight one-piece control gear that<br />
can be dimmable and automatically controlled. Lighting controls<br />
add much to operational efficiency. The controls maybe a<br />
simple on/off switch or a sophisticated computer programmed<br />
system.<br />
* EU average<br />
Fig. 7.49<br />
Fig. 7.48<br />
Specific Techniques | 177
Specific Techniques<br />
Controls save energy use by providing electric light only where<br />
and when needed. Controls can link up to respond to constant<br />
illuminance, daylight availability and presence of people. With<br />
efficient products, correct lighting scheme design and the use of<br />
control systems substantial energy saving can be made without<br />
jeopardising the quality of the required lighting condition.<br />
The next obvious step is to protect the rapid depletion of raw<br />
materials. In this process sustainable product designs must use<br />
less material, make greater use of more recycled materials and<br />
plan to use more recyclable materials. With such practice of<br />
good management of resource, increased energy efficiency,<br />
employment of new technologies and the drive for renewable<br />
energy generation will ensure good future for light and lighting. Fig. 7.50<br />
178 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.51 Recycling plant
Specific Techniques<br />
7.12 Outdoor lighting controls (OLC)<br />
The prevalent technology used in conventional outdoor lighting<br />
has minimal control. Time clocks or photocells determine if a<br />
luminaire is on or off and monitoring and reporting of luminaire<br />
faults is dependant upon local residents or street patrols. The<br />
lighting is therefore inflexible and the quality of maintenance<br />
can be poor.<br />
The use of modern outdoor lighting controls can overcome these<br />
difficulties and supply many additional benefits. Benefits of<br />
using lighting controls can be<br />
• A reduction in unnecessary night-time lighting by providing<br />
facilities to dim or turn-off luminaires based upon user<br />
needs.<br />
• Contributing to the reduction of traffic accidents and crime<br />
rates by providing needs-specific lighting, for example<br />
increasing lighting levels during busy times at road<br />
junctions, motorway exits or areas of mixed pedestrian<br />
and motorised traffic.<br />
• To allow lighting to easily adapt to special occasions. For<br />
example during a street festival lighting can be controlled<br />
to ensure suitable light levels based on the needs of<br />
the event (this may involve increased lighting or even a<br />
decrease in light levels if festival lights are being used).<br />
• Allowing energy needs to be more accurately defined and<br />
optimised, reducing energy consumption and therefore<br />
CO 2 emissions and also saving money.<br />
Additional benefits in the management of the lighting equipment<br />
may be<br />
• Allowing the status of luminaires to be monitored and<br />
failures to be automatically reported, so that defective<br />
components may be replaced when they fail.<br />
• Allowing maintenance schedules to be rationalised based<br />
upon computer records of lamp burning hours, luminaire<br />
cleaning schedules, etc.<br />
Specific Techniques | 179
Specific Techniques<br />
• Reducing travel costs through automatic reporting of faults,<br />
removing the need for street patrols<br />
Lighting control and monitoring are the two central abilities<br />
of the <strong>Thorn</strong> Telea system. Telea offers the flexibility of two<br />
communication technologies :<br />
• A Powerline communication system uses the mains cabling<br />
to transmit signals<br />
• An RF communication system uses radio frequency to<br />
transmit data.<br />
In both cases there is no need to install new cables, and both<br />
systems allow instant reporting of fault conditions using SMS<br />
messages to an assigned person.<br />
A Telea installation consists of:<br />
• Luminaire controllers<br />
• Comboxes<br />
• Central Management server<br />
180 | Specific Techniques<br />
Network<br />
connection,<br />
e.g. TCP/IP<br />
Powerline Data<br />
Communication<br />
Radio<br />
Frequency Data<br />
Communication<br />
Powerline Data<br />
Communication<br />
Fig. 7.52 Components of a Telea installation
Specific Techniques<br />
Luminaire controllers<br />
These are installed in each individual luminaire, either inside the<br />
lantern or within the column. The controller switches the lamp on<br />
and off and depending on the capabilities of the ballast may<br />
also control power reduction/dimming. The controller allows<br />
various operating parameters to be measured (such as burning<br />
hours, lamp faults, etc) and feeds the information back to the<br />
Combox. It contains an astrological clock and internal memory<br />
enables programmes to continue to operate in the event of<br />
signal breakdown. The two types of controller (Powerline and<br />
Radio Frequency) may be mixed on one single installation.<br />
Repeater functionality integrated into Telea controllers make the<br />
communication extremely reliable and adaptable to any grid<br />
topology and also remove the need for external relays.<br />
Combox features<br />
A Combox consists of the following components :<br />
• one Combox controller<br />
• one transceiver (PL or RF)<br />
• one 24V power supply<br />
• three filters (PL only)<br />
• one GSM modem<br />
Installed at the switch cabinet, the Combox controls up to 255<br />
luminaire controllers. It integrates all switching programmes and<br />
feedback from the controllers and feeds information back to the<br />
central server. It can send error messages reporting luminaire<br />
faults to one or several designated mobile phones.<br />
There are two types of Comboxes, used respectively for<br />
Powerline or Radio Frequency luminaire controllers. Both types<br />
can control up to 255 luminaire controllers. The RF Combox<br />
does not actually need to be contained within a switch cabinet,<br />
only requiring power to operate, but the use of a switch cabinet<br />
is normal practice.<br />
Maximum distances between the Combox and the first luminaire<br />
controller, or between two controllers are approximately 200m<br />
for Powerline and 100m for Radio Frequency installations.<br />
Fig. 7.53 Telea Powerline luminaire controller<br />
Fig. 7.54 Telea Combox RF SMS<br />
Specific Techniques | 181
Specific Techniques<br />
CME central server features<br />
Installed in the control room this comprises a hardware and<br />
the CME software. The CME server is optional (an installation<br />
may run with only Comboxes and luminaire controllers) but is<br />
necessary for central monitoring and offers an intuitive interface<br />
for configuring and monitoring the installation.<br />
Data transfer between the server and Comboxes is achieved<br />
through telephone (GSM) or computer network (TCP/IP)<br />
communication protocols. In the case of GSM communication<br />
the data transfer is usually programmed to occur at the end of<br />
night, so that errors that might have arisen during the night can<br />
be visualised on the screen the following morning.<br />
The CME server can be interfaced with existing servers within<br />
technical limitations. For example, the Geographical Information<br />
System (GIS) enables lighting points to be visualised on a map<br />
and faults or maintenance data such as burning hours to be<br />
easily recognisable using colour coding. Please contact your<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> representative for further information.<br />
Upgrading existing luminaires<br />
The Telea system can be implemented into existing as well as<br />
new lighting installations. For example the RF switch controller<br />
(LSRF) fits into any luminaire equipped with a NEMA socket,<br />
adding Telea functionality to the standard photocell. In addition,<br />
all Powerline controllers can be supplied in boxes designed<br />
for installation in poles, enabling retrofit installation when<br />
mechanical and temperature constraints prevent the integration<br />
into the gear compartment.<br />
Telea for new lighting installations<br />
For new installations <strong>Thorn</strong> can integrate Telea luminaire<br />
controllers into several <strong>Thorn</strong> streetlighting luminaires. This<br />
completely in-house service guarantees the conformity of all of<br />
the luminaires to existing standards, including Electro-Magnetic<br />
Compliancy (EMC).<br />
182 | Specific Techniques<br />
Fig. 7.55 Telea CME software
8 Checklists<br />
8.1 Life cycle analysis<br />
When installing new lighting, or refurbishing an existing<br />
scheme, it is important to quantify and compare the benefits<br />
of possible alternative replacement lighting systems. These<br />
benefits are quantified in terms of a life cycle calculation<br />
for each lighting system, that is over the planned life of the<br />
installation how much will each system cost. These values can<br />
be compared and the most favourable option chosen. (Note<br />
that the most favourable option from a financial viewpoint may<br />
not be the best option from a lighting viewpoint. At some point<br />
a decision will have to be made as to the relative importance<br />
of these factors and a compromise reached).<br />
If the chosen system is to be a replacement for an existing<br />
installation a cost benefit of the new system compared to the<br />
existing installation may be made by calculating the pay back<br />
period, as shown Section 8.2.<br />
Worksheet 8.1 aids life cycle analysis. Formulae used is this<br />
worksheet are:<br />
Luminaire costs = Number of luminaires x cost of one luminaire<br />
Lamp costs = number of luminaires x number of lamps per luminaire x cost of one lamp<br />
Installation costs = number of luminaires x installation cost per luminaire<br />
Room cleaning costs = cost of room cleaning x service life of system (years)<br />
room cleaning interval (years)<br />
Luminaire cleaning costs = cost of luminaire cleaning x service life of system (years)<br />
luminaire cleaning interval (years)<br />
Lamp replacement costs = cost of lamp replacement x service life of system (years)<br />
lamp replacement interval (years)<br />
Energy costs = (number of luminaires x system power of luminaire x service life of system x annual burning hours x<br />
energy cost per kWh x %energy savings due to controls)/1000<br />
Operating costs = room cleaning costs + luminaire cleaning costs + lamp replacement costs + energy costs<br />
Annual operating costs = operating costs/service life of system<br />
(Note that the model given on the following page is a static<br />
model in that it ignores the costs of depreciation of equipment<br />
and interest payments).<br />
Checklists | 183
Checklists<br />
Building Project<br />
Luminaire type (1)<br />
Luminaire data<br />
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)<br />
System power of luminaire (W) (3)<br />
Operating data<br />
Service life of system (years) (4)<br />
Annual burning hours (5)<br />
Lamp replacement interval (years) (6)<br />
Luminaire cleaning interval (years) (7)<br />
Room cleaning interval (years) (8)<br />
Number of luminaires<br />
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (9)<br />
Lamp survival factor (10)<br />
Luminaire maintenance factor (11)<br />
Room surface maintenance factor (12)<br />
Maintenance factor [ (9)x(10)x(11)x(12) ] (13)<br />
Number of luminaires (14)<br />
Itemised investment costs<br />
Cost of one luminaire (15)<br />
Cost of one lamp (16)<br />
Installation costs per luminaire (17)<br />
Itemised operating costs<br />
Cost of lamp replacement (18)<br />
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)<br />
Cost of room cleaning (20)<br />
Energy costs per KWh (21)<br />
%Energy savings due to control system (22)<br />
Investment costs<br />
Luminaire costs [ (14)x(15) ] (23)<br />
Lamp costs [ (14)x(2)x(16) ] (24)<br />
Installation costs [ (14)x(17) ] (25)<br />
Investment costs [ (23)+(24)+(25) ] (26)<br />
Operating costs<br />
Room cleaning costs [ (20)x(4) / (8) ] (27)<br />
Luminaire cleaning costs [ (19)x(4) / (7) ] (28)<br />
Lamp replacement costs [ (18)x(4) / (6) ] (29)<br />
Energy costs [ (14)x(3)x(4)x(5)x(21)x(22) / 1000 ] (30)<br />
Operating costs [ (27)+(28)+(29)+(30) ] (31)<br />
Annual operating costs [ (31) / (4) ] (32)<br />
Total costs over installation life [ (31)+(26) ] (33)<br />
184 | Checklists<br />
Option 1 Option 2<br />
Worksheet 8.1
Checklists<br />
8.2 Economics<br />
When refurbishing an existing installation it is important to<br />
be able to quantify the benefits of the new lighting system<br />
compared with the existing system. These benefits are quantified<br />
in terms of the payback period. This is a comparison of the<br />
expenditure in terms of investment costs to buy and install a<br />
new system, compared with the savings in annual operating<br />
costs through having the new system. Thus if a payback time<br />
is 5 years this means that after 5 years the savings from using<br />
the new system have cancelled out the costs of buying the new<br />
system.<br />
Worksheet 8.2 aids in the calculation of this value. Formulae<br />
used is this worksheet are:<br />
Luminaire costs = Number of luminaires x cost of one luminaire<br />
Lamp costs = number of luminaires x number of lamps per luminaire x cost of one lamp<br />
Installation costs = number of luminaires x installation cost per luminaire<br />
Room cleaning costs = cost of room cleaning x service life of system (years)<br />
room cleaning interval (years)<br />
Luminaire cleaning costs = cost of luminaire cleaning x service life of system (years)<br />
luminaire cleaning interval (years)<br />
Lamp replacement costs = cost of lamp replacement x service life of system (years)<br />
lamp replacement interval (years)<br />
Energy costs = (number of luminaires x system power of luminaire x service life of system x<br />
annual burning hours x energy cost per kWh x %energy savings due to<br />
controls)/1000<br />
Operating costs = room cleaning costs + luminaire cleaning costs + lamp replacement costs + energy costs<br />
Annual operating costs = operating costs / service life of system<br />
Pay back period = investment cost proposed installation – investment cost existing installation<br />
annual operating costs existing installation - annual operating costs proposed installation<br />
(Note that the model given in Worksheet 8.2 is a static model<br />
in that it ignores the costs of depreciation of equipment and<br />
interest payments).<br />
Checklists | 185
Building Project<br />
Luminaire type (1)<br />
Luminaire data<br />
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)<br />
System power of luminaire (W) (3)<br />
Operating data<br />
Service life of system (years) (4)<br />
Annual burning hours (5)<br />
Lamp replacement interval (years) (6)<br />
Luminaire cleaning interval (years) (7)<br />
Room cleaning interval (years) (8)<br />
Number of luminaires<br />
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (9)<br />
Lamp survival factor (10)<br />
Luminaire maintenance factor (11)<br />
Room surface maintenance factor (12)<br />
Maintenance factor [ (9)x(10)x(11)x(12) ] (13)<br />
Number of luminaires (14)<br />
Itemised investment costs<br />
Cost of one luminaire (15)<br />
Cost of one lamp (16)<br />
Installation costs per luminaire (17)<br />
Itemised operating costs<br />
Cost of lamp replacement (18)<br />
Cost of luminaire cleaning (19)<br />
Cost of room cleaning (20)<br />
Energy costs per KWh (21)<br />
%Energy savings due to control system (22)<br />
Investment costs<br />
Luminaire costs [ (14)x(15) ] (23)<br />
Lamp costs [ (14)x(2)x(16) ] (24)<br />
Installation costs [ (14)x(17) ] (25)<br />
Investment costs [ (23)+(24)+(25) ] (26)<br />
Operating costs<br />
Room cleaning costs [ (20)x(4) / (8) ] (27)<br />
Luminaire cleaning costs [ (19)x(4) / (7) ] (28)<br />
Lamp replacement costs [ (18)x(4) / (6) ] (29)<br />
Energy costs [ (14)x(3)x(4)x(5)x(21)x(22) / 1000 ] (30)<br />
Operating costs [ (27)+(28)+(29)+(30) ] (31)<br />
Annual operating costs [ (31) / (4) ] (32)<br />
186 | Checklists<br />
Existing<br />
installation<br />
Pay back period* = (26)Proposed – (26)Existing (years)<br />
(32)Existing – (32)Proposed<br />
Pay back period* = – = years<br />
–<br />
*excludes depreciation and interest<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
Proposed<br />
installation<br />
Worksheet 8.2
Checklists<br />
8.3 Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)<br />
It is becoming increasingly important to estimate the energy<br />
requirements of lighting in buildings and to quantify these<br />
requirements against best practice. To help, the CEN EN<br />
15193 document has been produced, which introduces the<br />
Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI). The document also<br />
provides guidance with notional limits derived from reference<br />
standards. Note that whilst responsible use of energy is<br />
important it must not lead to inadequate lighting schemes being<br />
produced. Both the lighting requirements and energy usage<br />
requirements should be fulfilled.<br />
Some terminology used in the LENI calculation may be<br />
unfamiliar and is, therefore, given below.<br />
Total installed charging power for emergency lighting (P ) em<br />
– installation input charging power, in watts, of all emergency<br />
lighting luminaires in an area. Units: kWh/(m2 x year).<br />
P em = � P ei<br />
i<br />
Where P ei is the emergency lighting charging power in watts.<br />
Total installed control circuit parasitic power (P pc ) – installation<br />
input power, in watts, of all control systems within luminaires in<br />
an area when the lamps are not operating.<br />
Units: kWh/(m 2 x year).<br />
P pc = � P ci<br />
i<br />
where P is the parasitic power consumed by the controls when<br />
ci<br />
the lamps are off, in watts.<br />
Total installed lighting power (P ) – installation power in watts<br />
n<br />
of all luminaires in an area. Units: W/m2 .<br />
P n = � P i<br />
i<br />
where P is the luminaire power in watts.<br />
i<br />
Daylight operating hours (t ) – installation operating hours<br />
D<br />
when daylight is present. Units: hours.<br />
Non-daylight operating hours (t ) – installation operating<br />
N<br />
hours where daylight is not present. Units: hours.<br />
Checklists | 187
Checklists<br />
Annual operating time (t O ) – the annual number of hours with<br />
the lamps operating (i.e. turned on)<br />
188 | Checklists<br />
t o =t o +t n<br />
where t D and t N are defined above.<br />
Standard year time (t ) – the time taken for one standard year<br />
y<br />
to pass, taken as 8760 hours.<br />
Emergency lighting charge time (t ) – the operating hours<br />
e<br />
during which the emergency lighting batteries are being<br />
charged. Units: hours.<br />
Constant illuminance factor (F ) – this is a factor relating to the<br />
C<br />
usage of the total installed power when constant illuminance<br />
control is in operation in the area . When constant illuminance<br />
control is not in operation this has the value of 1. Units: none.<br />
Occupancy dependency factor (F ) – this is a factor relating<br />
O<br />
the usage of the total installed lighting power when occupancy<br />
control is in operation in the area. When occupancy control is<br />
not in operation this has the value of 1. Units: none<br />
Daylight dependency factor (F ) – this is a factor relating the<br />
D<br />
usage of the total installed lighting power to daylight availability<br />
in the area. When daylight control is not in operation this has<br />
the value of 1. Units: none<br />
The LENI formula is<br />
W<br />
LENI =<br />
A<br />
where<br />
W is the total energy used for lighting a room or zone in kWh/<br />
year and A is the total useful floor area of the building in m2 .<br />
W is composed of two components<br />
W=W +W L P<br />
where<br />
W is the annual lighting energy required to provide illumination<br />
L<br />
so that the building may be used.<br />
W is the annual parasitic energy required to provide charging<br />
P<br />
energy for emergency lighting systems and standby energy for<br />
lighting control systems.
Checklists<br />
W L may be calculated using the formula<br />
W L = � {(P n xF C )x[(t D xF O xF D )+(t N xF O )]}/1000<br />
where the individual terms are defined above.<br />
W P may be calculated using the formula<br />
W P = � {{P PC x[t y – (t D + t N )]} + (P em xt e )}/1000<br />
where the individual terms are defined above.<br />
Worksheet 8.3 helps calculate the LENI value. Note that values<br />
entered in the spreadsheet are the total values for all luminaires<br />
in the installation. If more than one luminaire type is used the<br />
total energy usage value (18) should be calculated for each<br />
luminaire type and the results summed. This summed value<br />
should then be used to calculate the LENI value.<br />
Checklists | 189
Checklists<br />
Building Project<br />
Parasitic power<br />
Total emergency charging power (P em ) (1)<br />
Total lighting controls standby power (P pc ) (2)<br />
Luminaire data<br />
Total installed power (P n ) (3)<br />
Operating hours<br />
Daylight operating hours (t D ) (4)<br />
Non-daylight operating hours (t N ) (5)<br />
Standard year time (t y ) (6)<br />
Emergency lighting charge time (t e ) (7)<br />
Factors<br />
Constant illuminance factor (F C ) (8)<br />
Occupancy dependency factor (F O ) (9)<br />
Daylight dependency factor (F D ) (10)<br />
Parasitic energy<br />
Lighting controls parasitic power<br />
(2) x [ (6) - ( (4) + (5) ) ] (11)<br />
Emergency lighting parasitic factor<br />
(1) x (7) (12)<br />
Total parasitic energy usage<br />
( (11) + (12) ) / 1000 (13)<br />
Illumination energy<br />
Energy usage without daylight/occupancy<br />
control (3) x (8) (14)<br />
Daylight energy usage<br />
(4) x (9) x (10) (15)<br />
Non-daylight energy usage<br />
(5) x (9) (16)<br />
Total energy usage for illumination<br />
{ (14) x [ (15) + (16) ] } / 1000 (17)<br />
Total annual energy usage (13) + (17) (18)<br />
Total useful floor area in m 2 (19)<br />
Lighting energy numeric indicator (LENI)<br />
(18) / (19)<br />
190 | Checklists<br />
Installation 1 Installation 2<br />
8760 8760<br />
Worksheet 8.3
Checklists<br />
Worked example – LENI calculation<br />
Project – Electronic device assembly plant<br />
Location North East England<br />
Size Length = 55m, Width = 48m, H = 6m,<br />
Useful area = 2640m²<br />
Roof 20% glazed to allow entry of daylight<br />
Walls 2 sides 30% glazed to allow daylight<br />
Interior Light colour with open plan assembly line layout<br />
Operational hours = 4000 hrs/year (2500 daylight,<br />
1500 no daylight)<br />
Standard year hours = 8760 hrs/year<br />
Lighting requirements – 500 lx on work plane, Uo > 0.7,<br />
UGR 80,<br />
Lighting quality class – medium (two star)<br />
Lighting solution –<br />
230 off Primata II 2x49W T16 lamps battens with slotted white<br />
reflector optic and DALI controlled dimmable HF ballast linked<br />
daylight detection and auto off control<br />
30 off as above but with E3 emergency lighting capability<br />
6 off 1x18W T26 Exit signs<br />
Required data –<br />
Circuit watts of the Primata II luminaire – 106 W<br />
Charge power for Primata II emergency lighting circuit –<br />
3.5 W/luminaire<br />
Standby power for DALI ballast in the Primata II –<br />
0.4 W/luminaire<br />
Charge power for Exit sign luminaires – 10 W/luminaire<br />
Estimations<br />
P – {(3.5 x 30 x 8760) + (10 x 6 x 8760)}/(2640 x 1000)<br />
em<br />
= 0.55 kWh/m²/year<br />
P – (0.4 x 260 x 8760)/(2640 x 1000) = 0.35 kWh/<br />
pc<br />
m²/year<br />
P – (106 x 260)/2640 = 10.4 W/m²<br />
n<br />
F (constant illuminance control MF = 0.8) – 0.9<br />
c<br />
F (daylight link control medium daylight supply) – 0.8<br />
d<br />
F (presence control manual on/auto off) – 0.9<br />
o<br />
LENI = (0.9 x 10.4)/1000 x {(2500 x 0.8 x 0.9) + (1500<br />
x 0.9)} + 0.55 + {0.35/8760 x (8760 – (2500 + 1500)]}<br />
= (8.4/1000) x (1800 + 1350) + 0.55 + (0.35/8760 x<br />
4760) = (9.36 x 3.15) + 0.55 + 0.19 = 30.22 kWh/m²/year<br />
LENI = 30.22 kWh/m²/year<br />
Checklists | 191
Checklists<br />
Table 8.1 shows the parameters and results for this project in<br />
line B. It shows that the addition of the controls will yield a 21%<br />
reduction in the energy requirements.<br />
Line A shows the energy requirements if daylight was not<br />
admitted into the building and Line C show the Benchmark<br />
values for this type of project taken from EN 15193-2007<br />
Annex F Table F1.<br />
Building Q P m P pc P load t D t N F c F O F D<br />
192 | Checklists<br />
Quality<br />
class<br />
Parasitic<br />
Emergency<br />
kWh/<br />
(m 2 x year)<br />
Parasitic<br />
Control<br />
kWh/<br />
(m 2 x year) W h h<br />
no constant constant<br />
illuminance illuminance<br />
Manual<br />
-<br />
Auto<br />
-<br />
Manual<br />
-<br />
Manufacture ** A 0.55 0.35 10.4 2500 1500 1 0.9 1 0.9 1 1<br />
** B 0.55 0.35 10.4 2500 1500 1 0.9 1 0.9 1 0.8<br />
** C 1 5 20 2500 1500 1 0.9 1 1 1 1<br />
Building LENI LENI LENI LENI<br />
no constant illumination constant illumination<br />
Manual Auto Manual Auto<br />
Gain<br />
kWh/(m %<br />
2 /year) kWh/(m2 /year)<br />
Manufacture 42.3 38.2 38.2 34.4 10<br />
Table 8.1<br />
42.3 33.5 38.2 30.2 21<br />
83.7 83.7 75.7 75.7 0<br />
Auto<br />
-
9 Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
9.1 Choosing the right lamp<br />
Part of the expertise of the lighting designer is the ability to<br />
find the most suitable combination of lamp and luminaire to<br />
light a given environment. Choosing the correct lamp depends<br />
upon what is required of the lighting. The relevant key lighting<br />
characteristics of lamps are given below.<br />
Luminous flux/luminous efficacy<br />
The total amount of light generated by the lamp. The rated<br />
luminous flux is measured under standard conditions at 25°C<br />
in units of lumen (lm). The ratio of luminous flux to electrical<br />
power consumption gives the luminous efficacy (lm/W). The<br />
system luminous efficiency also includes the power consumption<br />
of the control gear. The greater the efficacy for a given output,<br />
the lower the electricity cost, and therefore the lower the<br />
contribution of the power station to global warming.<br />
Rated life<br />
The average rated life is normally specified. This is the time by<br />
which statistically half of a test sample of lamps are still working<br />
(e.g. half have failed) under standardised conditions.<br />
Light colour<br />
The light colour relates to the correlated colour temperature<br />
(CCT) of a white light source. This describes the colour<br />
impression made by a light source; from relatively warm (low<br />
colour temperature with predominant red) to cool (high colour<br />
temperature with predominant blue).<br />
Colour rendition<br />
The spectral components present in light produced by a lamp<br />
determine how well the lamp reproduces object colours. The<br />
higher the colour rendition index (R a or CRI), or the lower the<br />
colour rendition group number, the better the colour rendition.<br />
Colour rendering group R a<br />
1A 90-100<br />
1B 80-89<br />
2 60-79<br />
3 40-59<br />
4 20-39<br />
-
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Burning position<br />
Certain lamps only permit a restricted selection of mounting<br />
orientations for correct operation. Manufacturers specify these<br />
permitted burning positions for their lamps. For example for<br />
some metal halide lamps only certain burning positions are<br />
allowed to prevent unstable operating conditions, whilst<br />
compact fluorescent lamps may generally be mounted in any<br />
orientation (although luminous flux output may vary with burning<br />
position).<br />
Dimming capability<br />
Incandescent, tungsten halogen, fluorescent and compact<br />
fluorescent lamps may all be dimmed over almost any range.<br />
The output of high-pressure sodium and mercury vapour lamps<br />
may be varied, but in a more limited fashion and generally only<br />
by discrete levels. Metal halide lamps are not approved for<br />
dimming by most manufacturers due to the effect this may have<br />
on light quality and lamp life.<br />
Warm-up time<br />
Many lamps need between 30 seconds and several minutes to<br />
warm up and output their full luminous flux. These include highpressure<br />
discharge lamps and fluorescent lamps.<br />
Re-start time<br />
When high-pressure discharge lamps (also known as highintensity<br />
discharge lamps or H.I.D. lamps) are turned off they<br />
need to cool down for several minutes before they can be<br />
started again. This has implications in applications where after<br />
a dip in the power supply instant re-strike is required.<br />
Lamp power<br />
The electrical power consumed by the lamp, as opposed to the<br />
electrical power consumed by a system consisting of lamp and<br />
control gear.<br />
Luminous flux maintenance<br />
As a lamp ages through life the peak luminous flux output by<br />
the lamp decreases due to deterioration in the performance<br />
of the lamp chemicals and in the physical lamp structure.<br />
Manufacturers produce lumen maintenance curves for their<br />
lamps showing how the luminous flux depreciates over time.<br />
194 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
9.2 Tungsten halogen lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
For mains or low-voltage operation<br />
Longer rated life and higher luminous efficacy than<br />
incandescent lamps<br />
Easy to dim<br />
Brilliant light<br />
Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise<br />
direction of light (but do require a transformer)<br />
Excellent colour rendition<br />
Key application areas<br />
Retail and domestic<br />
Restaurants and catering<br />
How they work<br />
Current flows through a filament and heats it up, just as<br />
in incandescent lamps. These lamps therefore generate a<br />
relatively large amount of heat. The halogen cycle increases<br />
the efficiency and extends the rated life compared with<br />
traditional incandescent lamps. (The halogen cycle is a<br />
chemical mechanism that causes tungsten that evaporates<br />
from the filament during operation to be deposited back onto<br />
the filament, thereby reducing blackening of the bulb wall.<br />
Chemicals used in the halogen cycle also slow down the rate<br />
of diffusion of filament material, thereby increasing the filament<br />
life, which is the principal failure mechanism)<br />
9.3 Fluorescent lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
High to very high luminous efficacy<br />
Good to excellent colour rendition<br />
Long rated life<br />
Extensive range of types<br />
Dimmable<br />
Key application areas<br />
Extensively used in most application areas<br />
How they work<br />
An alternating electric field generates UV radiation (which is<br />
in itself invisible to the human eye) between the two electrodes<br />
in the discharge tube. This UV radiation is converted into<br />
Fig 9.2 Tungsten halogen lamps<br />
Fig 9.3 Fluorescent lamps<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 195
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
visible light in the phosphor coating on the tube wall. The<br />
colour rendering and colour temperature attributes of the light<br />
produced depend upon the chemical composition of the<br />
phosphors. The lamp needs a starting aid and a current limiting<br />
device, which may be combined in an electronic ballast. The<br />
luminous flux is highly dependent on the ambient temperature<br />
around the lamp.<br />
Application notes<br />
T16 fluorescent lamps differ from T26 versions in several<br />
characteristics that the user should be particularly aware of.<br />
1. Luminous flux vs. temperature curve<br />
As with all fluorescent lamps, the luminous flux produced<br />
by the lamp is temperature dependant. An optimum<br />
ambient temperature exists for which the light output is a<br />
maximum, and the light output decreases as the ambient<br />
temperature moves away from this optimum. Both the<br />
T16 and T26 lamps have the same basic shaped curve,<br />
however the optimum temperature for a T16 is 35°C,<br />
whereas the optimum temperature for a T26 lamp is<br />
25°C. The reason for this is that the lamp cool spot for a<br />
T16 lamp is at the end of the tube with the manufacturers<br />
label printed on it, whereas the cool spot for a T26 lamp<br />
is in the centre of the tube.<br />
One effect of this differing optimum temperature is that<br />
the rated luminous flux quoted by manufacturers is at a<br />
standard temperature of 25°C. For the T16 lamp the<br />
maximum value of flux lies above this value, and therefore<br />
the luminaire light output ratio (LOR) may have levels<br />
greater than 100%.<br />
110<br />
100<br />
90<br />
80<br />
T16<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
T26<br />
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55<br />
Ambient temperature ˚C<br />
Relative luminous flux %<br />
Fig. 9.4 Curves relating luminous flux to ambient temperature for T16 and T26<br />
linear fluorescent lamps<br />
196 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
2. Lamp Orientation<br />
Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being<br />
identical in design it matters how one or more lamps<br />
are fitted in the luminaires, In general, lamp ends should<br />
always have the same orientation (so that the lamp labels<br />
should be at the same lamp ends for all luminaires). In<br />
cold environments it could be a benefit to lamp output to<br />
have the lamp labels at opposite ends to aid heating of<br />
the lamp cold spot.<br />
3. Ageing/burning in<br />
Brand new lamps stabilise during the initial aging phase.<br />
This is the period immediately after the lamps are switched<br />
on for the first time, when the initially encapsulated<br />
mercury is vaporised and evenly distributed throughout<br />
the lamp. Unstabilised lamps may differ in brightness and<br />
light colour, and may exhibit flickering at low dimming<br />
levels. To ensure perfect operation a period of two to four<br />
days of operation without switching or dimming should be<br />
allowed, particularly in installation which allow dimming.<br />
One should also wait for proper ageing before assessing<br />
an installation for illuminance levels and light quality.<br />
T16 T26<br />
Rated<br />
Rated<br />
Length Power luminous Length Power luminous<br />
flux (25°C)<br />
flux (25°C)<br />
549mm 14W 1200lm 590mm 18W 1350lm<br />
24W 1750lm<br />
849mm 21W 1900lm 895mm 30W 2350lm<br />
39W 3100lm<br />
1149mm 28W 2600lm 1200mm 36W 3350lm<br />
54W 4450lm<br />
1449mm 35W 3300lm 1500mm 58W 5200lm<br />
49W 4300lm<br />
80W 6150lm<br />
Table 9.2 Summary of selected lamps<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 197
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
9.4 Compact fluorescent lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
Compact designs<br />
High luminous efficacy<br />
Excellent colour rendition<br />
Extensive range of types<br />
Dimmable<br />
Key application areas<br />
Commercial<br />
Domestic, hotels and many exteriors<br />
How they work<br />
These lamps are compact versions of the linear or circular<br />
fluorescent lamps and operate in a very similar way. The<br />
luminous flux depends upon the burning position and ambient<br />
temperature around the lamp.<br />
Application notes<br />
1. Amalgam lamps<br />
The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux<br />
of traditional and compact fluorescent lamps can be<br />
compensated by adding amalgam that helps to trap<br />
mercury and slow its release. This helps to check the steep<br />
drop-off of luminous flux at higher or lower temperatures<br />
so that at least 90% of the maximum luminous flux is<br />
achieved over a wide temperature range, typically about<br />
+5 to +70°C. Above and below this range however, the<br />
light level still falls off sharply. Note that amalgam lamps<br />
are comparatively slow to run-up and should not be used<br />
for emergency lighting of dangerous workplaces (100%<br />
luminous flux required after 0.5 seconds). Amalgam<br />
lamps are also unsuitable for installations with high quality<br />
dimming requirements since lamps may not dim uniformly.<br />
2. Lamp orientation<br />
The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly<br />
dependant upon the burning position. Ensuring the lamps<br />
are correctly inserted can therefore optimise the light output<br />
ratio. Standard types of lamp have a cool spot in the<br />
exposed lamp bend, so that self-heating and convection<br />
may lead to a temperature rise here. (In amalgam lamps<br />
the cool spot lies in the base). In compact luminaires with<br />
198 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Fig. 9.5 Compact fluorescent lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
horizontal lamp arrangement, such as downlights, it is<br />
therefore recommended to fit the lamps with electrodes<br />
uppermost wherever possible. Since the lamp end does<br />
not allow consistent identification of the electrode position,<br />
that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not connected<br />
should be placed uppermost – these are the two tube ends<br />
containing the internal electrodes.<br />
9.5 Metal halide lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
High luminous efficacy<br />
Good to excellent colour rendition<br />
High colour stability for ceramic discharge-tube lamps<br />
Limited dimming. Some manufacturers advise no dimming<br />
of this lamp<br />
Key application areas<br />
Industrial<br />
Spotlighting<br />
Floodlighting<br />
Retail areas<br />
How they work<br />
In metal halide lamps a highly compact electric arc is produced<br />
in a discharge tube. The composition of the chemicals in<br />
the tube determines the quality of light produced. An ignitor<br />
is needed to switch on the lamp, and the current must be<br />
controlled by a ballast. The use of ceramic discharge tubes<br />
further improves the lamp properties.<br />
Application notes<br />
1. Ballasts<br />
The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range<br />
of operating principles, resulting in different electrical<br />
operating values. Some lamps are therefore approved for<br />
operation with both ballasts for metal halide lamps and<br />
with ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps. The<br />
higher operating current then leads to higher luminous flux<br />
levels for the same lamps, together with slightly altered<br />
light quality. In both cases suitable ignitors are required.<br />
Fig. 9.6 Metal halide lamps<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 199
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
2. Ignitors<br />
An ignitor is a starting device that generates voltage pulses<br />
to start a discharge lamp. A basic ignitor will do this until<br />
the lamp strikes, which means that if there is a problem<br />
with the lamp or circuit that prevents the lamp starting the<br />
ignitor will continue to try to start the lamp until the circuit<br />
is turned off or potentially the ballast is damaged. Modern<br />
ignitors therefore normally incorporate anti-cycling control<br />
that can sense the normal end-of–life mode of a lamp<br />
and disables the ignitor. This normally happens after the<br />
ignitor has tried to start the lamp a few times, and for<br />
metal halide lamps this is generally after approximately 15<br />
minutes. (For high pressure sodium lamps this will be after<br />
approximately 5 minutes).<br />
3. Glass covers<br />
In general metal halide lamps require a glass cover to<br />
protect people and property in the event of the lamp<br />
exploding. It is the manufacturers responsibility to decide<br />
whether to permit individual lamp types to be used in<br />
uncovered luminaires. Suitable safety devices are installed<br />
in the lamps for this purpose (e.g. integral safety tube,<br />
outer protective coating). The detailed information from the<br />
manufacturer must be observed without fail.<br />
4. Rated life characteristics<br />
The average rated lamp life and the reduction in luminous<br />
flux with age can vary markedly between lamp types.<br />
They also depend on the switching frequency and the<br />
position of use. Detailed data from the manufacturer<br />
should be used to determine suitable maintenance factors<br />
for the operation of the lamp (lamp survival factor and<br />
lamp luminous flux maintenance factor).<br />
9.6 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
High luminous efficacy and long rated life<br />
Satisfactory to poor colour rendition<br />
Can be dimmed in discrete steps<br />
Colour improved sodium lamp - Good colour rendition<br />
Warm light<br />
200 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Fig. 9.7 Sodium vapour high pressure lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Key application areas<br />
Industrial<br />
Street lighting<br />
Colour improved sodium lamp - Retail areas<br />
How they work<br />
The discharge in the linearly extended ceramic discharge tube<br />
is defined by sodium, so the light is yellowish and only suitable<br />
for certain applications although colour improved versions of<br />
the lamp do exist, An ignitor is needed to switch on the lamp<br />
(although some lamps have a built-in ignitor and do not need<br />
any external starting aids), and the current must be controlled<br />
by a ballast.<br />
Note, sodium vapour low pressure lamps generate poor quality<br />
yellow light with extreme high efficacy. They are often used for<br />
street lighting.<br />
9.7 Mercury vapour lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
No starter required, just a ballast<br />
Satisfactory to poor colour rendition<br />
Can be dimmed in discrete steps<br />
Low efficacy<br />
Key application areas<br />
Industrial<br />
Street lighting<br />
Walkways<br />
How they work<br />
The almost obsolete high-pressure mercury lamp is actually<br />
the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp, although it<br />
provides poorer colour rendering and efficacy. The lamps can<br />
be started at mains voltage, and so only need a ballast to limit<br />
the current.<br />
Fig. 9.8 Mercury vapour lamps<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 201
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
9.8 Induction lamps<br />
Key attributes<br />
Rotationally symmetrical light distribution<br />
Long rated life<br />
Not dimmable<br />
Key application areas<br />
Areas where it is difficult to replace lamps<br />
Commercial and industrial interiors<br />
Retail<br />
Indoor and outdoor public areas<br />
How they work<br />
A very high-frequency electromagnetic field is coupled into<br />
the glass bulb using an antenna protruding into the bulb. This<br />
field excites the mercury to produce UV radiation that is then<br />
converted into visible light using phosphors, just as in fluorescent<br />
lamps. The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes<br />
their luminous flux only very slightly temperature dependant. The<br />
lamps can only be operated with special electronic ballasts and<br />
have a built in microwave screen. Systems have a very long<br />
service life due to the absence of any electrodes, however the<br />
effects of lumen depreciation should still be considered. As yet<br />
there are no dimmable electronic ballasts available.<br />
9.9 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)<br />
Key Attributes<br />
Good luminous efficacy<br />
Long service life<br />
Low voltage<br />
Durable<br />
Emit very little heat<br />
Small dimensions<br />
Key application areas<br />
Exterior signage, display and directional lighting<br />
Dynamic colour effects<br />
How they work<br />
An LED is a small solid-state semiconductor device that emits<br />
light when an electric current passes through it. The LED consists<br />
of a diode chip that is encased in an epoxy, plastic, resin<br />
202 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Fig. 9.9 Induction lamp<br />
Fig. 9.10 LED
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
or ceramic housing. This LED housing may be in a variety of<br />
shapes and sizes and helps determine the optical characteristics<br />
of the LED. Generally a second optical controller is used in the<br />
form of a lens mounted on the epoxy housing, and the overall<br />
characteristics of the system, from the shape and size of the LED<br />
to the configuration of the lens and distance from the diode chip<br />
to the lens define the final optical performance of the system.<br />
As well as the optical control of the system, designing using<br />
LEDs requires careful control of heat removal from the package.<br />
Whilst the ratio of light to heat produced by LEDs is much<br />
higher than for an incandescent light source (such as a GLS<br />
light bulb) they do still produce a significant amount of heat.<br />
This heat must be removed from the LED using heat sinking, as<br />
LEDs are very sensitive to the junction temperature of the internal<br />
diode, and excess heat will shorten the life of the LED or cause<br />
failure.<br />
Finally to operate LEDs requires a regulated direct current<br />
supply, usually supplied by a self-contained “driver” which<br />
converts the AC mains electricity to the correct DC voltage. This<br />
driver must be correctly matched to the LED it is powering as<br />
incorrect voltage and current will at best provide poor light, and<br />
may severely reduce the life of the LED or cause instantaneous<br />
failure of the system. The driver must also protect the LED<br />
system from voltage fluctuations that may cause damage. The<br />
driver can provide a quite advanced level of control, allowing<br />
dimming down to 0%, and with a cluster of different coloured<br />
diodes and the use of technology such as DMX protocols linked<br />
to a light mixing console extremely complex lighting effects may<br />
be produced.<br />
LEDs have reasonable electrical efficiency in terms of lumens<br />
per watt (i.e. the power input to the driver compared with the<br />
light produced by the LEDs) and they are improving all the time<br />
but currently they do not compare with the high values from<br />
discharge lamp technology.<br />
So the LED is not a true lamp, generally being supplied as a<br />
complete electrical and optical system, which is then embodied<br />
into a housing.<br />
Cathode pin<br />
Heat<br />
–<br />
LED chip<br />
Copper cladding<br />
Fig. 9.11 Structure of an LED<br />
+<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 203
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
The light produced by an LED is monochromatic and the<br />
colour of the emitted light depends on the material used in the<br />
fabrication of the LED and varies from red through orange,<br />
yellow, green and blue. To produce white light a variety of<br />
methods are used. The best method in terms of quality of the<br />
spectrum of light is produced using a blue LED with a yellowish<br />
phosphor coating, in principal similar to a fluorescent lamp.<br />
This is termed a phosphor down conversion. The use of a<br />
phosphor does, however, decrease the efficiency of the system.<br />
LED packages may also be configured to produce mixed or<br />
blended light, either through the use of three or more different<br />
coloured LEDs (such as a mixture of red, yellow, green and<br />
blue) or through a multicolour LED that incorporates two or<br />
more different colour chips within the same epoxy package.<br />
These blended systems whilst suitable for lighting within the<br />
entertainment industry or in colour changing applications should<br />
be used with caution in the wider lighting environment as while<br />
they may visually produce white light the actual spectrum of<br />
the light is still three or more monochromatic peaks of light and<br />
therefore accuracy of colour rendering can be poor.<br />
An additional consideration is that the process for producing<br />
LEDs cannot accurately reproduce LEDs with identical colour<br />
appearances, especially for white LEDs. If a random set of<br />
LEDs was taken which were all nominally white they would<br />
have differing appearances. To overcome this a process called<br />
binning is used, in which the LEDs are sorted into groups of<br />
similar colour appearance. The accuracy of the colour match<br />
depends upon the bin size, a larger bin size will contain a<br />
wider spread of colour appearance than a smaller bin size.<br />
However, decreasing the bin size increases manufacturing<br />
and LED costs. When using groups of LEDs or LED luminaires<br />
it is essential that the LEDs come from the same bin to give a<br />
consistent appearance.<br />
When buying LEDs, either as a component to insert into a<br />
fixture or as a complete luminaire the LEDs may be supplied<br />
in various configurations, varying from individual LEDs to<br />
clustered or linear formats. They may also be supplied with or<br />
without a secondary lens. This gives flexibility in application,<br />
the configuration being chosen to suit the fixture it is to be used<br />
within.<br />
204 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Phosphor<br />
downconversion<br />
Colour<br />
mixing<br />
RYGB white<br />
RYGB white<br />
RYG(B)<br />
Phosphers<br />
Blue or UV<br />
LED<br />
Fig. 9.12 White LED using phosphor coating<br />
Mixing<br />
optics<br />
RYGB<br />
LEDs<br />
Fig. 9.13 White LED using colour blending
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
A benefit of LED technology is the relatively long life of the<br />
systems, manufacturers quote upwards of 50,000 hours life<br />
for LEDs, but other factors should be considered. Whilst an<br />
LED may produce light for a long period the amount of light<br />
produced will deteriorate over time. Therefore, and especially<br />
in critical applications such as emergency lighting, care should<br />
be taken to ensure that there is still sufficient light output at<br />
end of life. This depreciation of light output is mainly due to<br />
discoloration of the epoxy housing of the LED over time. Lumen<br />
depreciation and LED life varies between manufacturers, and<br />
even between colours of LEDs so manufacturers data should be<br />
consulted.<br />
So how is an LED luminaire used? A major advantage of LEDs<br />
is their small size and long life. This makes them ideal for effects<br />
lighting where hidden lights are used to create an atmosphere<br />
in a space. Additionally, LEDs are already used extensively in<br />
signage and signaling, and in the entertainment industry. The<br />
use of LEDs in emergency lighting is becoming more common, Fig. 9.14 Examples of LED package<br />
and LED luminaires are good for providing guidance and<br />
Fig . 8.14 Examples configurations of LED packa ge<br />
emphasis due to their small size and availability in many colours<br />
configura tions<br />
of light. Impressive applications of LEDs may be seen, including<br />
domestic residences, retail and social environments, and in the<br />
exterior lighting of buildings. Additionally as the light produced<br />
by an LED is “cold” it has major benefits in applications such<br />
as museums where heat produced by the lighting of an artifact<br />
may cause significant damage to that artifact. However, a<br />
limitation of LEDs for this type of lighting is their monochromatic<br />
nature, except for phosphor white LEDs.<br />
At the moment the technology is not suitably advanced to<br />
allow extensive use in the general lighting environment or more<br />
specialized applications such as streetlighting or floodlighting,<br />
but with future developments this may come.<br />
Fig. 9.15 An example of an LED system<br />
integrated with building architecture<br />
Fig . 8.15 An exampl e of an LED<br />
syst em in tegra ted with buil ding<br />
arch itecture<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 205
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
9.10 Lamp coding systems – LBS/ILCOS<br />
ILCOS lamp code<br />
To support the worldwide identification of compatible lamp<br />
types the IEC has produced a generic lamp coding system<br />
standard, called the International Lamp Coding System or<br />
ILCOS, published in 1993 as IEC TS 61231. The system is<br />
directly linked to the IEC standard for specific lamps. The lamp<br />
standard has data sheets that are identified by the ILCOS code.<br />
ILCOS offers a short code “ILCOS L” that can be expanded, in<br />
code, to cover several features of the lamp. The standard code<br />
“ILCOS D” gives the complete designation of the lamp. All lamp<br />
manufacturers made a direct link between their private brand<br />
code and the ILCOS system. The responsibility for maintaining<br />
the ILCOS system is with the IEC lamp technical committee.<br />
LBS lamp code system<br />
In 1994 the Zentralverband Elektrotechnik und<br />
Elecktronikindustrie, better known as ZVEI, the Industry<br />
Federation in Germany, produced a lamp coding system called<br />
Lampenbezeichnungssystem or LBS for short. The codes are<br />
widely used by luminaire makers and clients in Europe. The<br />
system is of simple codes and has short descriptions and is<br />
maintained by ZVEI, but it is not supported by all lamp-makers<br />
or by international standards.<br />
A selection of ILCOS and equivalent LBS codes with their<br />
meanings are given in Table 9.3.<br />
206 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Fig. Fig 9.16 . 8.16 LED LED lighting lighting providing provi a distinctive ding a<br />
distinctive atmosphere atmosp to here a space to a space<br />
Fig. 9.17 An LED ground recessed luminaire
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Description<br />
A IA General purpose incandescent lamp<br />
R IRR Reflector lamps<br />
QT HSG Halogen incandescent lamps<br />
QT-DE HDG Halogen incandescent lamps, linear double-ended<br />
QPAR HA Halogen incandescent lamps for mains voltage with reflector<br />
QR HAG / HMG Low voltage halogen incandescent lamps with reflector<br />
QR-CBC HRG Low voltage halogen incandescent lamp with dichroic reflector and glass cover<br />
T16 FDH Fluorescent lamps Ø16mm<br />
T26 FD Fluorescent lamps Ø26mm<br />
T16-R FSC Circular fluorescent lamps Ø16mm<br />
TC-S FSD Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube)<br />
TC-SEL FSDH Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) for electronic ballast up to 80W<br />
TC-L FSD Compact fluorescent lamps (1 tube) up to 36W<br />
TC-D FSQ Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes)<br />
TC-DEL FSQH Compact fluorescent lamps (2 tubes) for electronic ballast<br />
TC-T FSM Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) up to 36W<br />
TC-TEL FSMH Compact fluorescent lamps (3 tubes) for electronic ballast up to 120W<br />
TC-DD FSS Compact fluorescent lamps (double D)<br />
LMG-lHf FSS Induction lamps (Philips QL type)<br />
HIT-DE MD Double ended tubular metal halide lamp<br />
HIT-DE-CE MT Double ended tubular metal halide lamp with ceramic burner<br />
HIT MT Single ended tubular metal halide lamp<br />
HIE ME Single ended elliptical metal halide lamp<br />
HIE-CE ME Single ended elliptical metal halide lamp with ceramic burner<br />
HME QE High pressure mercury discharge lamp<br />
HSE SE Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp<br />
HSE-I SE/I Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp with internal ignitor<br />
HST ST Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp<br />
HSE-MF SE Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp, increased light output<br />
(MF = more luminous flux)<br />
HST-MF ST Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp, increased light output<br />
(MF = more luminous flux)<br />
HSE-CRI SEM Single ended elliptical high pressure sodium lamp improved colour rendering<br />
(Philips SON Comfort Pro type)<br />
HST-CRI STH Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp improved colour rendering<br />
(Philips SON-T Comfort Pro type)<br />
HST STH Single ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp with high colour rendering<br />
(e.g. Philips SDW-T, Iwasaki NHT-SDX)<br />
HST-DE SD Double ended tubular high pressure sodium lamp<br />
LST LS Single ended tubular low pressure sodium lamp<br />
Table 9.3 Selection of LBS and ILCOS lamp coding systems<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 207
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
Fluorescent lamps<br />
Linear fluorescent, standard - halophosphate (other colour temperatures available)<br />
150mm T16 FD T5 (T16) G5 White,White(23),White TL 37.5 4 3500 3 5000 150 -<br />
300mm T16 FD T5 (T16) G5 White,White(23),White TL 50 8 3500 3 5000 400 -<br />
530mm T16 FD T5 (T16) G5 White,White(23),White TL 65.4 13 3500 3 5000 850 -<br />
450mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Warm White,Warm 63.3 15 2950 3 9000 950 -<br />
White(30),Warm White<br />
TLD<br />
1500mm T38 FD T12 (T38) G13 White 76.9/62.5 65/80 3450 3 9000 5000 -<br />
Linear fluorescent, Tri-phosphor (other colour temperatures available, especially 6500K)<br />
550mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 85.7 14 2700 - 1B 20000 1200 -<br />
4000<br />
850mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 90.5 21 2700 - 1B 20000 1900 -<br />
4000<br />
1150mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 92.9 28 2700 - 1B 20000 2600 -<br />
4000<br />
1450mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FH,TL5 HE 94.3 35 2700 - 1B 20000 3300 -<br />
4000<br />
550mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 72.9 24 2700 - 1B/1A 20000 1750 -<br />
HO<br />
4000<br />
T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Lumilux FQ,TL5 HO 66.7 24 6000 1B 20000 1600 -<br />
850mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 79.5 39 2700 - 1B 20000 3100 -<br />
HO<br />
4000<br />
T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Lumilux FQ,TL5 HO 73.1 39 6000 1B 20000 2850 -<br />
1450mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 87.8 49 2700 - 1B/1A 20000 4300 -<br />
HO<br />
4000<br />
1150mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 82.4 54 2700 - 1B/1A 20000 4450 -<br />
HO<br />
4000<br />
1150mm T16 FDH T5 (T16) G5 Starcoat,Lumilux FQ,TL5 76.9 80 2700 - 1B 20000 6150 -<br />
HO<br />
4000<br />
600mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux 75.0 18 4000 1B 15000 1350 -<br />
L840,Super 80/840<br />
1050mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux 830,Super 86.8 38 3000 1B 12000 3300 -<br />
80/830<br />
1200mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux 93.1 36 4000 1B 15000 3350 -<br />
L840,Super 80/840<br />
1500mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XLR 840,Lumilux 89.7 58 4000 1B 15000 5200 -<br />
L840,Super 80/840<br />
1800mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux XRL 840,Lumilux 88.6 70 4000 1B 15000 6200 -<br />
L840,Super 80/840<br />
208 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
2400mm T38 FD T12 (T38) G13 Polylux 840 94.0 100 4000 1B 12000 9400 -<br />
Linear fluorescent, Multi-phosphor (other colour temperatures available)<br />
600mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de 55.6 18 4000 1A 12000 1000 -<br />
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940<br />
1200mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de 65.3 36 4000 1A 12000 2350 -<br />
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940<br />
1500mm T26 FD T8 (T26) G13 Polylux Dlx 940,Lumilux de 64.7 58 4000 1A 12000 3750 -<br />
Luxe 940,90 deluxe/940<br />
Circular fluorescent lamps<br />
T16-R FSCH T5-C 2GX13 FC,TL5C 81.8 22 2700 - 1B 16000 1800 -<br />
(T16-R)<br />
4000<br />
T16-R FSCH T5-C 2GX13 FC,TL5C 82.5 40 2700 - 1B 16000 3300 -<br />
(T16-R)<br />
4000<br />
T16-R FSCH T5-C 2GX13 FC,TL5C 81.8 55 3000 - 1B 16000 4500 -<br />
(T16-R)<br />
4000<br />
Compact fluorescent lamps (other colour temperatures available)<br />
TC-EL FBT - E27 Dulux EL Integral gear 57.1 7 2700 1B 10000 400 -<br />
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 50.0 5 3500 1B 10000 250 -<br />
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 57.1 7 3500 1B 10000 400 -<br />
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 66.7 9 3500 1B 10000 600 -<br />
TC-S FSD 2L 2-pin G23 Biax S,Dulux S,PL-S/2p 81.8 11 3500 1B 10000 900 -<br />
TC-SEL FSD 2L 4-pin 2G7 Biax S/E,Dulux S/E,PL- 66.7 9 4000 1B 10000 600 -<br />
S/4p<br />
TC-SEL FSD 2L 4-pin 2G7 Biax S/E,Dulux S/E,PL- 81.8 11 4000 1B 10000 900 -<br />
S/4p<br />
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 69.4 18 3500 1B 10000 1250 -<br />
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 75.0 24 3500 1B 10000 1800 -<br />
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L 82.4 34 3500 1B 10000 2800 -<br />
TC-L FSD 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 80.6 36 3500 1B 10000 2900 -<br />
TC-L FSDH 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 87.5 40 3500 1B 10000 3500 -<br />
TC-L FSDH 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax L,Dulux L,PL-L 88.2 55 3500 1B 10000 4850 -<br />
TC-L FSDH 2L 4-pin 2G11 Biax HLBX,Dulux L,PL-L 75.0 80 3000 1B 12000 6000<br />
TC-DD FSS 2D 2-pin GR8 Biax 2D,CFL Square 65.6 16 3500 1B 10000 1050 -<br />
TC-DD FSS 2D 2-pin GR8 Biax 2D,CFL Square 73.2 28 3500 1B 10000 2050 -<br />
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E,CFL Square 65.6 16 3500 1B 10000 1050 -<br />
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E 64.3 21 3500 1B 10000 1350 -<br />
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E,CFL Square 73.2 28 3500 1B 10000 2050 -<br />
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E,CFL Square 75.0 38 3500 1B 10000 2850 -<br />
TC-DDEL FSS 2D 4-pin GR10 Biax 2D/E 70.9 55 3500 1B 10000 3900 -<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 209
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-1 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 60.0 10 3500 1B 10000 600 -<br />
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-1 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 60.0 10 3500 1B 12000 600 -<br />
C/4p<br />
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-1 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 69.2 13 3500 1B 10000 900 -<br />
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-1 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 69.2 13 3500 1B 12000 900 -<br />
C/4p<br />
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-2 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 66.7 18 3500 1B 10000 1200 -<br />
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-2 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 66.7 18 3500 1B 12000 1200 -<br />
C/4p<br />
TC-D FSQ 4L 2-pin G24d-3 Biax D,Dulux D,PL-C/2p 69.2 26 3500 1B 10000 1800 -<br />
TC-DEL FSQ 4L 4-pin G24q-3 Biax D/E,Dulux D/E,PL- 69.2 26 3500 1B 12000 1800 -<br />
C/4p<br />
TC-F FSS Flat 4L4-pin 2G10 Dulux F 77.8 36 3500 1B 10000 2800 -<br />
TC-T FSM 6L 2-pin GX24d-1 Biax T,Dulux T Plus 68.5 13 3500 1B 10000 890 -<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-1 Biax T/E amalgam,Dulux 68.5 13 3500 1B 12000 890 -<br />
T/E Plus<br />
TC-T FSM 6L 2-pin GX24d-2 Biax T,Dulux T Plus,PL-T/2p 63.9 18 3500 1B 10000 1150 -<br />
amalgam<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-2 Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN 63.9 18 3500 1B 12000 1150 -<br />
amalgam<br />
Plus,PL-T/4p<br />
TC-T FSM 6L 2-pin GX24d-3 Biax T,Dulux T,PL-T/2p 65.8 26 3500 1B 10000 1710 -<br />
amalgam<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-3 Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN 65.8 26 3500 1B 12000 1710 -<br />
amalgam<br />
Plus,PL-T/4p<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-3 Biax T/E,Dulux T/E IN 68.8 32 3500 1B 12000 2200 -<br />
amalgam<br />
Plus,PL-T/4p<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-4 Dulux T/E IN Plus,PL-T/4p 76.2 42 3500 1B 10000 3200 -<br />
amalgam<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-5 Dulux T/E IN Plus 75.4 57 3000 1B 10000 4300 -<br />
amalgam<br />
TC-TEL FSM 6L 4-pin GX24q-6 Dulux T/E IN Plus 74.3 70 4000 1B 10000 5200 -<br />
amalgam<br />
TC-TELI FSM 8L 4-pin 2G8-1 PL-H 66.7 60 3000 1B 20000 4000 -<br />
TC-TELI FSM 8L 4-pin 2G8-1 PL-H 70.6 85 3000 1B 20000 6000 -<br />
TC-TELI FSM 8L 4-pin 2G8-1 Dulux HO Constant,PL-H 75.0 120 3000 1B 20000 9000 -<br />
210 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
35 3000 1B 6000+ - 30000<br />
Metal halide discharge lamps<br />
Reflector-ceramic<br />
HIR 35/10° MR - GX8.5 Powerball HCI-<br />
R111,CDM-R 111
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
HIR 35/24° MR - GX8.5 Powerball HCI-<br />
35 3000 1B 6000+ - 8500<br />
R111,CDM-R 111<br />
HIR 35/45° MR - GX8.5 Powerball HCI-R111<br />
35 3000 1B 6000+ - -<br />
(40°),CDM-R 111<br />
HI-PAR 20/10° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-<br />
35 3000 1B 6000 - 23000<br />
PAR,CDM-R PAR20<br />
HI-PAR 20/30° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-<br />
35 3000 1B 6000 - 5000<br />
PAR,CDM-R PAR20<br />
HI-PAR 30/10° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-<br />
70 3000 1B 6000 - 68000<br />
PAR,CDM-R PAR30<br />
HI-PAR 30/40° MR - E27 CMH-PAR,Powerball HCI-<br />
70 3000 1B 6000 - 10000<br />
PAR,CDM-R PAR30<br />
Double ended compact (choice of colour 3000 - 5400K)<br />
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD RX7s Arcstream,Powerstar HQI- 78.6 70 4200 1B 6000 5500 -<br />
TS,MH(N)-TD<br />
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD RX7s Arcstream,Powerstar HQI- 80.0 150 4200 1B 6000 12000 -<br />
TS,MH(N)-TD<br />
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD Fc2 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI- 80.0 250 4000 1B 6000 20000 -<br />
TS,MHN-TD<br />
HIT-DE MD - Fc2 Powerstar HQI-TS/D 80.0 250 5100 1A 6000 20000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBI-TD Fc2 Powerstar HQI-TS 90.0 400 5400 1A 15000 36000 -<br />
Double ended compact - ceramic (choice of colour 3000 - 4200K)<br />
HIT-DE-CE MD MBI-TD RX7s CMH-TD,Powerball HCI- 100.0 70 3000 1B 15000 7000 -<br />
TS,Mastercolour CDM-TD<br />
HIT-DE-CE MD MBI-TD RX7s CMH-TD,Powerball HCI- 96.7 150 3000 1B 15000 14500 -<br />
TS,Mastercolour CDM-TD<br />
Single ended compact (choice of colour 2600 - 4200K)<br />
HIT MT MBI-T G12 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T 74.3 70 4200 1B 6000 5200 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T G12 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T 80.0 150 4200 1B 6000 12000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T GY9.5 MSD 67.5 200 5900 1B 2000 13500 -<br />
HIT MT - PGZ 12 CosmoWhite 114.2 60 2800 2 12000 6850 -<br />
HIT MT - PGZ 12 CosmoWhite 117.9 140 2800 2 12000 16500 -<br />
Single ended compact - ceramic<br />
HIT-TC-CE MT - G8.5 CMH-TC,Powerball HCI-TC 85.0 20 3000 1B 9000 1700 -<br />
HIT-TC-CE MT MBI-T G8.5 CMH-TC,Powerball HCI- 97.1 35 3000 1B 10000 3400 -<br />
TC,Mastercolour CDM-TC<br />
HIT-TC-CE MT MBI-T G8.5 CMH-TC,Powerball HCI- 88.6 70 3000 1B 9000 6200 -<br />
TC,Mastercolour CDM-TC<br />
HIT-TC-CE MT - PGJ5 Mastercolour CDM-TM 75.0 20 3000 1B 9000 1500 -<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 211
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
HIT-CE MT - PG12-2 Mastercolour CDM-TP 85.7 70 3000 1B - 6000 -<br />
HIT-CE MT - PGX12-2 Mastercolour CDM-TP 86.7 150 3000 1B - 13000 -<br />
HIT-CE MT MBI-T G12 CMH-T,Powerball HCI- 97.1 35 3000 1B 10000 3400 -<br />
T,Mastercolour CDM-T<br />
HIT-CE MT MBI-T G12 CMH-T,Powerball HCI- 91.4 70 3000 1B 15000 6400 -<br />
T,Mastercolour CDM-T<br />
HIT-CE MT MBI-T G12 CMH-T,Powerball HCI- 93.3 150 3000 1B 12000 14000 -<br />
T,Mastercolour CDM-T<br />
HIT-CE MT - G12 Powerball HCI-T,CDM- 86.0 150 4200 1A 9000 12900 -<br />
SA/T<br />
HIT-CE MT - G12 Mastercolour CDM-T 92.0 250 3000 1B 9000 23000<br />
Elliptical coated (ceramic versions also available)<br />
HIE ME MBIF E27 Powerstar HQI-E 70.0 70 3800 1B 9000 4900 -<br />
HIE ME MBIF E27 Arcstream 85.0 100 3200 2 15000 8500 -<br />
HIE ME MBIF E40 Arcstream 78.0 250 4000 2 12000 19500 -<br />
HIE ME - E40 Powerstar HQI-E 76.0 250 5200 1A 19000 -<br />
HIE ME HIE E40 WhiteLux 82.0 250 3700 2 10000 20500 -<br />
HIE ME MBIF E40 Kolorarc 80.0 400 4000 2 14000 32000 -<br />
HIE ME - E40 Powerstar HQI-E 107.5 400 3800 2 43000 -<br />
HIE ME HIE E40 Whitelux 90.0 400 3700 2 20000 36000 -<br />
HIE ME HIE E40 Powerstar HQI-E 110.0 1000 3750 2B 12000 110000 -<br />
Elliptical coated - for enclosed fittings only<br />
HIE ME HIE E40 Whitelux 87.2 250 3700 2 15000 21800 -<br />
HIE ME HIE E40 Whitelux 97.0 400 3700 2 20000 38800 -<br />
Tubular clear (other colour temperatures available)<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E27 Color Arc MT-SDW 71.4 70 4500 1A 6000 5000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E40 Arcstream 84.0 250 4200 2 6000 21000 -<br />
HIT MT - E40 Arcstream,Powerstar 80.0 250 5300 1A - 20000 -<br />
HQI-T/D<br />
HIT MT - E40 HSI/TSX 84.0 250 4000 2 - 21000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E40 Arcstream,Powerstar HQI-T 87.5 400 4200 2 6000 35000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E40 HPI-T+ 76.0 250 4500 2 - 19000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E40 HPI-T+ 87.5 400 4300 2 - 35000 -<br />
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar HQI-T/N 105.0 400 3700 2B - 42000 -<br />
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar HQI-T/N 80.0 400 5200 1A - 32000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E40 HPI-T 85.0 1000 4500 2 - 85000 -<br />
HIT MT MBI-T E40 Powerstar HQI-T 80.0 1000 6000 1A 9000 80000 -<br />
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar T 90.0 2000 6000 1A - 180000 -<br />
212 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
HIT MT - E40 Powerstar T/N 120.0 2000 4000 2B - 240000 -<br />
Tubular clear - ceramic<br />
HIT-CE MT - E27 CMH-TT,Powerball HCI- 91.4 70 3000 1B 12000 6400 -<br />
TT,CDO-TT<br />
HIT-CE MT - E40 CMH-TT,Powerball HCI- 93.3 150 3000 1B 120 14000 -<br />
TT,CDO-TT<br />
Double ended - high wattage<br />
HIT-DE MD - Cable MHN-LA 90.0 1000 5600 1A - 90000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD - Cable MHN-LA 100.0 1000 4200 1B - 100000 -<br />
HIT-DE MN MBIL RX7s Sportlight 80.0 1500 5200 2 6000 120000 -<br />
HIT-DE MN MBIL Cable Sportlight 100.0 2000 5200 2 6000 200000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable MHN-LA 95.0 2000 5600 1A - 190000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable MHN-LA 110.0 2000 4200 1B - 220000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable Powerstar HQI-TS/D/S 100.0 2000 5800 1A 4000 200000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable Powerstar HQI-TS 112.5 2000 4400 2B 8000 225000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable MHN-SB 100.0 2000 5600 1B - 200000 -<br />
HIT-DE MD MBIL Cable Sylvania HSI-TD 100.0 2000 5600 1A 3000 200000 -<br />
Compact metal halide lamps<br />
HIR 6° MR CSI G38 CSI/PAR 64 76.0 1000 4000 2 3500 76000 -<br />
High pressure mercury discharge lamps (colour temperatures vary)<br />
HME QE/R MBF E27 Kolorlux<br />
36.0 50 4000 3 12000 1800 -<br />
Standard,HQL,HPL-N<br />
HME QE/R MBF E27 Kolorlux<br />
47.5 80 4000 3 16000 3800 -<br />
Standard,HQL,HPL-N<br />
HME QE/R MBF E27 Kolorlux<br />
50.4 125 4000 3 20000 6300 -<br />
Standard,HQL,HPL-N<br />
HME QE/R MBF E40 Kolorlux<br />
52.0 250 4000 3 20000 13000 -<br />
Standard,HQL,HPL-N<br />
HME QE/R MBF E40 Kolorlux<br />
56.3 400 4000 3 20000 22500 -<br />
Standard,HQL,HPL-N<br />
HME QE/R MBF E40 Kolorlux Standard,HQI- 57.0 1000 3550 3 29000 57000 -<br />
E,HPL-N<br />
HME QE/R MBFSD E27 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE 40.0 50 3500 3 16000 2000 -<br />
LUXE,HPL Comfort<br />
HME QE/R MBFSD E27 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE 50.0 80 3400 3 16000 4000 -<br />
LUXE,HPL Comfort<br />
HME QE/R MBFSD E27 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE 52.0 125 3350 3 20000 6500 -<br />
LUXE,HPL Comfort<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 213
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
56.0 250 3350 3 24000 14000 -<br />
60.0 400 3400 3 24000 24000 -<br />
HME QE/R MBFSD E40 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE<br />
LUXE,HPL Comfort<br />
HME QE/R MBFSD E40 Kolorlux Deluxe,HQL DE<br />
LUXE,HPL Comfort<br />
High pressure sodium discharge lamps<br />
Standard Tubular and Elliptical<br />
214 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E27 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 66.0 50 2000 4 28500 3300 -<br />
E,50SON-E<br />
HSE-I SE HPS-E-I E27 Lucalox I,NAV-E<br />
68.0 50 2000 4 12000 3400 -<br />
50/1,50SON-I<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E27 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 82.9 70 2000 4 28500 5800 -<br />
E,70SON-E<br />
HSE-I Diffuse SE HPS-E-I E27 Lucalox I,NAV-E<br />
82.9 70 2000 4 12000 5800 -<br />
Diffuse<br />
70/1,70SON-I<br />
HSE-I Clear SC HPS-E-I E27 Lucalox I,70SON-I 85.7 70 2000 4 12000 6000 -<br />
Clear<br />
HST ST HPS-T E27 Lucalox T 68.0 50 2000 4 28500 3400 -<br />
HST ST HPS-T E27 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 85.7 70 2000 4 28500 6000 -<br />
T,70SON-T<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E 92.0 100 2000 4 28500 9200 -<br />
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T 96.0 100 2000 4 28500 9600 -<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E27 Lucalox E-Z,Vialox NAV-E 80.0 110 2000 4 16000 8800 -<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 96.7 150 2000 4 28500 14500 -<br />
E,150SON<br />
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 100.0 150 2000 4 28500 15000 -<br />
T,150SON-T<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 104.0 250 2000 4 28500 26000 -<br />
E,250SON<br />
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 110.0 250 2000 4 28500 27500 -<br />
T,250SON-T<br />
HSE SE HPS-E E40 Lucalox E,Vialox NAV- 118.8 400 2000 4 28500 47500 -<br />
E,400SON<br />
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 125.0 400 2000 4 28500 50000 -<br />
T,400SON-T<br />
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 150.0 600 2000 4 24000 90000 -<br />
T,600SON-T<br />
HST ST HPS-T E40 Lucalox T,Vialox NAV- 130.0 1000 2000 4 24000 130000 -<br />
T,1000SON-T
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
80.0 50 2000 4 28500 4000 -<br />
92.9 70 2000 4 28500 6500 -<br />
100.0 100 2000 4 28500 10000 -<br />
116.7 150 2000 4 28500 17500 -<br />
132.0 250 2000 4 28500 33000 -<br />
141.3 400 2000 4 28500 56500 -<br />
150.0 600 2000 4 28500 90000 -<br />
80.0 150 2200 2 14000 12000 -<br />
Increased light output - Tubular<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E27 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E27 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
HST-MF ST HPS-T(HO) E40 Lucalox HO,Vialox NAV<br />
Super,SON-T PLUS<br />
Improved colour rendering - Tubular and Elliptical<br />
HSE-CRI SE HPS-E(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox<br />
NAV Deluxe, SON<br />
Comfort<br />
HST-CRI ST HPS-T(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox<br />
NAV Deluxe, SON<br />
Comfort<br />
HSE-CRI SE HPS-E(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox<br />
NAV Deluxe, SON<br />
Comfort<br />
HST-CRI ST HPS-T(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox<br />
NAV Deluxe, SON<br />
Comfort<br />
HSE-CRI SE HPS-E(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox<br />
NAV Deluxe, SON<br />
Comfort<br />
HST-CRI ST HPS-T(DL) E40 Lucalox Classique,Vialox<br />
NAV Deluxe, SON<br />
Comfort<br />
86.7 150 2200 2 14000 13000 -<br />
88.0 250 2200 2 14000 22000 -<br />
92.0 250 2200 2 14000 23000 -<br />
90.0 400 2200 2 14000 36000 -<br />
92.5 400 2200 2 14000 37000 -<br />
PG12-I SDW-T 37.1 35 2500 1B 10000 1300 -<br />
“White” SON and Mini “White” SON<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS-<br />
T(White)<br />
PG12-I SDW-T 46.0 50 2500 1B 10000 2300 -<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS-<br />
T(White)<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 215
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- PG12-I SDW-T 50.0 100 2550 1B 10000 5000<br />
T(White)<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- GX12 SDW-TG 46.0 50 2500 1B 10000 2300<br />
T(White)<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- GX12 SDW-TG 48.0 100 2500 1B 10000 4800 -<br />
T(White)<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- E27 NHT-SDX 50.0 70 2500 1B 6000 3500 -<br />
T(White)<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- E27 NHT-SDX 50.0 100 2500 1B 6000 5000 -<br />
T(White)<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- E40 NHT-SDX 52.0 150 2500 1B 9000 7800 -<br />
T(White)<br />
HST-CRI STH HPS- E40 NHT-SDX 54.0 250 2500 1B 9000 13500 -<br />
T(White)<br />
Double ended<br />
HST-DE SD HPS- RX7s Vialox NAV-Super 91.4 70 1900 4 30000 6400 -<br />
DE(HO)<br />
HST-DE SD HPS- RX7s-24 Vialox NAV-Super 96.0 150 1900 4 30000 14400 -<br />
DE(HO)<br />
HST-DE SD HPS-DE Fc2 Vialox NAV-TS 102.0 250 2100 4 26000 25500 -<br />
HST-DE SD HPS-DE Fc2 Vialox NAV-TS 120.0 400 2100 4 26000 48000 -<br />
Low pressure sodium discharge lamps<br />
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 131.4 35 1800 - 16000 4600 -<br />
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 139.1 55 1800 - 16000 7650 -<br />
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 141.7 90 1800 - 16000 12750 -<br />
LST LS SOX BY22d SOX 163.0 135 1800 - 16000 22000 -<br />
LST-HY LSE SOX-E BY22d SOX-E 156.2 26 1800 - 16000 4060 -<br />
LST-HY LSE SOX-E BY22d SOX-E 177.8 36 1800 - 16000 6400 -<br />
LST-HY LSE SOX-E BY22d SOX-E 163.6 66 1800 - 16000 10800 -<br />
Halogen lamps<br />
Halogen reflector - dichroic mirror (12V supply)<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M265 GU4 Precise MR11,Decostar<br />
35 2900 1A 3500 - 6300<br />
CBC35/10°<br />
35S,Standardline<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M266 GU4 Precise MR11 35 2900 1A 3500 - 2070<br />
CBC35/21°<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M270 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 5l<br />
35 3100 1A 4000 2950<br />
CBC51/18°<br />
(24°),Standardline (24°)<br />
QR-CBC51/8° HRG M249 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 5l<br />
50 3100 1A 4000 8000<br />
(10°),Standardline (10°)<br />
216 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M250 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar<br />
50 3000 1A 4000 - 4750<br />
CBC51/18°<br />
51 (24°),<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M258 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 51<br />
50 3000 1A 4000 - 2100<br />
CBC51/36°<br />
(38°),Standardline<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M280 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar<br />
50 3100 1A 4000 950<br />
CBC51/60°<br />
5l,Standardline<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M271 GU5.3 Decostar 51,Standardline 35 3100 1A 4000 - 7200<br />
CBC51/10°<br />
QR-<br />
HRG M281 GU5.3 Bright MR16,Decostar 51<br />
35 3000 1A 4000 - 1300<br />
CBC51/36°<br />
(38°),Standardline<br />
Halogen reflector - aluminised (12V supply)<br />
QR-51/38° HAG M58A GU5.3 Decostar ALU 50 2950 1A 3000 - 1600<br />
QR-C51/24° HAG Black GU5.3 50 3000 1A 3500 - 3000<br />
QR-C51/24° HAG Silver GU5.3 50 3000 1A 3500 - 3000<br />
Halogen metal reflector - aluminium (12V supply)<br />
QR70/8° HMG - BA15d Halospot 70 50 3000 1A 3000 - 12500<br />
QR70/24° HMG - BA15d Halospot 70 50 3000 1A 3000 - 2600<br />
QR111/4° HMG - G53 Halospot 111 35 3000 1A 3000 - 45000<br />
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot 111 35 3000 1A 3000 - 2500<br />
QR111/8° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
50 3000 1A 3000 - 20000<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
50 3000 1A 3000 - 3500<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
QR111/8° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
75 3000 1A 3000 - 30000<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
75 3000 1A 3000 - 5300<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
QR111/45° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
75 3000 1A 3000 - 1700<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
QR111/8° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot 111 100 3000 1A 3000 - 48000<br />
QR111/24° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
100 3000 1A 3000 - 8500<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
QR111/45° HMG - G53 AR111,Halospot<br />
100 3000 1A 3000 - 2800<br />
111,ALUline PRO-111<br />
Halogen capsule (12V supply). Low pressure for use with open luminaires<br />
QT-LP 12-ax HSG - G4 Halostar,Capsuleline Pro 15.0 20 3000 1A 2000 300 -<br />
frosted<br />
QT-LP 12-ax HSG - G4 Q20T2, Halostar, 16.0 20 3000 1A 2000 320 -<br />
Capsuleline Pro<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 217
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
QT-LP 12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q20T3, Halostar, 15.0 20 3000 1A 2000 300 -<br />
Capsuleline Pro<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro 17.0 20 3000 1A 2000 340 -<br />
frosted<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Halostar,Capsuleline Pro 18.0 35 3000 1A 2000 630 -<br />
frosted<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q20T3, Halostar, 17.1 35 3000 1A 2000 600 -<br />
Capsuleline Pro<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro 19.5 50 3000 1A 2000 975 -<br />
frosted<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q50T3,Halostar,<br />
19.0 50 3000 1A 2000 950 -<br />
Capsuleline Pro<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Q75T3,Halostar,<br />
18.0 75 3000 1A 2000 1350 -<br />
Capsuleline Pro<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Halostar 20.0 90 3000 1A 4000 1800 -<br />
QT-LP12-ax HSG - GY6.35 Capsuleline Pro 22.0 100 3000 1A 2000 2200 -<br />
Halogen capsule (12V supply) for use with closed luminaires<br />
QT 12-ax HSG M75 GY6.35 M75 17.1 35 3000 1A 4000 600 -<br />
QT 12-tr HSG M32 GY6.35 M32,Halostar 17.0 50 3000 1A 3000 850 -<br />
QT 12-ax HSG M74 GY6.35 M74 18.0 50 3000 1A 4000 900 -<br />
QT 12-ax HSG M73 GY6.35 M73 18.0 75 3000 1A 4000 1350 -<br />
QT 12-tr HSG M28 GY6.35 M28 22.0 100 3000 1A 2000 2200 -<br />
QT 12-ax HSG M180 GY6.35 M180 21.5 100 3000 1A 4000 2150 -<br />
Halogen capsule (24V supply) for use with closed luminaires)<br />
QT 16-ax HSG - GY6.35 Halostar 21.3 150 3000 1A 2000 3200 -<br />
Halogen aluminised reflector (PAR)<br />
QPAR16/25° HARI - GU10 Hi-Spot 80 35 2900 1A 2000 - 800<br />
QPAR16/25° HARI - GU10 MR16, Hi-Spot<br />
50 2800 1A 2000 - 1250<br />
50,TWISTline Alu<br />
QPAR16/50° HARI - GU10 MR16,Hi-Spot<br />
50 2800 1A 2000 - 600<br />
50,TWISTline Alu<br />
QPAR20/10° HAPAR - E27 50PAR20,Halopar 20,Hi-<br />
50 2900 1A 2000 - 3000<br />
Spot 63,Halogen A<br />
QPAR20/25° HAPAR - E27 50PAR20,Halopar 20<br />
50 2900 1A 2000 - 1000<br />
(30°),Halogen A<br />
QPAR20/25° HAPAR - GU10 Hi-Spot ES63 75 2700 1A 2500 - 2500<br />
QPAR20/50° HAPAR - GU10 Hi-Spot ES63 75 2700 1A 2500 - 1000<br />
QPAR25/10° HAPAR - E27 Hi-Spot 80 50 2900 1A 2000 - 4000<br />
QPAR25/25° HAPAR - E27 Hi-Spot 80 50 2900 1A 2000 - 1100<br />
218 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
QPAR25/10° HAPAR - E27 Hi-Spot 80 75 2900 1A 2000 - 5500<br />
QPAR25/25° HAPAR - E27 75PAR25, Hi-Spot<br />
75 2900 1A 3000 - 1300<br />
80,Halogen A<br />
QPAR30/10° HAPAR - E27 75PAR30,Halopar 30,Hi-<br />
75 2900 1A 3000 - 6900<br />
Spot 95<br />
QPAR30/30° HAPAR - E27 75PAR30,Halopar 30,Hi-<br />
75 2900 1A 3000 - 2200<br />
Spot 95<br />
QPAR30S/10° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 75 2900 1A 3000 - 6500<br />
QPAR30S/30° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 75 2900 1A 3000 - 2000<br />
QPAR30/10° HAPAR - E27 100PAR30, Hi-Spot 95 100 2900 1A 3000 - 10000<br />
QPAR30/30° HAPAR - E27 100PAR30, Hi-Spot 95 100 2900 1A 3000 - 3500<br />
QPAR30S/10° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 100 2900 1A 3000 - 9000<br />
QPAR30S/30° HAPAR - E27 Halogen A 100 2900 1A 3000 - 3000<br />
Halogen dichroic reflector (PAR)<br />
QPAR- HR - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD50,TWISTline<br />
50 2700 1A 2500 - 1250<br />
CB16/25°<br />
Dich<br />
QPAR- HR - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD50,TWISTline<br />
50 2700 1A 2500 - 500<br />
CB16/50°<br />
Dich<br />
QPAR- HRG1 - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD63 75 2850 1A 2500 - 2500<br />
CB20/25°<br />
QPAR- HRG1 - GZ10 Hi-Spot ESD63 75 2850 1A 2500 - 1000<br />
CB20/50°<br />
Double ended halogen<br />
QT-DE 12 HDG K9 R7s K9,Haloline,Plusline 16.0 300 2900 1A 2000 4800 -<br />
QT-DE 12 HDG K1 R7s K1,Haloline,Plusline 19.0 500 3000 1A 2000 9500 -<br />
QT-DE 12 HDG K4 R7s K4,Haloline,Plusline 22.0 1000 3000 1A 2000 22000 -<br />
QT-DE 12 HDG K5 R7s K5,Haloline,Plusline 22.0 1500 3000 1A 2000 33000 -<br />
Single ended halogen<br />
QT-14 HS - G9 Halopin,MV Capsules 10.2 25 2900 1A 1500 255 -<br />
QT-14 HS - G9 Halopin,MV Capsules 12.3 40 2900 1A 1500 490 -<br />
QT-32 HSGT - E27 Halolux Ceram 13.7/15 60/100 2900 1A 2000 820/1500 -<br />
QT-32 HSGT - E27 Halolux Ceram 5.5/16.8 150/250 2900 1A 2000 2500\ -<br />
4200<br />
QT-18 HSGT - B15d Halolux Ceram 16.7 150 2900 1A 2000 2500 -<br />
QT HSGT M38 GY9.5 M38 17.3 300 2950 1A 2000 5200 -<br />
QT HSGT M40 GY9.5 M40 20.0 500 2950 1A 2000 10000 -<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 219
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Peak<br />
intensity<br />
cd<br />
Initial<br />
lamp<br />
lumens<br />
lm<br />
Rated<br />
life<br />
hours<br />
Colour<br />
rendering<br />
group<br />
Colour<br />
temp.<br />
K<br />
Lamp<br />
wattage<br />
W<br />
Luminous<br />
efficacy<br />
Lamp manufacturer<br />
brand names<br />
Type Designations Lamp<br />
cap<br />
LBS (ZVEI) ILCOS Previous<br />
Incandescent lamps<br />
A IA GLS E27 GLS 11.7/15 60/100 2700 1A 1000 700/1500 -<br />
Spot (mains supply, except where stated)<br />
PAR IPAR PAR38/15° E27 PAR38,Concentra Par38 120 2700 1A 2000 - 7000<br />
PAR IPAR PAR38/30° E27 PAR38,Concentra Par38 120 2700 1A 2000 - 3000<br />
PAR IPAR 12V/ GX16 PAR56 300 2700 1A - - 16000<br />
PAR56/40° terminal<br />
220 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
1B 60000 3500 -<br />
1B 60000 6000 -<br />
Induction lamps (185-255V supply)<br />
LMG-Ihf FSG1 QL - QL 63.6 55 3<br />
Choices<br />
LMG-lhf FSG1 QL - QL 70.6 85 3<br />
Choices<br />
NOTE. Values given in this table are generic and are indicative of performance for a given type of lamp. For definitive values you should refer<br />
to lamp manufacturers data.<br />
Table 9.4 Characteristic values of the major<br />
lamps
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
9.12 Energy efficiency considerations<br />
Most of the electrical power consumed by a luminaire is due to<br />
the lamp and its control gear. However this power consumption<br />
may be modified slightly by the operating conditions inside<br />
the luminaire (i.e. thermal conditions altering the operation of<br />
the lamp/ballast system). Additionally minor luminaire losses<br />
may occur due to parasitic losses from electronic control or<br />
emergency lighting capabilities of the luminaire.<br />
The energy efficiency index (EEI) classifies fluorescent lamp<br />
ballasts into seven categories as shown in Table 8.6 and is<br />
used by the industry in ballast labelling.<br />
Class Ballasts<br />
A1 Dimmable electronic ballasts<br />
A2 Reduced-loss electronic ballasts<br />
A3 Electronic ballasts<br />
B1 Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low loss ballast)<br />
B2 Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low loss ballast)<br />
C Magnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional ballast)<br />
Prohibited from sale since 21st November 2005<br />
D Magnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional ballast)<br />
Prohibited from sale since 21st May 2002<br />
Table 9.5 Fluorescent lamp ballast classifications<br />
9.13 Circuits<br />
The circuits shown in this section are generic, in that they are<br />
not specific to any manufacturer or make of control gear but<br />
serve to illustrate the principles. They are split into fluorescent<br />
and sodium/metal halide lamp circuits as these have distinct<br />
wiring and control techniques.<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 221
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Definitions<br />
Ballast<br />
The general term for control gear inserted between the mains<br />
supply and one or more discharge lamps or fluorescent lamps,<br />
which by means of inductance, capacitance or resistance,<br />
singly or in combination, serves mainly to limit the current to the<br />
lamp(s) to the required value. A ballast may also incorporate<br />
means of:<br />
Transforming the supply voltage,<br />
Providing a starting voltage,<br />
Providing a pre-heating current,<br />
Improving cold starting,<br />
Reducing stroboscopic effects,<br />
Correcting power factor,<br />
Suppressing radio interference.<br />
Ignitor<br />
A starting device, intended to generate voltage pulses to start<br />
discharge lamps, which does not provide for the pre-heating<br />
of electrodes. A basic ignitor will do this until the lamp strikes,<br />
which means that if there is a problem with the lamp or circuit<br />
that prevents the lamp starting the ignitor will continue to try<br />
to start the lamp until the circuit is turned off or potentially<br />
the ballast is damaged. Modern ignitors therefore normally<br />
incorporate anti-cycling control that can sense the normal endof–life<br />
mode of a lamp and disables the ignitor. This normally<br />
happens after the ignitor has tried to start the lamp a few times,<br />
and for metal halide lamps this is generally after approximately<br />
15 minutes. (For high pressure sodium lamps this will be after<br />
approximately five minutes)<br />
222 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Starter switch<br />
A device which initiates a surge of high voltage across the<br />
lamp.<br />
Sodium/metal halide lamp circuits<br />
Ph<br />
E<br />
Ballast<br />
A series ignitor circuit. Here the lamp is wired across the ignitor<br />
and the neutral. This type of circuit is common when using highpressure<br />
sodium and metal halide lamps.<br />
Ph<br />
E<br />
Power factor<br />
capacitor<br />
Power factor<br />
capacitor<br />
Ballast<br />
A parallel ignitor circuit. Here the lamp is wired across the<br />
ballast and the neutral in parallel with the ignitor. This type of<br />
circuit is common when using low-pressure sodium lamps.<br />
Ignitor<br />
Fig. 9.18 Series ignitor circuit<br />
Ignitor<br />
Fig. 9.19 Parallel ignitor circuit<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 223
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Fluorescent lamp circuits<br />
Ph<br />
E<br />
A circuit typical of magnetic ballast, incorporating a power<br />
factor correction capacitor and a starter. The circuit is essentially<br />
a series circuit, from the input phase through the ballast, through<br />
one end of the lamp, through the starter, through the second<br />
end of the lamp and out to neutral.<br />
Ph<br />
N<br />
Power factor<br />
capacitor<br />
A circuit typical of electronic control gear. Here no power<br />
factor capacitor or starter is required as this is dealt with by the<br />
electronics. Wiring is according to the connector designations<br />
on the ballast with the lamp being wired across the ballast.<br />
Additional control lines may be used for ballasts incorporating<br />
dimming functionality.<br />
224 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Ballast<br />
Lamp<br />
Lamp<br />
Starter<br />
Ballast<br />
Fig. 9.20 Typical magnetic ballast circuit<br />
Fig. 9.21 Electronic circuit
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Figure 8.22 shows a typical emergency lighting circuit for a<br />
maintained luminaire. Two additional components are required,<br />
an inverter and a battery pack, and the inverter controls the<br />
circuit. Under normal conditions with a mains supply present the<br />
inverter supplies the ballast with a phase supply from the mains,<br />
and the lamp is driven from the ballast, via the inverter. When<br />
the mains supply fails the lamp is driven from the inverter, which<br />
receives power from the battery pack.<br />
Ph<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Battery<br />
Ph<br />
Invertor<br />
Ballast<br />
For circuits with more than one lamp only the lamp used in<br />
emergency mode is connected to the inverter, additional<br />
lamps being connected directly to the ballast. As the ballast<br />
receives no power supply during mains failure these lamps<br />
are extinguished and again the emergency lamp is lit using a<br />
supply from the batteries via the inverter.<br />
9.14 Properties of electronic ballasts<br />
With the implementation of European Directive 2000/55/<br />
EC on energy efficiency requirements for ballasts for fluorescent<br />
lighting and the Energy using Products Directive 2005/32/<br />
EC type C and D magnetic ballasts are banned for sale within<br />
the European Union. The benefits of using electronic technology<br />
over magnetic ballasts are:<br />
• Energy savings 1. Energy costs are cut by using electronic<br />
control gear, and further savings may be made using<br />
presence detection and dimming technology to ensure<br />
that light is not wasted by lighting empty spaces or over<br />
lighting an area.<br />
Lamp<br />
Fig. 9.22 Emergency lighting circuit<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 225
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
• Energy saving 2. Using less energy reduces the heating<br />
effects in a space due to the installed lighting. This reduces<br />
the load on air-conditioning and ventilation equipment.<br />
• Fewer components. Using electronic control gear removes<br />
the need for starter switches and power factor correction<br />
capacitors.<br />
• Reduced maintenance costs. Using control gear with<br />
cathode pre-heating ensures that the length of life of lamps<br />
in a luminaire is maximised, reducing the frequency of<br />
re-lamping and therefore maintenance costs.<br />
• Flicker free light. Electronic control gear operates at high<br />
frequencies, producing flicker free light. Flicker from<br />
lights has been shown to be a cause of headaches and<br />
discomfort.<br />
• Low noise operation. Electronic control gear ensures quiet<br />
operation with quiet starting and no background hum as<br />
may be produced by magnetic gear.<br />
• Fault detection. In the event of a fault occurring in a<br />
circuit, such as a lamp failing, electronic ballasts may<br />
automatically shut off a faulty lamp, or switch off in the<br />
event of a more general fault. This prevents flickering<br />
lamps staying active or fault conditions causing a<br />
potentially dangerous situation.<br />
For control of electronic control gear for dimming etc. three<br />
main methods of control are used<br />
Analogue<br />
This uses a 1-10V analogue signal as a control input to the<br />
ballast. The main restriction on this method is interference<br />
caused by cable length or mains interference.<br />
DSI<br />
This uses an 8-bit digital signal as a control input to the ballast.<br />
The use of a digital signal helps ensure interference free reliable<br />
communications, and also helps prevent wiring faults as the<br />
digital control wires are polarity reversible, unlike an analogue<br />
input signal. Grouping of luminaires depends upon the hardwiring<br />
of the control lines.<br />
As DSI allows bidirectional communication it is possible to<br />
interrogate luminaires about their current operating state, fault<br />
conditions, etc., and to use a computer based graphical<br />
interface to control installations.<br />
226 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
DALI<br />
DALI uses a digital communications protocol but is almost a<br />
programming language for lighting control gear, allowing<br />
complete flexibility of control of lighting units. Grouping of<br />
luminaires is via software as every luminaire is individually<br />
addressable. As DALI allows bidirectional communication it is<br />
possible to interrogate luminaires about their current operating<br />
state, fault conditions, etc., and to use a computer based<br />
graphical interface to control installations.<br />
9.15 Voltage drop<br />
When designing cabling for installation of luminaires it should<br />
be remembered that there will be a voltage drop along the<br />
length of the cable. This is due to the electrical resistance of the<br />
cable and means that the voltage measured at the end of the<br />
cable will be less than that measured at the start of the cable.<br />
The voltage drop for a given current carried is related to the<br />
cable materials and manufacturing process and is therefore<br />
individual to each cable type and manufacturer. Values are<br />
normally quoted in terms of voltage drop per ampere per metre.<br />
Note that the wiring regulations give limits on permissible<br />
voltage drop.<br />
In the absence of manufacturers data the following formula for<br />
calculating voltage drop may be used.<br />
2(Ix0.0175xL)<br />
� = U<br />
A<br />
where �U is the voltage drop across the length of the cable<br />
in volts<br />
I is the current being carried by the cable in amps<br />
L is the length of the cable in metres<br />
A is the cross-sectional area of a single conductor<br />
in mm2 Note this formula is for a twin copper conductor (phase and<br />
neutral) at 15˚C.<br />
This can have a major effect upon the lighting installation as<br />
a relatively small voltage drop can reduce the light output of<br />
the luminaire or for larger voltage drops can even prevent<br />
the luminaire from operating. An effect of this, especially for<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 227
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
installations using high-pressure discharge lamps (e.g. for<br />
floodlighting), is that luminaires closer to the supply transformer<br />
may produce more light than those furthest from the transformer.<br />
To help reduce the voltage drops in an installation the following<br />
steps may be considered;<br />
• The voltage drop of a cable is related to the cable gauge<br />
or cross-sectional surface area. A cable with a larger<br />
cross-sectional area will have less voltage drop than a<br />
smaller cable.<br />
• The voltage drop of a cable is related to the length of the<br />
cable. Longer cable runs will produce a larger voltage<br />
drop. Therefore smaller cable runs should be used.<br />
• Increasing the number of transformers will allow the<br />
transformer sizes to be reduced and also allow the length<br />
of the cable runs to be reduced.<br />
• The use of lower wattage lamps or fewer luminaires on<br />
each cable run will reduce the loading on the cabling and<br />
therefore the voltage drop (as voltage drop is related to<br />
circuit current).<br />
9.16 Fusing<br />
Fuses are the simplest form of circuit protection. Whilst they<br />
have generally been replaced by electromechanical methods<br />
of protection a benefit of fuses is that they can withstand much<br />
higher fault levels than other electromechanical methods of<br />
protection.<br />
However, circuit breakers are most commonly used for<br />
protecting circuits on high voltage and low voltage circuits.<br />
For low voltage, low current applications typical of lighting<br />
installations miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) may be used to<br />
protect the final circuit. Three different categories of MCB are<br />
defined, giving different levels of performance depending upon<br />
application. These are;<br />
Type B used with resistive loads such as tungsten lighting<br />
Type C used where a mixture of light inductive and resistive<br />
loads are present<br />
Type D used where strong inductive loads such as motors or<br />
switched mode power supplies are present<br />
228 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
For lighting circuits generally type B MCBs are commonly used<br />
although type C variants may be present depending upon the<br />
application area.<br />
When a lighting circuit is switched on high transient current<br />
peaks occur due to parasitic capacitances that can accumulate<br />
with the number of luminaires. These high switch-on currents can<br />
cause problems with automatic conductor cutouts. Therefore<br />
only surge-current-proof automatic cutouts should be used for<br />
lighting systems. This is of especial concern with lighting circuits<br />
using luminaires with electronic control gear. Electronic control<br />
gear starts all lamps in a circuit simultaneously, thereby causing<br />
a higher switch-on current peak than when using a choke/<br />
starter circuit, as in a choke/starter circuit lamps do not ignite<br />
simultaneously.<br />
It should also be noted that the type of fuse used could influence<br />
the number of ballasts that may be used on one device. When<br />
using a multi-pole fuse the number of ballasts that may be<br />
connected is typically reduced by 20% compared to a single<br />
pole fuse.<br />
You should always check manufacturers literature as to how<br />
many ballasts may be connected through one device, and<br />
remember that a luminaire may contain multiple ballasts not<br />
necessarily of the same type.<br />
9.17 Wiring regulations<br />
It is of great importance that the electrical connections to any<br />
lighting equipment are correctly specified. Standards for this<br />
exist, international standards such as IEC 60364 - Low-voltage<br />
electrical installations, and local standards such as BS 7671.<br />
Previously three categories of electrical circuit were defined and<br />
lighting circuits generally fell within category 1. Now however<br />
two voltage bands have replaced these categories and<br />
generally lighting installations will fall within the requirements of<br />
voltage band II. This contains the requirements for supplies to<br />
households and most commercial and industrial installations. It<br />
should be noted that IEC 60364 and associated local versions<br />
do not apply to public street lighting installations and these are<br />
considered part of the public power gird.<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 229
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
When specifying electrical connections it is essential that the<br />
cabling used within the installation is correctly rated. Voltage<br />
rating for cables is expressed as two numbers, for example<br />
600/1000V. The first number is the maximum allowable<br />
voltage between any conductor and earth; the second<br />
number is the maximum voltage allowable between any<br />
two conductors. Extra care must be taken in situations where<br />
industrial installations use high voltages as the phase to earth<br />
voltage may exceed the rating of some cable types.<br />
Two main factors determine the specification of cabling size<br />
or cross-section; the maximum continuous current rating and<br />
the voltage drop within the circuit. The insulation material<br />
used in the cable determines the maximum continuous current<br />
rating. Electrical currents cause a heating effect in the cable<br />
conductor, and the maximum temperature rating of the insulation<br />
determines the limit on allowable current and therefore heat.<br />
When installing cable in areas with restricted airflow it is<br />
important to check with the cable manufacturers the effect this<br />
will have on the cable rating, as preventing adequate heat<br />
removal from the cable may cause the insulation to fail within<br />
the nominal cable rating.<br />
Whilst both the maximum current rating and voltage drop<br />
should be considered for all circuits generally only one of these<br />
factors will be the determining factor for cable selection. For<br />
long final circuits from a transformer or sub-main generally this<br />
is the voltage drop and this is especially true for large outdoor<br />
installations.<br />
An additional factor to consider is the degree of protection<br />
against mechanical shock required. In certain environments<br />
(such as industrial areas) the risk of mechanical damage to<br />
a cable is increased. Protection for the cable can be either<br />
through a suitable containment system such as heavy-duty<br />
trunking or conduit, or through the use of armoured cables.<br />
Glands for cable entry into electrical equipment should be of<br />
a mechanical specification suitable for the cable type. Glands<br />
for flexible cabling are normally made of nylon or plastic, whilst<br />
glands for armoured cabling are normally brass. Glands should<br />
be also specified by IP rating (ingress protection), suitable for<br />
the equipment they will be used with.<br />
230 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
When installing cables care should be taken to ensure that the<br />
minimum-bending radius quoted by the manufacturer for the<br />
cable is not exceeded, otherwise damage to the insulation and<br />
also the sheathing in multicore cables may occur. If a bend<br />
occurs close to the cable entry point into electrical equipment<br />
the cable should be firmly secured by the entry point to ensure<br />
that it is straight when passing through the cable entry gland,<br />
and that no strain is being put on the gland due to the cable<br />
bend.<br />
For electrical connections to emergency services such as<br />
emergency luminaires powered from central battery systems<br />
or luminaires with external battery packs, the wiring from the<br />
batteries to the luminaire should be with fire survival cables in<br />
separate or segregated circuits to minimise the risk of the loss<br />
of emergency lighting. Fire survival cables are defined by their<br />
resistance to fire; to fire with water and to fire with mechanical<br />
shock.<br />
9.18 Fault detection<br />
The following lists give common reasons for the failure of a<br />
lighting installation to perform to the expected level, or the<br />
failure of a luminaire to operate correctly. Note that whilst some<br />
checks do not require any specific qualifications most of these<br />
tests should only be performed by a qualified and competent<br />
person such as a commissioning engineer or where electricity is<br />
involved an appropriately qualified electrician. Lighting circuits<br />
can generate extremely high and potentially fatal voltages<br />
and access to a lighting installation may be difficult or require<br />
specialist equipment and training.<br />
When measuring lamp voltages it is essential that they are<br />
measured using a true RMS meter, as due to waveform<br />
distortion other meters may give false readings. Be aware that<br />
high intensity discharge circuits incorporating an ignitor may<br />
generate 25kV pulses at the lamp holder and that components<br />
within the ignitor can operate up to 18kV. For these circuits it<br />
is important to isolate the supply before changing the ignitor<br />
and to discharge capacitors by touching all exposed metal<br />
parts and terminals to earth using an insulated probe before<br />
commencing any examination of the circuit and components.<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 231
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
When faced with an inoperative luminaire it is usual first to replace the lamp with a new one. If the lamp has<br />
shattered or a fuse has blown it is advisable to inspect the ballast and wiring for incorrect installation or signs<br />
of overheating or damage before inserting a second lamp.<br />
Certain types of lamp must be operated with the front glass of the luminaire in position, as a possible<br />
catastrophic failure mode may cause the lamp to explode. Always check the lamp type and manufacturers<br />
recommendations before operating the lamp without the luminaire fully assembled.<br />
Lighting installation does not perform to the expected level<br />
General<br />
Have the correct luminaires and attachments been installed compared to the specification? Yes / No<br />
Are the luminaires installed at the correct mounting height? Yes / No<br />
Are the luminaires installed at the correct mounting position? Yes / No<br />
Are the luminaires correctly orientated (rotation, tilt)? For floodlights have they been installed upside-down? Yes / No<br />
Have the lamps been run for >100 hours to ensure lamp stability? Yes / No<br />
Is the quality of the electrical supply suitable (voltage, current, voltage surges or dips, harmonics)? Yes / No<br />
For high-pressure discharge lamps have they been on for > 20 minutes before measurement? Yes / No<br />
For fluorescent lamps have they been on for > 4 hours before measurement? Yes / No<br />
Is the light meter calibrated and does it have adequate accuracy of measurement? Yes / No<br />
Are the measurements being made at the correct height and orientation? Yes / No<br />
Are the measurement points correctly positioned?<br />
Interior<br />
Yes / No<br />
Is the space empty or furnished and was the scheme calculation for the same condition? Yes / No<br />
Are the surface reflection factors the same as used in the scheme calculation? Yes / No<br />
Is the ambient temperature different to that expected and is this affecting the running temperature of the lamps? Yes / No<br />
Has the protective film been removed from luminaire component such as louvres and diffusers<br />
Outdoor<br />
Yes / No<br />
Has the electrical supply cable been correctly sized? Yes / No<br />
Is the voltage and current supplied to the lamp correct? Yes / No<br />
232 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
High intensity discharge luminaire fails to operate correctly<br />
Symptom Possible cause Test and remedy<br />
Lamp does not light but Faulty lamp Test lamp in a working luminaire and replace if necessary<br />
is visibly intact<br />
Faulty lamp holder Check that the lamp is properly seated in the lamp holder(s). For high<br />
voltage lamps with non-screw thread connection check lamp holders<br />
are in sound condition. Lamp holders with pitting or corrosion must<br />
be replaced<br />
Supply interruption Check for voltage at circuit input terminals. Check any fuses and<br />
ensure cabling is correctly sized<br />
Open circuit in wiring or ballast Check for voltage at lamp holder<br />
Circuit misconnection Check that the circuit is wired in accordance with manufacturers<br />
installation instructions<br />
Ignitor fault For circuits incorporating an ignitor substitute a new ignitor<br />
End of lamp life Lamp could have developed a high striking characteristic towards the<br />
end of life. Check that the lamp has not completed a full life<br />
Insufficient re-strike time Some high intensity discharge lamps require a cooling period before<br />
they will re-ignite<br />
Poor light output End of lamp life Test lamp in a working luminaire and relate to lamp usage<br />
Outer of lamp or luminaire dirty Clean and try again<br />
Low supply voltage Test voltage applied to luminaire/circuit. Check that the ballast is<br />
correctly rated and tapped. For parallel ballast circuits check both<br />
ballasts are operating correctly<br />
Outer of lamp broken Explosion Look for obvious signs of misuse/overload on the lamp. Check that<br />
or cracked<br />
the circuit is wired correctly and suitably tapped. Check that voltage<br />
is correct. Check ballast for signs of overheating and damage to<br />
windings. If in doubt replace ballast and test for impedance before<br />
reusing the luminaire<br />
Outer of lamp broken<br />
or cracked<br />
Thermal shock Check for any internal moisture due to luminaire seals failing<br />
Mechanical damage/transit Lamps that have incurred damage during transit may operate for<br />
damage<br />
a period of time before failing due to a weakened construction.<br />
Damage and deterioration of inner lamp components should be<br />
visible after a short period of running if the outer envelope is faulty<br />
Light output unstable End of lamp life Test lamp in a working luminaire and relate to lamp usage<br />
/fluctuating<br />
Low supply voltage Check voltage applied to the luminaire<br />
Circuit misconnection Check that the circuit is wired correctly and suitably tapped. Check<br />
that there is no fault on the ballast. Check that the power factor<br />
capacitor is connected correctly<br />
Lamp holder contact Check that the lamp is properly seated in the lamp holder(s). Check<br />
for any signs of arcing. For high voltage lamps with non-screw thread<br />
connection check lamp holders are in sound condition. Lamp holders<br />
with pitting or corrosion must be replaced<br />
Light output unstable Supply voltage dip Lamp extinction could be associated with sudden dips in supply<br />
/fluctuating<br />
voltage, possibly caused by switching of heavy loads<br />
Lamp orientation Some lamps are sensitive to burning position. Check lamp is<br />
orientated according to manufacturers recommendations<br />
Lamp extinguishing Temperature Check ballast operating temperature. Ballast may incorporate a<br />
thermal cut-out<br />
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits | 233
Lamps, LEDs and Circuits<br />
Fluorescent tube luminaire fails to operate correctly<br />
Symptom Possible cause Test and remedy<br />
Tube does not attempt Fuse blown Check for voltage at circuit input terminals<br />
to strike – no end glow<br />
from tube<br />
Faulty starter (non-electronic<br />
control gear)<br />
Insert starter switch in working luminaire<br />
Faulty tube Insert tube into working luminaire. NOTE if one or more of the<br />
cathodes are broken check for faulty wiring (short circuit to earth or<br />
wrong control gear) before inserting a new tube<br />
Open circuit Test for open circuit on control gear or short to earth between control<br />
gear and tube<br />
Tube fails to strike – Crossed leads in twin lamp Check that the correct lamp holders are connected to each tube<br />
bright glow from one luminaires<br />
end of the tube<br />
Short circuit on lamp holder Test for short circuit across lamp holder lead or for short circuit to<br />
earth on wiring<br />
Short circuit on tube Test for internal short circuits on cathode of tube<br />
Tube does not attempt Short circuit on starter switch or Test starter switch in working luminaire. If satisfactory test starter<br />
to strike – bright glow associated wiring (non-electronic switch socket and associated wiring<br />
from both ends of<br />
the tube<br />
control gear)<br />
Tube flashes on and Faulty tube (end of life) Test tube in working luminaire. At end of life other symptoms are<br />
off – fails to maintain<br />
reduced light output, increased flicker and reddish glow from<br />
discharge<br />
cathodes<br />
Low voltage Test voltage at terminal block of luminaire. If low check external<br />
wiring for excessive voltage drop<br />
Faulty starter (non-electronic<br />
control gear)<br />
Test starter switch on working luminaire<br />
Low temperature Screen open type luminaires<br />
Crossed leads in twin lamp<br />
luminaires<br />
Check that the correct lamp holders are connected to each tube<br />
Ballast overheats Lack of ventilation Check installation of luminaire to manufacturers recommendations<br />
Supply volts high Check supply voltage<br />
Fault in ballast Replace ballast<br />
It should be noted that some types of electronic control gear will<br />
detect fault conditions and prevent any attempt to start the lamp.<br />
If the lamp fails to start the lamp, ballast or wiring could be<br />
faulty and should be checked.<br />
234 | Lamps, LEDs and Circuits
10.0 Standards and Directives<br />
10.1 Directives<br />
Directives are European laws that apply to all EU member<br />
states. Directives that follow Article 175 permit member states<br />
some local variation, but directives that follow Article 95 apply<br />
equally and unaltered to all member states.<br />
CE Marking<br />
The CE mark signifies that a product conforms to the<br />
requirements of relevant EEC directives. The prime purpose of<br />
the mark is to assist customs and market inspectors in facilitating<br />
the free trading and movement of products within the EEC.<br />
Some of the directives appropriate to general lighting products<br />
are the Low Voltage Directive (LVD), the Electromagnetic<br />
Compatibility (EMC) Directive and the Energy Efficiency<br />
(Ballasts for Fluorescent Lighting) Directive. CE marking is<br />
compulsory to indicate LVD, EMC and Ballast Efficiency<br />
conformity.<br />
Low Voltage Directive (LVD)<br />
Low Voltage directive for selling safe products. This demands<br />
that products are designed, manufactured and tested to give<br />
proof of electrical safety. Conformity to EN 60598 guarantees<br />
compliance.<br />
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC)<br />
The ElectroMagnetic Compatibility directive requires that<br />
the product are designed and operate so that they meet<br />
limits of electrical and magnetic interference by emission<br />
and conduction with other electrical devices. Also requires<br />
that adequate capacity is built in for immunity (rejection) to<br />
interference imposed by other electrical devices upon the<br />
lighting product. Conformity can be verified by the appropriate<br />
IEC standard.<br />
WEEE Directive<br />
Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic<br />
equipment (WEEE) is an Article 175 directive and defines<br />
requirements and responsibilities for the management of waste<br />
lighting equipment within the European Union. This places<br />
responsibility for managing waste on the producer, reseller (in<br />
cases of re-branded product) or importer of the product. To fulfil<br />
these obligations many lighting companies have registered<br />
with third party recycling companies who then take on the<br />
Standards and Directives | 235
Standards and directives<br />
responsibility of handling the electrical waste. If a company<br />
has not done this then they are themselves responsible for the<br />
recovery and handling of their waste products. Irrespective of<br />
the method of waste management, lighting products should<br />
be marked with the symbol shown to indicate that it may not<br />
be disposed of as unsorted waste. Therefore when purchasing<br />
lighting products it is important to ascertain how these products<br />
will be managed at their end of life, and when removing lighting<br />
units it must be ensured that they are handled separately and<br />
the appropriate company is contacted to remove the product.<br />
RoHS Directive<br />
Directive 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain<br />
hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment<br />
is and article 95 directive, and products purchased within the<br />
European Union must conform to these restrictions. However<br />
certain exemptions exist including mercury in lamps, lead in<br />
the glass of fluorescent tubes and nickel cadmium in batteries<br />
for emergency lighting products. However these exempted<br />
items are still required to be correctly disposed of. Therefore<br />
when purchasing exempted items it is important to ascertain<br />
how these items will be managed at their end of life, and<br />
when removing exempted items it must be ensured that they are<br />
handled separately and the appropriate company is contacted<br />
to remove the product. (Note that when removing complete<br />
light fittings it is generally not necessary to separate out lamps,<br />
batteries, etc. This will be performed within the overall waste<br />
management process).<br />
Other Directives<br />
Other important European energy efficiency directives are;<br />
EELP Energy Efficiency Labelling of Product directive<br />
This requires that manufacturers add an energy class<br />
label to relevant products (fluorescent lamp and<br />
ballast)<br />
EPB Energy Performance of Buildings directive<br />
This requires that an estimate of the energy<br />
requirements of a building and its services is made.<br />
This is displayed using a label with energy details.<br />
This applies both for existing buildings and new<br />
buildings which must pass design criteria during the<br />
planning permission process for approval to build.<br />
236 | Standards and Directives
Standards and directives<br />
EuP Ecodesign of Energy-using Products directive<br />
The aim of this directive is to reduce the consumption<br />
of natural resources and energy, and to minimise<br />
environmental impacts of products across the whole<br />
of their life cycle. Manufacturers must practice<br />
ecodesign, give instruction on correct and efficient<br />
product use and limit power consumption including<br />
that by stand-by devices<br />
10.2 Standards<br />
A variety of documents exist to ensure a product conforms to<br />
relevant directives and safety requirements. Some of the relevant<br />
standards are listed in Table 10.1.<br />
Subject European Standard International<br />
Standard<br />
Luminaires – General requirements and tests EN 60598-1<br />
Luminaires – General types EN 60598 2-1 IEC 60598-2-1<br />
Luminaires – Recessed EN 60598 2-2 IEC 60598-2-2<br />
Luminaires – Street lighting EN 60598 2-3 IEC 60598-2-3<br />
Luminaires – Floodlights EN 60598 2-5 IEC 60598-2-5<br />
Luminaires – with transformers EN 60598-2-6 IEC 60598-2-6<br />
Luminaires – Air handling EN 60598 2-19 IEC 60598-2-19<br />
Luminaires – Emergency EN 60598 2-22 IEC 60598-2-22<br />
Luminaires Track systems EN 60570 IEC 60570<br />
Photometric Measurements CIE 24/CIE 27<br />
Photometry and data transfer EN 10302-1: 2004<br />
Photometry for workplace luminaires EN 10302-2: 2004<br />
Photometry for emergency luminaires EN 13032-3: 2007<br />
EMC Emissions-Lighting EN 55015 CISPR 15<br />
EMC Immunity-Lighting EN 61547 IEC 61547<br />
Quality Systems EN ISO 9000 ISO 9000<br />
Emergency Lighting EN 1838<br />
Electronic transformers for lamps<br />
Safety<br />
EN 61347-2-2 IEC 61347-2-2<br />
Electronic transformers for lamps<br />
Performance<br />
EN 61047 IEC 61047<br />
Safety isolating transformers EN 60742 IEC 742<br />
Lighting Columns EN 40<br />
Standards and Directives | 237
Standards and directives<br />
Application<br />
Lighting of workplaces – indoor workplaces EN 12464-1: 2003<br />
Lighting of workplaces – outdoor workplaces EN 12464-2: 2007 CIE S 015/E:2005<br />
Light and lighting – Sports lighting EN 12193:1999<br />
Emergency lighting EN 1838 CIE S 020/E:2007<br />
Emergency lighting – testing and inspection EN 50172: 2004<br />
Road lighting practice EN 13201-1/4: 2004<br />
Energy performance of buildings, lighting EN 15193: 2007<br />
Radiation exposure limits EN 14255<br />
Maintenance of indoor electric lighting CIE 97.2<br />
Lighting education CIE 99<br />
Discomfort glare in interior lighting UGR CIE 117<br />
Obtrusive light CIE 150<br />
Maintenance of outdoor electric lighting CIE 154<br />
ENEC Marking<br />
For luminaires and lighting components, European<br />
harmonisation of national approval marks has been achieved<br />
through introduction of the ENEC mark. The ENEC mark may<br />
be awarded by any one of the recognised European approval<br />
authorities, such as BSI, VDE or SEMKO, in the same way as a<br />
national approval mark. ENEC is important however, because<br />
it indicates that the product is suitable for use throughout Europe<br />
and that all of the most onerous special national conditions of<br />
test standards have been complied with.<br />
EN40<br />
When designing an exterior lighting installation it must be<br />
ensured that the lighting columns are not only strong enough to<br />
support the weight of the equipment attached to them but are<br />
also strong enough to withstand the more significant loading<br />
effect from wind pressure against the project area of the<br />
complete structure. In Europe document EN40 is used to check<br />
suitability, allowing the structure to be verified against statistical<br />
data for a geographical area and thereby ensuring that the<br />
column can withstand the wind conditions. The calculation<br />
process takes into account variables such as the height of the<br />
site above local ground level, the height above sea level,<br />
the distance from the coastline and the degree of shelter<br />
provided by local obstructions and features as all of these<br />
238 | Standards and Directives<br />
Table 10.1 Selection of relevant standards<br />
12
Standards and directives<br />
cause variations in the wind pressure at the location. It must<br />
be emphasised that the calculation process is for the complete<br />
system, including the column and all equipment attached to<br />
it (luminaires, brackets, etc.) so a column cannot be certified<br />
in isolation. It should also be noted that a CE mark cannot be<br />
applied to a column in isolation, but applies to the complete<br />
system.<br />
10.3 Quality and safety marks<br />
It is important that a product is suitable for the method of<br />
installation, environmental conditions and usage it will<br />
encounter. Some safety consideration and markings are given<br />
below.<br />
Quality Standard Marks (Kite Marks)<br />
A third party approval is an independent endorsement that<br />
product design is in accordance with published standards, and<br />
that controls to maintain quality in manufacture are applied.<br />
Many products carry European Test House approvals such<br />
as those shown. This can assist wider market acceptance in<br />
Europe.<br />
Electrical safety classification<br />
Class I<br />
Luminaires in this class are electrically insulated and provided<br />
with a connection to earth. Earthing protects exposed metal<br />
parts that could become live in the event of basic insulation<br />
failure.<br />
Class II<br />
Luminaires in this class are designed and constructed so<br />
that protection against electric shock does not rely on basic<br />
insulation only. This can be achieved by means of reinforced or<br />
double insulation. No provision for earthing is provided.<br />
Class III<br />
Here protection against electric shock relies on supply at Safety<br />
Extra - Low Voltage (SELV) and in which voltages higher than<br />
those of SELV are not generated (max. 50V ac rms).<br />
Standards and Directives | 239
Standards and directives<br />
F mark<br />
F mark (mounting surface)<br />
Luminaires suitable for mounting on normally combustible<br />
surfaces (ignition temperature at least 200°C) are marked with<br />
the ‘F’ symbol.<br />
F mark (Thermal Insulation Covering)<br />
Recessed luminaires suitable for covering in the ceiling void with<br />
thermal insulating material (without causing overheating to the<br />
luminaire) are marked with this variation of the F mark symbol.<br />
Ingress Protection<br />
The ingress protection (IP) code denotes the protection against<br />
dust, solid objects and moisture provided by the luminaire<br />
enclosure. If no code is marked the luminaire is deemed to be<br />
IP20.<br />
First digit of code denotes protection<br />
against dust and solid objects<br />
240 | Standards and Directives<br />
Second digit of code denotes<br />
protection against moisture<br />
IP2X No entry of standard test finger to live parts IPX0 No special protection<br />
IP3X No entry of 2.5mm ø probe to live parts IPX1 Protection against drops of condensed water<br />
IP4X No entry of 1mm ø probe to live parts IPX2 Drip-proof (vertical falling drops of liquid)<br />
IP5X Dust proof. (no dust deposit around live parts) IPX3 Rain-proof (rain up to angles of 60°)<br />
IP6X Dust tight (no dust entry) IPX4 Splash proof (spray from any angle)<br />
IPX5 Water jet<br />
IPX6 Heavy downpours<br />
IPX7 Temporary immersion<br />
IPX8 Submersion to declared depth<br />
ATEX classification<br />
The IP rating is not sufficient as a safety criterion in areas with<br />
particularly hazardous or explosive atmospheres. Equipment<br />
for use in these environments is classified according to the<br />
expected conditions using the ATEX group category, as shown<br />
in Table 10.3.<br />
Table 10.2 IP Code
Standards and directives<br />
ATEX<br />
category<br />
Equivalent<br />
zonal<br />
classification<br />
1 Zone 0 (gas)<br />
Zone 20 (dust)<br />
2 Zone 1 (gas)<br />
Zone 21 (dust<br />
3 Zone2 (gas)<br />
Zone 22 (dust)<br />
Level of<br />
protection<br />
provided<br />
Ta classification<br />
Denotes the maximum ambient temperature in which the<br />
luminaire is suitable for use. No ta mark indicates suitable for<br />
use in maximum 25°C ambient.<br />
750°/850°/950° hot wire<br />
Abbreviation for compliance with glow wire test for plastic parts<br />
tested at the stated temperature.<br />
Impact Resistance<br />
The use of Joules (Newton metres - Nm) has been common<br />
for many years. More recently an IK rating normally used for<br />
electrical enclosures and cabinets (EN50102:1995) has<br />
emerged as manufacturers apply it to their luminaires, as they<br />
also enclose electrical circuits. Table 10.4 compares both<br />
ratings:<br />
Environmental conditions for use<br />
Very high An explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is continuously<br />
present or present for long periods (> 1000 hours/year)<br />
High An explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is likely to be<br />
present (between 10 and 1000 hours/year)<br />
Normal An explosive atmosphere of gas/vapour/haze/dust is unlikely to<br />
occur or could occur for a short period (< 10 hours/year)<br />
Table 10.3 ATEX classifications<br />
IK rating IK01 IK02 IK03 IK04 IK05 IK06 IK07 IK08 IK09 IK10<br />
Joules of<br />
energy<br />
0.15j 0.23j 0.35j 0.5j 0.7j 1.0j 2.0j 5.0j 10.0j 20. 0j<br />
Table 10.4 Comparison of impact resistance<br />
ratings<br />
Standards and Directives | 241
Standards and directives<br />
10.4 Product/corrosion compatibility guide<br />
When designing an installation in an area that is potentially<br />
harmful due to concentrations of chemicals in the atmosphere<br />
care must be taken to ensure that the materials used in the<br />
construction of the luminaire are suitable for the environment it<br />
is being used in. Different materials have differing tolerances to<br />
chemical agents and all materials used in the luminaire need to<br />
be considered.<br />
Table 10.5 gives information on six luminaires suitable for use<br />
in chemically hazardous areas. This information is provided to<br />
give guidance about luminaire selection assuming prolonged<br />
exposure to potentially aggressive chemicals or atmospheres.<br />
Occasional exposure to low concentrations of potential<br />
aggressors is unlikely to be harmful to any of these luminaires.<br />
The risk of damage to the luminaires is dependent on the<br />
concentration of the aggressor, the duration and frequency of<br />
exposure and environmental conditions. If there is any doubt<br />
about the suitability of a luminaire for a particular application<br />
please enquire with details of the chemicals that will be present<br />
and the conditions of use.<br />
242 | Standards and Directives
Standards and directives<br />
Chemical<br />
Type<br />
Chemicals Specific ImpactForce CorrosionForce ColdForce HeatForce StormForce StormForce<br />
GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body<br />
PC diffuser PMMA diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PMMA diffuser<br />
Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
toggle<br />
toggle toggle toggle toggle<br />
Acids acetic
Standards and directives<br />
Chemical<br />
Type<br />
Building<br />
materials,<br />
paints<br />
Oils, fats<br />
fuels<br />
Disinfectants,<br />
cleaning<br />
agents<br />
244 | Standards and Directives<br />
Chemicals Specific ImpactForce CorrosionForce ColdForce HeatForce StormForce StormForce<br />
GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body GRP body<br />
PC diffuser PMMA diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PC diffuser PMMA diffuser<br />
Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
Stainless<br />
toggle<br />
emulsion paints water<br />
based<br />
Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
oil based paint Y Y<br />
white spirit/turps<br />
substitute<br />
Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
cement Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
mineral oils Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
animal fats (cold) but<br />
not pork<br />
Y Y<br />
silicone oil Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
diesel Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
kerosene/paraffin oil Y Y<br />
petroleum spirit/<br />
petroleum ether<br />
Y Y Y Y Y Y<br />
hydrogen peroxide<br />
11 Tools<br />
11.1 Tools<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Product Explorer<br />
The <strong>Thorn</strong> Product Explorer is available on DVD. It features an<br />
electronic catalogue with an intuitive user interface including<br />
powerful search functions, and can be used as a data plug-in<br />
for the programs DIALux and Relux Professional to allow lighting<br />
calculations to be performed using <strong>Thorn</strong> data within these<br />
popular design tools. Copies of the Product Explorer may be<br />
obtained from your local <strong>Thorn</strong> representative or downloaded<br />
from your local <strong>Thorn</strong> web-site as shown on the back of the<br />
handbook.<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> CalcExpress<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> CalcExpress is a one-click interior design facility<br />
that allows quick design of lighting installations for simple<br />
rectangular spaces. It is integrated within the <strong>Thorn</strong> Product<br />
Explorer and an on-line version is being produced for use over<br />
the Internet.<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Electronic Catalogue<br />
The <strong>Thorn</strong> Electronic Catalogue allows you to browse the<br />
complete <strong>Thorn</strong> product portfolio on-line over the internet. For<br />
each product information may be downloaded, from installation<br />
sheets to photometric data. Additional links with Dialux and<br />
Relux allow “drag and drop” functionality into these popular<br />
design tools.<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> CRF Indicator<br />
This simple to use do-it-yourself tool can indicate how effectively<br />
the lighting scheme in an office or lecture room minimises<br />
unwanted shiny reflections that reduces the contrast of printed or<br />
written visual tasks. The higher the contrast the better you see.<br />
Rather like using a barometer to judge the weather this measure<br />
looks at the lighting from a human dimension that will benefit<br />
the owner and occupier alike.<br />
Tools | 245
Tools<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong>QE<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong>QE is a software tool for Quick and Easy design of<br />
interior, area and road lighting schemes using <strong>Thorn</strong> products<br />
for standard design criteria. Reports may be customised with<br />
specific company details. This software enables product<br />
selection, lighting design and reporting of results to be<br />
performed from one simple process.<br />
<strong>Thorn</strong> Primata Configurator<br />
Pre-wired trunking systems save time and money. They are<br />
increasingly popular in today’s cost-sensitive market because<br />
they are quick and easy to assemble, and simple to install<br />
without special tools Primata II is a pre-wired continuous row<br />
system with a comprehensive selection of fluorescent luminaires<br />
and various optics.<br />
The Primata II configurator allows definition of Primata II<br />
products required in an installation. It produces a bill of<br />
materials for Primata II installations and automatically includes<br />
ancillary equipment such as couplers, end-caps, grommets, etc.<br />
DIALux<br />
DIALux is an independent and manufacturer-neutral third<br />
party software available free of charge. It is available in 26<br />
languages (at present). As well as allowing calculation of<br />
lighting design parameters it also allows import and export to<br />
and from CAD programmes in .dxf and .dwg format, photo<br />
realistic visualization and creation of photo realistic films to help<br />
present a design<br />
http://www.dial.de/<br />
Relux<br />
The Relux Professional calculation and light design program is<br />
an independent and manufacturer-neutral third party software<br />
available free of charge. It is available in many languages. As<br />
well as allowing calculation of lighting design parameters it<br />
also allows the import of 2D and 3D objects in dxf, vrml, 3ds<br />
and wmf format and has several add-on tools to extend the<br />
functionality of the program.<br />
http://www.relux.biz/<br />
246 | Tools
Tools<br />
Lighting Reality<br />
Lighting Reality is an independent and manufacturer neutral<br />
exterior calculation and lighting design program. It contains<br />
data from many manufacturers including <strong>Thorn</strong> Lighting and<br />
allows designs to be produced conforming to BS, EN and<br />
IESNA criteria.<br />
AGI32<br />
AGI32 is a comprehensive lighting calculation and rendering<br />
software for both interior and exterior schemes, with or without<br />
daylight. AGI32 incorporates an integrated model builder<br />
capable of constructing almost any architectural environment<br />
and 3D CAD geometry may be imported via the DXF and<br />
DWG file formats. AGI32 uses the IESNA photometric file<br />
format and files in this format may be extracted from the <strong>Thorn</strong><br />
Product Explorer or on-line using the <strong>Thorn</strong> electronic catalogue.<br />
Tools | 247
12 Glossary<br />
Ballast<br />
Ballasts are electrical devices used with fluorescent or high<br />
intensity discharge (HID) lamps to supply sufficient voltage to<br />
start and operate the lamp but then to limit the current during<br />
operation. They can be either magnetic or electronic.<br />
Batten and trunking systems<br />
These are generally fitted with fluorescent lamps and are<br />
primarily used in commercial and industrial environments.<br />
Designed either as surface-mounted or pendant units, they are<br />
generally simple to install and can be used singly or as strip<br />
lighting. Suitable housings ensure that the light is directed as<br />
required and that glare is kept to a minimum.<br />
Carbon dioxide (CO 2 )<br />
An important greenhouse gas. Countries that ratified the Kyoto<br />
agreement have committed to reduce their emissions. Lighting<br />
designers have the power to hold down CO2 emissions into the<br />
atmosphere, the amount of CO2 being dependant upon the fuel<br />
used for the production of electricity.<br />
Colour Appearance<br />
The colour emitted by a near-white light source can be<br />
indicated by its correlated colour temperature (CCT). Each lamp<br />
type has a specific correlated colour temperature measured<br />
in degrees Kelvin e.g. 3000K and are described as warm,<br />
intermediate, cool and cold.<br />
Colour Rendering<br />
The ability of a light source to reveal the colours of an object. It<br />
is determined by the spectral power distribution or spectrum of<br />
the light source. Measured by the colour rendering index (Ra).<br />
The higher the number the better, up to a maximum of 100.<br />
Control gear<br />
Most artificial light sources other than incandescent lamps<br />
require special control gear to start the lamp and control the<br />
current after starting. Depending on the type of lamp involved,<br />
the control gear can take the form of ballasts, ignitors or<br />
transformers.<br />
248 | Glossary
Glossary<br />
Diffusers and moisture-proof fittings<br />
Luminaires of a higher protection class. These are closed<br />
luminaires for humid, wet, chemically aggressive or dusty<br />
environments where the requirements for glare control are<br />
generally rudimentary.<br />
Digital Serial Interface (DSI)<br />
A lighting control protocol created by the Zumtobel Group,<br />
for applications where the addressing feature of DALI is not<br />
required.<br />
Downlight<br />
Ceiling luminaire that concentrates the light in a downward<br />
direction. Downlights are generally round or square and<br />
recessed into the ceiling, but may also be surface-mounted.<br />
They may feature an open reflector and/or a shielding device.<br />
Columns<br />
Poles for mounting roadlighting lanterns or floodlights. Also<br />
known as “masts” and “towers”.<br />
Contrast<br />
Subjective experience of comparative brightness between points<br />
or areas of luminance, seen simultaneously or successively.<br />
Contrast Rendering Factor (CRF)<br />
A measure of the degradation of contrast that is caused by<br />
veiling reflections (bright reflections in the task).<br />
Digital Addressable Lighting Interface (DALI)<br />
A lighting control protocol set out in the technical standard IEC<br />
929<br />
Efficacy<br />
Measured in lumens per Watt (lm/W) and a useful parameter<br />
for assessing how much light is available from the lamp for<br />
each Watt of power. Luminaire efficacy is often expressed by<br />
dividing the initial lamp lumens by the combined lamp and<br />
control gear power.<br />
Emergency lighting<br />
Lighting provided for use when the mains supply for the general<br />
lighting fails for whatever reason.<br />
Glossary | 249
Glossary<br />
Glare<br />
Glare is the result of excessive contrasts of luminance in the<br />
field of view. The effect may vary from mild discomfort to an<br />
actual impairment of the ability to see. When the ability to<br />
see is impaired this is called disability glare. Discomfort glare<br />
is associated more with interiors; it refers to the discomfort or<br />
distraction caused by bright windows or luminaires.<br />
High bay<br />
As the term implies, these are for use when mounting heights of<br />
around 8-10m or above are encountered.<br />
High frequency electronic control gear (HF)<br />
Most artificial light sources other than incandescent lamps<br />
require special control gear to start the lamp and control the<br />
current after starting. HF electronic gear operates fluorescent<br />
tube(s) at high frequency (typically at 30-60 kHz) instead of the<br />
mains frequency of 50 Hz offering benefits of higher quality<br />
lighting, reduced running costs and ease of use, combined with<br />
safe reliable operation. Dimmable versions available. They may<br />
also be used with high intensity discharge lamps.<br />
Ignitor<br />
Ignitors are required for lamps that cannot be started using the<br />
normal line voltage alone. This is the case with high-pressure<br />
discharge lamps such as metal halide lamps and high-pressure<br />
sodium vapour lamps.<br />
Illuminance (lx)<br />
The amount of light falling on an area divided by that area -<br />
measured in lx. Generally, 500 lx is needed for office work,<br />
whereas a watchmaker requires 4,000 lx. In summer, the<br />
sun shines on the ground with 120,000 lx, and a full moon<br />
produces 3 lx.<br />
Indirect Lighting<br />
System of illumination where the light from lamps and luminaires<br />
is first reflected from a ceiling, wall or secondary optic.<br />
Ingress protection (IP)<br />
Denotes the protection against entry of dust/solid objects and<br />
moisture/water, provided by the luminaire enclosure.<br />
250 | Glossary
Glossary<br />
Lamp<br />
Lamps are artificial sources of light. There are many types,<br />
distinguished by the way they generate light, their light output or<br />
luminous flx, their power consumption, their luminous efficiency,<br />
their geometry, the spectral composition of the radiation<br />
emitted, their luminance and their beam characteristics.<br />
LED/light-emitting diode<br />
An LED or light-emitting diode is a small semiconductor device<br />
which emits light, usually coloured, when an electric current<br />
passes through it. LEDs are energy saving and have a long<br />
service life. LED light engines can generate any colour by<br />
mixing the individual spectral<br />
Lighting control system<br />
Lighting control systems are used to actively change the lighting<br />
situation. Such changes can take place automatically or as a<br />
result of intervention by a user. Lighting control systems often<br />
include operating equipment. Lighting can automatically<br />
respond to the level of daylight, it can be controlled by<br />
presence sensors to switch on or off depending whether people<br />
are in the room or can also progress through a sequence of<br />
changing scenarios.<br />
Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI)<br />
Defined in the European standard for assessing the Energy<br />
Performance of Buildings (EPBD), EN 15193 as the measure<br />
for the annual lighting energy requirement for the building per<br />
square metre. The quick method of calculation being:<br />
LENI = W/A<br />
W is the total annual energy used for<br />
lighting {kWh/year}<br />
A is the total useful floor area of the building {m²}<br />
Lighting management<br />
Lighting management covers the entire concept of a controlled<br />
or regulated lighting system including emergency lighting and its<br />
use. As well as permitting efficient, user-focused operation of the<br />
lighting system, it also allows it to be monitored, thus facilitating<br />
maintenance.<br />
Glossary | 251
Glossary<br />
Light Output Ratio (LOR)<br />
The ratio of the total light output of the luminaire to the output of<br />
the lamp(s), under stated conditions.<br />
Low bay<br />
Luminaires housing high intensity discharge lamps mounted<br />
horizontally at low heights 4-8m, typically in industrial, sporting<br />
and public concourses.<br />
Lumen (lm)<br />
The unit of luminous flx or the rate of flow of light from a source<br />
or received by a surface. When a ray of light hits a solid<br />
surface, the process is known as illumination.<br />
Luminaire<br />
Modern term for “light fitting” or “fixture”. A complete lighting<br />
unit that controls the distribution of light given by a lamp(s).<br />
Includes components for fixing and protecting the lamp(s) and<br />
for connecting them to the supply circuit. Luminaires for road<br />
lighting are often known as lanterns.<br />
Luminaire-lumens per circuit watt<br />
Is the luminaire efficiency factor given by LOR x (total bare lamp<br />
flx in the luminaire/circuit Watts).<br />
Luminance (cd/m 2 )<br />
The measured brightness of a surface. The unit is cd/m².<br />
Luminous intensity (candelas)<br />
The amount of light that a small light source at the tip of a cone<br />
emits through a narrow cone in a given direction.<br />
Lux (lx)<br />
The unit of illuminance, equal to one lumen per square metre.<br />
Modelling<br />
The use of light to bring out the form of three-dimensional<br />
objects, structures or spaces.<br />
Optic<br />
The reflector and/or refractor system that directs the light<br />
emission from the lamp in the luminaire into required directions.<br />
252 | Glossary